You are on page 1of 274

What is SAP Landscape?

By: Kunal
Landscape is like a server system or like a layout oI the servers or some may even call
it the architecture oI the server viz. SAP is divided into three diIIerent landscapes
DEV, QAS and PROD.
O DEV would have multiple clients Ior ex: 190- Sandbox, 100- Golden, and 180-
Unit Test.
O QAS may again have multiple clients Ior ex: 300- Integration Test, 700 to 710
Training.
O PROD may have something like a 200 Production.
These names and numbers are the implementer's discreet on how they want it or they
have been using in their previous implementations or how is the client's business
scenario.
Now whatever you do in the Sandbox doesn't aIIect the other servers or clients.
Whenever you think you are satisIied with your conIiguration and you think you can
use it moving Iorward, you RE-DO it in the golden client (remember, this is a very
neat and clean client and you cannot use it Ior rough usage). As you re-do everything
that you had thought was important and usable, you get a transport request pop up
upon saving every time. You save it under a transport request and give your
description to it. Thus the conIiguration is transported to the Unit Test client (180 in
this example).
You don't run any transaction or even use the SAP Easy Access screen on the 100
(golden) client. This is a conIiguration only client. Now upon a successIul transport
by the Basis guy, you have all the conIiguration in the Testing client, iust as it is in the
Golden client. The conIiguration remains in sync between these two clients.
But in the Testing client you cannot even access SPRO (Display IMG) screen. It's a
transaction only client where you perIorm the unit test. Upon a satisIactory unit test,
you move the good conIiguration to the next SERVER (DEV). The incorrect or
unsatisIactory conIiguration is corrected in Golden (may again as well be practiced in
the sandbox prior to Golden) and accordingly transported back to 180 (Unit Test) until
the unit test aIIected by that particular conIiguration is satisIactory.
The Golden client remains the 'database' (iI you want to call it that) or you may rather
call it the 'ultimate' reIerence client Ior all the good, complete and Iinal conIiguration
that is being used in the implementation.
n summary:
Landscape: is the arrangement Ior the servers
IDES : is purely Ior education purpose and is NOT INCLUDED in the landscape.
DEVELOPMENT ---~ QUALITY ----~ PRODUCTION
DEVELOPMENT: is where the consultants do the customization as per the company's
requirement.
QUALITY: is where the core team members and other members test the
customization.
PRODUCTION: is where the live data oI the company is recorded.
A request will Ilow Irom Dev-~Qual-~Prod and not backwards.
1. Sandbox server: In the initial stages oI any implementation proiect, you are
given a sandbox server where you do all the conIiguration/customization as per
the company`s business process.
2. Development Server: - Once the BBP gets signed oII, the conIiguration is done
is development server and saved in workbench requests, to be transported to
Production server.
3. Production Server: This is the last/ most reIined client where the user will work
aIter proiect GO LIVE. Any changes/ new development is done is development
client and the request is transported to production.
These three are landscape oI any Company. They organized their oIIice in these three
ways. Developer develops their program in Development server and then transports it
to test server. In testing server tester check/test the program and then transport it to
Production Server. Later it will deploy to client Irom production server.
O Presentation Server- Where SAP GUI has.
O Application Server - Where SAP Installed.
O Database Server - Where Database installed.

What is the meaning of "R" in R/3 systems?
R/3 stands Ior real-time three tier architecture. This is the kind oI architecture SAP
R/3 system has.
R/3 means three layers are installed in DiIIerent system/server and they are connected
with each other.
1) Presentation
2) Application
3) Database
Why do we call client 000 as golden client?
Golden client contains all the conIiguration data and master data so some extent. All
the conIiguration settings are done in golden clients and then moved to other clients.
Hence this client acts as a master record Ior all transaction settings, hence the name
"Golden Client".
Successfully mplementing SAP
Implementing a package can be a traumatic aIIair Ior both the customer and the
vendor. Get it wrong and the vendor may get paid late or have to resort to lawyers to
get paid and tarnish their reputation. For the company the new package may not
work the way they expected, be late or cost a more than budgeted Ior and take
management will take their eye oII running their business.
Recently a client asked me what I would consider to be the Iive most important things
one should consider beIore embarking on an implementation. This isn't a simple
question, although there are many Iactors to think about aIter some consideration Ior
me the top Iive are way ahead oI the others.
My top Iive Iactors to consider would be:
1. Set up a Proiect Board,
2. Secure the resources,
3. Complete the GAP Analysis,
4. Have detailed Cut Over Plans,
5. Train the users.
Taking each one in turn:
%he Project Board
The correct set up and operation oI the Proiect Board in my view is maior Iactor in the
success Iailure oI the proiect. The Proiect Board will consist oI the stakeholders, key
users and the vendor. The Proiect Board is part oI the governance oI the proiect.
The Proiect Board will meet regularly to ensure that the proiect plans are created and
being executed as planned, moves Irom stage to stage with all the deliverables being
signed oII is resourced properly.
%he Resources
Three types oI resources are absolutely necessary -- end users, change team and
technicians.
Early involvement by the end users is absolutely necessary, as they will be the ones
living with the system Ior hopeIully many years to come. They will want to Ieel
involved in its implementation. Buy in Irom the end users oI the system is absolutely
essential iI the system is to have a long and stable liIe in any organisation.
The Change Team will identiIy the gaps between the package and the business
requirements, re-engineer some oI the businesses process to cope with the package,
train the users to ensure implementations is smooth as possible into the business.
The Technical Team will prepare the systems environment Ior the package, apply any
soItware Iixes Irom the vendor, implement the soItware in the best way possible Ior
the organisation set up and tune the soItware Ior the particular technical environment.
GAP Analysis
A through gap analysis will identiIy the gaps between how the business operates ad its
needs against what the package can can't do. For each gap there will be one oI three
outcomes which must be recorded and actioned, GAP must be closed and customised
soItware can be developed close the gap, GAP must be closed but soItware cannot be
written thereIore a workaround is required, GAP does not need to be closed.
In simple terms: Gap means small cracks. In SAP world. In inIormation technology,
gap analysis is the study oI the diIIerences between two diIIerent inIormation systems
or applications( ex; existing system or legacy system with Client and new is SAP),
oIten Ior the purpose oI determining how to get Irom one state to a new state. A gap is
sometimes spoken oI as "the space between where we are and where we want to be."
Gap analysis is undertaken as a means oI bridging that space.
Actual gap analysis is time consuming and it plays vital role in blue print stage.
Cut Over Plans
Detailed plans need to be developed Ior cutting over Irom the old system(s) to the
new. Parallel runs oI what will happen over the conversion period using test data,
convert and watch Ior a period aIter wards to ensure nothing unexpected happens.
%rain Users
Well trained users will support and deIend the system on site. Unsupportive users
will continually undermine the system and eventually it will be replaced. ThereIore
the more eIIort you put into helping the users master the system early the better.
SAP F/CO Certification Sample Questions
Caution: more than one answer may be correct.
Please mark ALL correct answers.
Question:
Which of the following statements are correct?
A More than one chart oI accounts can be created Ior each client
B The chart oI accounts contains all the G/L accounts, vendor accounts and customer
accounts
C More than one company code can be allocated to the same chart oI accounts
D The chart oI accounts controls all the customizing settings in the R/3 system
E All accounts within a chart oI accounts must have the same tax code
Answer : A
Question:
What status reports does Cash Management and forecasting include?
A. Cash management position
B. Liquidity Iorecast
C. Credit limit report
D. G/L account balances
E. Bill holdings
Question:
Which of the following are clearing procedures in accounts receivable?
A. Incoming payment
B. Down payment request
C. Credit memo
D. TransIer posting
Question:
When creating an Overhead Cost Order. the first order information which must
be entered is:
A. Order status
B. Order type
C. Settlement type
D. Curreny
E. ClassiIication code
Question:
When creating an Overhead Cost Order. the settlement rule must be entered in
the control data.
Which settlement receivers are available for internal orders?
A. Cost center
B. Orders
C. General ledger accounts
D. Asset
E. Vendor
Question:
n Controlling. a distinction is made between master data. planning. actual data
and the information system.
Which of the following master data belongs to Controlling?
A. G/L account
B. Work center
C. Cost center
D. Activity type
E. Supplier
Question:
Withing Overhead Cost Controlling activities are calculated. A Sender/Receiver
relationship exists. However. not all Sender/Receiver combinations are allowed.
Which of the following combinations make business sense?
A. Sender. Cost Center, Order, Proiect
Receiver. Cost Center, Order, Proiect
B. Sender. Order
Receiver. Cost Center, Proiect
C Sender. Cost Center
Receiver. Cost Center, Order, Proiect, Cost Obiect
Question:
Period closing activities are also performed in Controlling. %his is dependent on
certain prerequisites. Which of the following are MMUM criteria before it
makes sense to carry out period closing?
A. The posting period has been closed.
B. Materials have been withdrawn.
C. Personnel costs have been incurred.
D. Overhead has been incurred.
E. An order was closed.
SAP F %ips For Passing Certification
I passed my SAP FI certiIication ECC 6.0. I want to thank each one oI them in the
group Ior their support.
People who are going to attend the certiIication exam kindly concentrate on the
TFIN50 and TFIN52
Tips Ior people who are going to attend the exam:
O Understand the concepts. Don't memorize.
O II possible kindly practice the conIiguration part (Not mandatory).
O Do the preparation based on the syllabus not based on books. You will be
getting 99 Irom the syllabus}
O You have to cover all the chapters.
O No straight Questions.
O You will be getting chapter wise questions like AA, Masters, APP, NEW GL
and so on..............
'But one thing I can say iI you are through with syllabus 'YOU' can easily pass.
Take the certiIication date only once you Iinish one round oI study oI all books.
Two types oI Questions:
O Single answer questions SAQ will be around 10 - 15 questions and remaining
will be True/False}
O A statement will be given. Based on that 4 to 6 options. You have to select each
option is True or False.
Subject - o of questions Approx number of questions asked
Asset Accounting - 13
questions
2 questions on depreciation area, 3 questions on asset
class, 4 questions on asset transactions and
depreciation
Closing Operations in
Financial Accounting - 5
1 question on M/E closing, 3 on Balance
conIirmations
Document and Posting Control
- 14
Main questions on cash discount, 1Q on Cross
Co.Code, 1Q Doc Reversal, 2Q on Foreign currency,
1Q on authorisation, 1Q on FSG, 1Q on posting
period, 1Q on tolerance group, NO questions on
TAX.
Evaluation Options in
Reporting - 7
2 Q on list viewer and 3 questions on drill down
report
Financial Accounting Master
Data - 15
3Q on Bank, 4Q on Customer, 3Q on Vendor, 2Q on
GL
Payment Program, Dunning
Program, Correspondence,
Interest Calculation - 6
3 questions on payment program
SAP Overview - 5 2 Questions related to MM, 1 on navigation
SAP Solution Manager - 4 2Q on Roadmap
Special General Ledger
Transactions, Document
Parking, Validation &
Substitution - 6
1Q on Park & Post, 2Q on Splgl, 2Q on Substitution
& Validation
The New General Ledger -5 1 on Basics, 2 on document split, 1 on reports

SAP F %ips For Passing Certification
What is APC?
APC stands Ior Acquisition and Production costs. Acquisition means any asset which
you may acquire/ purchase externally. It includes invoice price and other related exp.
Associated with it like customs, octroi, Ireight which you add and arrive at total cost
oI acquisition Ior capitalization oI the asset. For ex Say a computer. The total cost
which you incur Ior the acquisition oI the computer including installation will be your
APC
Production cost means any asset which is created internally within the organization.
This is normally created by means oI AUC and you go on adding cost to the AUC as
and when you incur exp. Ior the same. For ex. say addition to the oIIice building.
ThereIore APC incudes any external acquisition or internal construction oI exp. which
needs to be capitalised.
In OADB under 01 deprn area Acquisition & prod Cost tick is activated. *--
Marazban D. Dalal
%his is empathy. have interview tomorrow. if anybody have taken interview
with any company. kindly let me know what the questions they will be asking.
how will be the interview. How the questions will be on configuration.
implementation side and other questions plz.. share with me.
Pl. prepares you on the Iollowing broad lines:
Implementation exp.:

BrieI about the proiect you did: w.r.t. the main activity oI the client, How many plants
they had, What modules were implemented, Who were the implementers, What`s the
implementation team size, How many were in your module team, What`s your role in
the proiect with respect to the activities you partook in the proiect, The Enterprise
Structure with regard to the no. oI Company Codes, any Business Areas or ProIit
Centers deIined, Cost Centers deIined, What`s the period oI the proiect, When did
they Go-Live?, Any issues you`d solved during Support` phase?
Questions on conceptual understanding:
a) SAP R/3 deIinition and 3-Tier Architecture
b) Real time integration` advantage oI SAP
c) ASAP methodology
d) Solution Manager
e) Client / Company / Company Code / Business Area
I) Business Area vs ProIit Center Approach
g) How eIIective will be the Financial Statements generated through Business
Areas
h) With Holding Taxes vs Extended WHT
i) Field Status Concepts (G/L master Iields controlled through Account Group and
Document entry through Field Status Group set in the G/L master)
i) Special G/L transactions
k) Open item management
l) Reconciliation Accounts
m) Subsidiary Ledgers
n) Sort key
o) Negative Postings Allowed
p) Special periods
q) Only balances in local currency
r) Important Posting keys Ior G/L, A/R, A/P, AA, Stock Entries
s) Assessment vs Distribution
t) Org. Structure Ior FI
u) Org. Structure Ior CO
v) Product Costing: How the values Ilow in the system
ConIiguration:
a) Extended With Holding Taxes conIiguration steps right Irom creation oI WH
Tax Types, Codes to Annual Return
b) FI-MM Integration (OBYC conIiguration with particular reIerence to OII-
Setting entries)
c) FI-SD integration
d) Down Payments transactions
e) Interest Balances / Arrears
I) Asset Accounting: Asset Class, Main Asset, Sub-Asset, Group Asset, Dep.
Areas, Dep. Key, Transaction No.s (100- External acquisition, 210 Retirement with
Revenue, etc.), Imp. Transaction Codes.
General questions:
a) Educational Background
b) What inIluenced you to go in Ior SAP career?
c) Functional Career
d) Present earnings vs Expected pay
e) Inclination to relocate
SAF F %echnical nterview Questions 1
1. %ell me about F Organizational structure?
Ans: Client
'
Operating Concern
'
Controlling area1 Controlling Area 2
'
Co. Code 1 Co. Code 2
'
Bus area 1 Bus area2 Bus Area3 Bus Area 4
. How many ormal and Special periods will be there in fiscal year. why do u
use special periods?
Ans: 12 Normal posting period and 4 special periods are in the Iiscal year which can
be used Ior posting tax and audit adiustments to a closed Iiscal year.
3.Where do you open and close periods?
Ans: PPV is used to open and close the periods based on a/c types considering GL
Accounts. Tr. Code. OB52.
4.What do you enter in Company code Global settings?
Ans: 4 digit Alphanumeric key.
Name oI the company
City
Country
Currency
Language
Address
5.What is document type. and what does it control? Examples.
Ans: Document type is nothing vouchers containing line items. Several business
transac! tions can be identiIied within a particular document type.
It controls the document number ranges.
It controls the Header part oI document
IT controls the line item level oI the document
Helps Iiling oI physical document
6. What is posting key and what does it control?
Ans: These are special classiIication keys. Two character numerical key it controls the
entry oI line items.
Posting key determines Account type, Debit/credit posting, Field status oI transaction.
7. What is field status group. what does it control?
Ans: FSG is mandatory Iield in ! GL Creation. You use this Iield to deIine which
Iields are displayed when you post business transactions to a G/L account.
A Iield may have one oI the Iollowing statuses.
- Suppressed
- Display
- Optional
- Required
. What is chart of account and how many charts of accounts can be assigned to
a company?
Ans: Chart oI account is a list oI all G/L accounts used by one or several company
codes.
For each G/L account, the chart oI accounts contains the account number, account
name, and the inIormation that controls how an account Iunctions and how a G/L
account is created in a Company code.
You have to assign a chart oI accounts to each company code. This chart oI accounts
is the Operating chart oI accounts and is used Ior the daily postings in this company
code.
You have the Iollowing options when using multiple company codes.
You can use the same chart oI accounts Ior all company codes
II the company codes all have the same requirements Ior the chart oI accounts set up,
assign all oI the individual company codes to the same chart oI accounts. This could
be the case iI all company codes are in the same country.
In addition to the operating chart oI accounts, you can use two additional charts oI
accounts II the individual company codes need diIIerent charts oI accounts, you can
assign up to two charts oI accounts in addition to the operating chart oI accounts. This
could be the case iI company codes lie in multiple countries.
The use oI diIIerent charts oI accounts has no eIIect on the balance sheet and proIit
and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the proIit and loss statement,
you can choose whether to balance the co! mpany codes which use diIIerent charts oI
accounts together or separately.
9. What does definition of a chart of account contains?
Ans: chart oI account key
Name
Maintenance language
Length oI the GL Account Number
Controlling Integration
Group chart oI accounts (Consolidation)
Block Indicator
10. Can one COA be assigned to several companies?
Ans: yes. One COA can be assigned to several companies.
11) What is account group and what does it control?
Ans: Account group determines which Iields you can conIigure on the G/L master
record. It is necessary to have at least two one Ior B/S and another one Ior P&L a/c.
It controls the Number ranges oI GL A/C.
The status oI Iields oI the master record oI GL belongs to company code area.
1) What is reconciliation account; can you directly enter documents in that a/c?
Ans: When you p! ost items to a subsidiary ledger, the system automatically posts the
same data to the general ledger. Each subsidiary ledger has one or more reconciliation
accounts in the general ledger.
We can`t use reconciliation account Ior direct postings.
13) How do you control field status of GL master records and from where do you
control!
Ans: Field status variant is maintained all FSGs.
14) What are the segments of GL master record?
Ans:
- COA Segment
A/C group
Nature oI account
Short text
GL a/c long text
Trading partner
Group Account Number
- Company code segment
Account currency
Tax
Reconciliation a/c Ior a/c type
OIM,LID,FSG.
15) What does Field status group assigned to a GL master record controls?
Ans: It controls the account assignments that are made to the account. SpeciIically the
Iield status group controls whether postings to cost centers, internal orders,
proIitability segments and so on are required, not allowed (suppressed), or optional.
16) What is Country and operational chart of account? Why do you use group
chart of account?
Ans: Operational chart oI account Day to day activities It is mandatory.
Country COA It`s used Ior legal speciIic requirement oI each country. It`s additional
and optional.
Group COA used Ior consolidation oI Company codes. This is Ior group consolidation
purpose.
17) What are all the segments in a Customer/Vendor master record?
Ans: Segments in Customer Segments in Vendor
- General Data segment General data segment
- Company code segment Company code segment
- Sales area segment Purchasing organization Segment
1) What is open line item management? What do you mean by clearing open
line items?
Ans: Open item management is Iurther reconciliation Iunction. OIM allows you to
display the open and cleared items and amounts in an account. OIM should be used iI
an oIIsetting entry is made Ior every line item posted in the account. The a/c is
reconciled and cleared against another account. Ex. Salary clearing account and
GR/IR Clearing account.
19) What is residual payment and part payment?
Ans: Residual payment it clears original invoice with incoming amount and create
new line item Ior remaining outstanding amount.
Partial payment it leaves the original invoice amount and creates new
line item Ior incoming amount.
0) What is internal and external number ranges?
Ans: Internal Number Ranges: Doc. No will be provided by the system automatically
in serial order allotting the next available progressive number. The number must be in
numerical.
External Number ranges: Doc. No will be given manually by the end user. System
will not lock no automatically in this case. User can pick the number randomly.
Number may be an alpha numeric. `-- Shaannthi S.
SAF F %echnical nterview Questions
Questions are answer best oI my knowledge, iI I am wrong, please correct
me..anyone....
1. How can be or in what way baseline date is important in Automatic Payment
Program run?
The Baseline date is used to calculate the due date by taking into account the payment
terms. On the APP, the baseline date helps to pick the relevant invoices Ior payment.
During the APP run when invoices are pulled into the run, the system checks the
Next Payment Date` beIore picking the invoices to be paid.
. Please tell me the procurement cycle how it works?
Procurement cycle a sales order is placed on a requirement made by a customer,
aIter which it is passed on to create a purchase order (this could either happen based
on the requirements on the SO, or a planned SO). the value Ilow gets passed on to FI
at the time oI goods movement. In the case oI SD, the impact on FI happens only at
the time oI billing.
3. Difference between Depreciation .Accumulated Depreciation and APC?
What is APC?
Depreciation a decrease in the value oI an asset due to wear and tear
Accumulated Depreciation the total amount oI depreciation calculated on a
particular asset.
APC reIers to Asset transactions other than depreciation
4. What is GR/R?What journal entries we should pass for this?
The GR/IR the goods receipt/Invoice Receipt account is used to post to whenever
goods that are not yet invoiced have been received or when invoices arrive b4 the the
delivery oI goods.
During the time between the invoice being created and delivery oI goods, there can be
a timing diIIerence, in order to accommodate this timing diIIerence, a GR/IR account
is maintained temporarily to record the Ilow .
5. What are the accounting entries take place in MM and SD?
Value Irom MM to FI is deIined in OBYC.. on the material master the Ilow oI
values are assigned on the Costing, acctg, etc tabs where the system helps to post the
necessary stock values into the appropriate GL accounts. helps to determine, the GL
accounts updated when there is a movement oI goods.
SD-FI - VKOA
6. Can we assign one Controlling area to two different Company Codes (but the
company codes having different
fiscal years/different currencies
Company code should have same Iinancial year, may have diIIerent currencies.
You can assign 2 or more company codes to one controlling area as long as the chart
oI accounts are same. Furthermore, iI you have diIIerent Iiscal year variant in the
company code, then make sure that the number oI period remain the same.
7. While posting transaction. can we give cost centre / production order at time.
Yes it is posiiable , but in such situation cost centre will be real and production order
is stastical.
II you assign both cost center and Prd Order then since Prod. Order are real co obiect,
Cost center entry would be statistical.
. Which Master data uploads will be done?
The question is not very clear. II you are talking about CO Master data. Then Cost
center need to be uploaded. You can use Data TransIer Workbench or write abap Ior
it.
9. Can we run Payment Programe giving ( Hdfc vendor detailes ) City bank in
Payment run programe?
Yes can be possible , this can resolved through ranking order and bank optimization in
FBZP.
You use use Iurther selection in proposal paramater, iI you would like to Iilter the
open item based on the city
10. What does document header control?
Field status.
11. After entering a document can you delete the entry? Can you change the
document?
Which fields` can/not is changed?
Document header cannont be changed, aIter posting the document you cannot
change. only iI you want to change the document the reseversal entry.
1. What is a special GL transaction?
The transaction other than A/P and A/R is called the special g/l transaction Ior ex:
Bills oI exchange, Interest payable , aqusition
13. How do you reverse cleared documents?
By doing reversal posting.
14. What is base line date? Why is that used? Can this be changed?
For paymentterms it is used. base line date is the due date.
15. How many statistical objects can be selected in when you post an F
document?
Where CCtr. PCtr. OM are active?
SAP FCO nterview Questions
What are the frequently asked questions on SAP FCO nterview Questions?
1. What is chart of account? What is the relevance of defining chart of account?
A. It is the top level Iinancial structure, contains the GL Accounts we deIine the all
the accounts and one chart oI accounts assign to company code and one chart oI
accounts will assign to many company codes . It is list oI Gl accounts and it contains
account no , account name, language, length, cost element, blocking inIormation that
controls the how an account Iunctions and how a gl account created in company code .
COA Key.
. What is account group? What does it control?
A. IT determines the which Iields you need to conIigure on the GL master record. It is
necessary to have at least 2, one Ior B/S and another one Ior P&L accounts. It controls
the number ranges oI GL. The Status Iields oI the master record oI GL Belong to
company code area.
3. What is posting key? What is its role?
A. It controls the line item oI GL entry debit and credit.
4. What is business area?
A. Organizational unit oI external accounting that corresponds to a speciIic business
segment or area oI responsibility in a company. Financial statements can be created
Ior business areas Ior internal purposes. They are primarily used to Iacilitate external
segment reporting across company codes covering the main operation oI a company
(product line, Branches). The Business area may be the branch oI the company or
product lines it deals with
5. while defining chart of account. there is field " manual creaation of cost
element" and "automatic creation of cost element". what is it?
A. Generally when ever we are creating cost elements we can create some oI
exependitures manually some automatically so we can create manually cost elements
in deIining chart oI accounts.
6. After creating a customer/vendor. how can we check that under which account
group we have configured this customer/vendor?
A. We can check through customer group and vendor group it was created by ours
when we are creating vendor and customer groups.
7. How the system will know that april is your first posting period?
A. Yes the system will Iind out april was Iirst posting period. While conIiguring Iiscal
year we giving april to 1 may to 2, iune to 3, like this system will identiIy april was
the Iirst posting period.
. Define the term "fiscal year" . "posting period varient" & " field status
varient".
A. FSGV controls the additional account assignments and other Iields that can be
posted at the line item level Ior GL a/c. FSGV can be control at three level i.e.,
1) In OBC4 (ch oI a/c`s) - which controls the screen Ior a particular GL a/c group,
2) Posting Keys - which controls the screen Ior a particular posting key transaction is
taken, &
3) Accounting Groups - which controls the screen Ior a particular account group i.e.,
customer group or vendor group.
A. Posting period variant which controls posting periods, both normal and special
periods are open Ior each company code. The posting period is independent oI Iiscal
year variant.
A. Fiscal year is controls the which type year we are Iollowing like calendar year,
year dependent year,.
SAP F/CO Sample Questions and Answers 1
1. About evolution in the world oI business, we can aIIirmate that (Please choose the
correct sentence):
a) | | The internet revolution could turn available to companies the use oI ERP
Iunctionality.
b) | | The next generation oI 'new dimension products appeared taking
Iunctionality out oI the company, to bring value through extending the Internet
Revolution.
c) | | The internet has driven to a collaborative environment where value is created
through collaboration within business comunities.
d) | | In the Iirst the companies were looking at Cost reduction and eIIiciency through
integration oI business comunities.
2. About the deIinition oI ERP and e-business Iunctionalities, we can say that (Note:
we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think
they are correct):
a) | | ERP oIIers enterprise centric Iunctionality (general ledger, payroll, order entry)
to integrate core, internal processes.
b) | | ERP is mySAP Financials and mySAP HR.
c) | | ERP is SAP R/3, while e-business is mySAP.com.
d) | | About Business Model, ERP can be considered as enterprise centric and e-
business, as extended and collaborative.
e) | | About Architecture, ERP can be considered as an integrated system and e-
business, as an integrated system and an open integration platIorm.
I) | | About Processes, ERP can have them integrated, core within enterprises and
collaborative, beyond company boundaries.
3. What is a SAP Business Obiect (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | It is all the transaction data generated via transactions.
b) | | It is the instancied class oI the Class Builder.
c) | | It is composed oI tables that are related in a business context, including the
related appplication programs and it is maintained in the Class Repository.
d) | | It is the representation oI a central business obiect in the real world, such as an
employee, sales order, purchase requisition, invoice and so on.
e) | | It is a sequence oI dialog steps that are consistent in a business context and that
belong together logically.
4. About BAPI (Business Application Programming InterIace), what is true (Note: we
can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they
are correct)?
a) | | It is a well-deIined interIace providing access to processes and data oI business
application systems.
b) | | BAPIs oIIer a stable, standardized interIace Ior integrating third-party
applications and components in the Business Framework.
c) | | A BAPI is assigned to one and only one business obiect.
d) | | In the R/3 Enterprise version (4.7) we can use BAPI to create an internal order
inside a customized ABAP program.
e) | | A business obiect in the Business Obiect Repository (BOR) can have many
methods Irom which one or several are implemented as BAPIs.
5. What can we say about ALE (Application Link Enabling, Note: we can have more
than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | Business processes cannot be distributed using ALE.
b) | | The ALE concept is related to an enterprise structure with areas that have
central tasks and areas with tasks that are decentralized.
c) | | The applications are integrated via a central database.
d) | | The applications are integrated via the message exchange.
e) | | The ALE concept supports the implementation and operation oI distributed SAP
applications.
6. A company code is:
a) | | an independent accounting entity (the smallest organization element Ior which a
complete selI-contained set oI accounts can be drawn up).
b) | | an organizational unit in an enterprise that represents a closed system used Ior
cost accounting purposes.
c) | | an organizational unit that provides an additional evaluation level Ior the
purpose oI segment reporting, Ior example.
d) | | a dependent accounting entity, according to Fiscal Year.
e) | | the highest level in the R/3 system hierarchy.
7. Consider the Iollowing sentences:
7.1. The variant principle is a three-step method used in R/3 to assign special
properties to one or more R/3 obiects.
7.2. One oI the disadvantages to use variants is that it can't deal with the maintenance
oI properties, which are common among several business obiects.
7.3. For using the variant principle, you must deIine the variant, populate it with
values and assign it to the R/3 obiects.
7.4. This principle is used Ior Fiscal Years, Posting Periods and so on.
Which oI them is Ialse?
a) | | 7.1 and 7.2.
b) | | 7.1 and 7.3.
c) | | 7.1.
d) | | 7.2.
e) | | 7.3.
8. Consider the Iollowing sentences:
8.1. A Iiscal year has to be deIined by means oI separating business transactions into
diIIerent periods.
8.2. Special periods are used Ior postings, which are related to the process oI the year-
end closing. In total, 16 special periods can be used.
8.3. The Fiscal Year variant only deIines the amount oI periods and their start and
Iinish dates.
8.4. The Fiscal Year is deIined as a variant, which is assigned to the chart oI accounts.
Which oI them are true?
a) | | 8.1 and 8.2.
b) | | 8.1 and 8.3.
c) | | 8.2 and 8.3.
d) | | 8.2 and 8.4.
e) | | 8.3 and 8.4.
9. What is an independent Iiscal year variant (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | It is a variant which the postings periods are only equal to the months oI the
year.
b) | | It is a variant which you can deIine diIIerent number oI periods, according to
the year.
c) | | It is a variant which each own Iiscal year uses the same number oI periods, and
the postings periods always start and end at the same day oI the year.
d) | | It is a variant which allows the use oI diIIerent number oI posting periods.
e) | | It is a variant not normally used because oI its particularity.
10. Consider the Iollowing statements about currencies concepts:
10.1. The currency code identiIies each currrency that will be used into R/3 system.
10.2. You have to deIine all the world`s currency into R/3 system
10.3. Exchange rate types distinguishes the exchange rates to be considered Ior
various purposes, such as valuation, translation, conversion, planning, etc.
Which oI them is true (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please
select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | 10.1.
b) | | 10.2.
c) | | 10.3.
d) | | none oI them.
e) | | all oI them.
11. Consider the Iollowing sentences:
11.1. A base currency can be assigned to an exchange rate type.
11.2. To deal with exchange rate spreads, two very eIIicient combinations oI the
exchange rate tools are using a base currency Ior the average rate (M) and using the
exchange rate spreads to calculate the buying and selling rates (B and G).
11.3. A base currency can be used Ior an average, a buying or a selling rate.
11.4. The relations between currencies have to be maintained per exchange rate type
and currency pair in the translation Iactors.
Which oI these combinations is true?
a) | | 11.1, 11.3 and 11.4.
b) | | 11.1, 11.2 and 11.4.
c) | | 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4.
d) | | 11.1, 11.2 and 11.3.
e) | | 11.1, 11.2, 11.3 and 11.4.
12. Consider the Iollowing sentences about the direct quotation:
12.1. It is also known as price notation.
12.2. The currency value is expressed in units oI the Ioreign currency per unit oI local
currency.
12.3. For direct quotation, the preIix to indicate the rate is '/.
What is the correct option?
a) | | 12.1.
b) | | 12.2.
c) | | 12.3.
d) | | none oI them.
e) | | all oI them.
13. Consider the Iollowing sentences about the indirect quotation:
13.1. It is also known as volume notation.
13.2. The currency value is expressed in the local currency per unit oI Ioreign
currency.
13.3. For indirect quotation, there is no preIix to diIIerence between direct quotation.
What is the correct option?
a) | | all oI them.
b) | | none oI them.
c) | | 12.3.
d) | | 12.2.
e) | | 12.1.
14. What oI these alternatives are considered master data (Note: we can have more
than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | Chart oI Accounts.
b) | | G/L Accounts.
c) | | Vendor.
d) | | Customer.
e) | | Asset.
15. What can we deIine into the chart oI accounts customizing transaction (OB13
transaction, Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the
sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | Description.
b) | | Maintenance language.
c) | | Length oI the company code.
d) | | Length oI the G/L account number.
e) | | Blocking / unblocking chart oI accounts.
16. Consider the Iollowing sentences about the chart oI accounts segment:
16.1. It contains the Company Code, Account number and the Iield status group.
16.2. Whenever you need to enter inIormation Ior a company code Ior an account
number, you have to type again the inIormation related to chart oI accounts segment.
16.3. Texts can be displayed using the program 'Account assignment
manual(RFSKTH00).
16.4. Key words Iacilitate the search Ior account numbers.
Which oI these combinations are Ialse (Note: we can have more than one correct
sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | 16.1.
b) | | 16.2.
c) | | 16.3.
d) | | 16.4.
e) | | none oI them.
17. True or Ialse?
17.1. Every company code that needs to use an account Irom the assigned chart oI
accounts has to create its own company code segment.
a) | | True b) | | False
17.2. For PL statement accounts, the balance is carried Iorward to the same account.
a) | | True b) | | False
17.3. In the chart oI accounts segment, it is necessary to indicate whether the account
will be a balance sheet or a proIitloss statement account.
a) | | True b) | | False
17.4. Number intervals Ior G/L account master records can overlap.
a) | | True b) | | False
17.5. It is not possible to inIluence the appearance oI an account`s master data.
a) | | True b) | | False
18. Consider the Iollowing sentences about Iield status:
18.1. Fields which are can be .
18.2. Fields which have an entry that can be set to
only (even in change mode).
Which oI the options below matches the blank spaces oI those sentences?
a) | | used/supressed Ior 18.1; must be changed/display Ior 18.2.
b) | | not used/supressed Ior 18.1; must be changed/display Ior 18.2.
c) | | not used/optional Ior 18.1; should not be changed/supressed Ior 18.2.
d) | | not used/supressed Ior 18.1; should not be changed /display Ior 18.2.
e) | | used/optional Ior 18.1; must be changed/display Ior 18.2.
19. Consider the Iollowing sentences about Iield status:
19.1. Fields which can be made .
19.2. Fields that can be entered, but are not required, can be set to entry.
Which oI the options below matches the blank spaces oI those sentences?
a) | | must not have an entry/optional Ior 19.1; suppresed Ior 19.2.
b) | | must have an entry/supressed Ior 19.1; suppresed Ior 19.2.
c) | | must have an entry/optional Ior 19.1; optional Ior 19.2.
d) | | must have an entry/required Ior 19.1; optional Ior 19.2.
e) | | must not have an entry/required Ior 19.1; optional Ior 19.2.
20. Consider the Iollowing sentences:
20.1. Reconciliation accounts are general ledger accounts assigned to the business
partner master records to record all transactions in the sub-ledger.
20.2. For accounts without line item display, the most important data Irom the posted
line items is stored in a special index table.
20.3. The account currency must be in the local currency.
20.4. Items in accounts with open item management means the G/L accounts should
have a oIIsetting posting Ior a given business transaction.
Which oI these are true (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | 20.1 and 20.3.
b) | | 20.2 and 20.4.
c) | | 20.1 and 20.2.
d) | | 20.2 and 20.3.
e) | | 20.1 and 20.4.
Answers:
1. C
2. A, C, D, E.
3. D
4. A, B, C, D, E.
5. B, D, E.
6. A
Item 'B is the deIinition oI controlling area.
Item 'C is the deIinition oI business area.
Item 'D is not any deIinition.
Item 'E is the deIinition oI client.
7. D
In Iact, the main advantage oI using variants is that it is easier to
maintain properties, which are common among several business obiects.
8. B
9. C
10. A, C.
Most oI the world`s currencies are already deIined into R/3 system.
11. B
Be careIul: A base currency can only be used Ior an average rate, not Ior a selling or a
buying rate.
12. A
13. E
14. B, C, D, E.
A chart oI accounts is a variant, which contains the structure and the basic inIormation
about general ledger accounts.
15. A, B, D, E.
16. A, B.
17. True or Ialse:
17.1. True.
17.2. False. For PL statement accounts the balance is carried Iorward to a retained
earnings account and the PL statement account is set to zero.
17.3. True.
17.4. True.
17.5. False. It is possible to inIluence the appearance oI an account`s master data
using the Iield status.
18. D
19. D
20. E
SAP F/CO Sample Questions and Answers
1. Since the line item display takes up additional system resources, you should only
use it iI there is no other way oI looking at the line items. So, you should not activate
the line item display Ior the Iollowing accounts (Note: we can have more than one
correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct):
a) | | PL Statement.
b) | | Reconciliation.
c) | | Revenue.
d) | | Material Stock.
e) | | Tax.
2. Consider the Iollowing statements:
2.1. Accounts with open item management must have line item display activated.
2.2. You can activate or deactivate open item management everytime, even iI the
account hasn`t a zero balance.
2.3. You can select both local and Ioreign currencies as account currency.
2.4. II the account is the local currency, the account can only be posted to this
currency.
2.5. When using the 'Only Balances in Local Currency indicator in the master
data record, transaction Iigures are only managed Ior amounts translated into local
currency.
Which oI the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct
sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | 2.1.
b) | | 2.2.
c) | | 2.3.
d) | | 2.4.
e) | | 2.5.
3. True or Ialse?
3.1. The 'Only Balances in Local Currency indicator must not be set in
reconciliation accounts Ior customers or vendors.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
3.2. The 'Only Balances in Local Currency indicator is usually set in balance sheet
accounts that are not managed in Ioreign currencies and not managed on an open item
basis.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
3.3. Accounts with a Ioreign currency as an account currency can be posted to any
currency.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
3.4. You can use a group chart oI accounts Ior internal purposes.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
3.5. The usage oI a Iinancial statement version Ior the group chart oI accounts is
optional.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
4. What is the disadvantage oI using the group chart oI accounts (Please choose the
correct sentence)?
a) | | Because changes to existing G/L Accounts are eIIective as soon as they have
been saved and could have extensive consequences.
b) | | Because accounts with the account currency as local currency can only be
posted to this local currency.
c) | | Because the company codes use diIIerent operational chart oI accounts, you
cannot carry out cross-company code controlling.
d) | | Because the group chart oI accounts must be assigned to each operational chart
oI accounts.
e) | | Because you must enter the group account number in the chart oI acounts
segment oI the operational account.
5. Consider the Iollowing statements:
5.1. You cannot use the country chart oI accounts iI you desire to use the cross-
company code controlling.
5.2. The disadvantage oI using country chart oI accounts is the accounting clerks who
may be Iamiliar with the country chart oI accounts Iirst have to get used to using the
operational chart oI accounts.
5.3. Reconciliation accounts are updated on a daily basis.
Which oI them are Ialse (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | 5.1 and 5.2.
b) | | 5.1 and 5.3.
c) | | 5.2 and 5.3.
d) | | all oI them.
e) | | none oI them.
6. Which are the segments oI the SD view oI the customer account master data (Note:
we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think
they are correct)?
a) | | Client.
b) | | Company Code.
c) | | Controlling Area.
d) | | Sales Area.
e) | | Purchasing Organization.
7. Which are the segments oI the MM view oI the customer account master data
(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you
think they are correct)?
a) | | Client.
b) | | Company Code.
c) | | Controlling Area.
d) | | Sales Area.
e) | | Purchasing Organization.
8. What is the segment that makes complete both customer and vendor accounts
(Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | Client.
b) | | Company Code.
c) | | Controlling Area.
d) | | Sales Area.
e) | | Purchasing Organization.
9. What characteristics are conIigured as standard Ior every customer/vendor account
(Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you
think they are correct)?
a) | | Line Item Display.
b) | | Company Code.
c) | | Currency.
d) | | Open Item Management.
e) | | Purchasing Organization.

10. Consider the Iollowing statements:
10.1. Number ranges Ior customer/vendor accounts can overlap.
10.2. An one-time account is a special customer/vendor master record which a
company rarely do business.
10.3. The account group is used to control the Iields displayed in the master record.
10.4. II you enter an alternative payer, the amount to clear the open items due in the
account is paid by the alternative payer.
10.5. One number range can only be assigned to one account group.
Which oI the above statements are true (Note: we can have more than one correct
sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | 10.1.
b) | | 10.2.
c) | | 10.3.
d) | | 10.4.
e) | | 10.5.
11. True or Ialse?
11.1. For every bank that is used in the system (Ior example, as a house bank or as a
customer/vendor bank) you have to create a bank master record.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
11.2. Banks that are used by your company are deIined as house banks.a) | | True. b)
| | False.
11.3. You cannot create bank master data when entering bank inIormation in the
customer or vendor master record.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
11.4. Bank Account and G/L Account are the same master data obiect.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
11.5. Customers that use the lockbox Iunction can create a batch input session that
automatically updates customer banking inIormation in the master record.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
12. Consider the Iollowing statements:
12.1. The system can assign the document numbers or the user can assign
the number during document entry.
12.1. A business transaction creates only one document.
12.3. Document types are deIined at company code level.
12.4. Number ranges Ior document numbers and account types deIined Ior postings
are deIined by the document types.
12.5. Document types also deIine whether invoices are posted with the net procedure.
Choose the correct option:
a) | | 12.1, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct.
b) | | 12.2, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct.
c) | | 12.3, 12.4 and 12.5 are correct.
d) | | 12.1, 12.3 and 12.4 are correct.
e) | | 12.1, 12.2 and 12.5 are correct.
13. What do the posting keys speciIy (Note: we can have more than one correct
sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | Whether the line item is connected to a payment transaction or not.
b) | | Whether the posting is sales-relevant and the sales Iigure oI the account is to be
updated by the transaction, Ior example, by the posting oI a customer invoice.
c) | | Whether the line items contain 'credit or 'debit values.
d) | | Whether the line items are valid Ior a business transaction.
e) | | Whether the accounts are allowed Ior posting.
14. Consider the Iollowing statements:
14.1. A company code must be assigned to a posting period variant to have the control
Ior posting periods.
14.2.` symbol represents all account types in the posting period customizing screen.
14.3. The account interval in the posting period customizing screen can be both G/L
and subledger accounts.
14.4. The maximum amounts are deIined per company code in 'tolerance groups.
14.5. It is not possible to assign tolerance groups to user logon ID`s.
Choose the correct option:
a) | | 14.1, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct.
b) | | 14.2, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct.
c) | | 14.3, 14.4 and 14.5 are correct.
d) | | 14.1, 14.2 and 14.4 are correct.
e) | | 14.1, 14.2 and 14.5 are correct.
15. What Iields oI a FI Document Header section can be changed aIter a document has
already been posted (Note: we can have more than one correct sentence. Please select
the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | Fiscal Year.
b) | | ReIerence Number.
c) | | Text Iields.
d) | | Header text.
e) | | Posting date.
16. About the change control, what conditions below are applicable (Note: we can
have more than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are
correct)?
16.1. The posting period is already closed.
16.2. The line item is not yet cleared.
16.3. The document is a credit memo Ior an invoice.
16.4. The document is not a credit memo Irom a down payment.
16.5. The line item is either a debit in a customer account or a credit in a vendor
account.
a) | | 16.1.
b) | | 16.2.
c) | | 16.3.
d) | | 16.4.
e) | | 16.5.
17. What are the prerequisites to enable negative postings (Note: we can have more
than one correct sentence. Please select the sentences you think they are correct)?
a) | | You have to deIine reversal reasons Ior negative reversal.
b) | | You have to ensure company code permits negative postings.
c) | | You have to deIine the document type that explicitly allows negative postings.
d) | | You have to use cleared items.
e) | | You have to reset cleared items.
18. What is the purpose oI the terms oI payment (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | Calculate a cash discount and invoice due date.
b) | | Calculate the tax amounts.
c) | | Enable the cross-company code transactions.
d) | | DeIine the baseline date.
e) | | Calculate only the required conditions Ior SD invoices.
19. Consider the Iollowing statements:
19.1. Terms oI payments are copied Irom invoice to credit memos when they are
linked to.
19.2. Inserting a 'V in the invoice reIerence Iield during document entry means
the terms oI payment are activated in the
non-invoice-related credit memos.
19.3. The account type Iield in terms oI payment basic data screen should be deIined
separately, to prevent any done change in the term oI payment.
19.4. The system cannot deIine the splitment oI an installment payment, at least you
deIine it in the terms oI payment.
19.5. The day limits deIine the dates oI the cash discount periods.
Which oI the statements above is Ialse (Please choose the correct sentence)?
a) | | 19.1.
b) | | 19.2.
c) | | 19.3.
d) | | 19.4.
e) | | 19.5.
20. True or Ialse?
20.1. SAP supports tax on sales and purchases, US sales tax, additional taxes and
withholding tax as tax systems Ior diIIerent countries.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
20.2. Only national level oI taxation is allowed in the R/3 system.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
20.3. A tax calculation procedure is assigned to every company code Ior carrying out
tax calculations.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
20.4.A iurisdiction code is a combination oI the codes oI tax authorities that tax
movements oI goods and use their own tax rates.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
20.5. II you desire to post manual tax postings, you have to Ilag the 'Post
Automatically Only Iield oI the account master record.
a) | | True. b) | | False.
F ERRORS AD PROBABLE SOLU%OS
These are some oI the issue Ior which probable solutions are given, hope they are
helpIul :
Scenario 1:
have configured FBZP. Fi1 for house bank. But when am doing payment run
in F110 am getting following error:
Company codes X1YZ/X1YZ do not appear in proposal 05/03/006 REM.
Diagnosis
o data exists for the specified paying company code X1YZ and the specified
sending company code X1YZ in payment proposal 05/03/006 REM.
System response
%he payment proposal cannot be edited.
Procedure
Check the flow trace and payment proposal list in order to determine why the
specified company codes are not contained in the proposal
Solution :
* That`s generic error Ior payment run, check whether there are any due items as on
date (tcode Ibl1n). You can also change the baseline date there and rerun it. iI you still
get same error.. Check the proposal log, you will Iind the reason.
* Try to see Iirst whether any open items exist. By using FBL1N.
Scenario :
How to make the payment through automatic payment program. through F-110
.What are the prerequisites?
Solution :
For Down payments to be paid using APP we have create a Down Payment request F-
47.
Scenario 3:
While doing APP. after. " the payment proposal has been created message " if
edit proposal is selected. am getting the error as "Company code ABC/ABC do
no appear in the proposal "
Solution :
This type oI error comes when your Payment proposal doesn't have any items to
process. Check the parameters and ensure invoices are due as on run date.
Scenario 4 :
While posting customer invoice (FB70) why system asks for G/L account? As per
accounting rules customer is debited and Customer reconciliation a/c is credited
that ends double entry book keeping rule. Why one more G/L account on top of
Recon a/c. which is posted automatically?
Solution :
* Entry gets posted to Customer a/c through reconciliation account. You have to give
a GL a/c Ior revenue.
Your entry would be
Customer (Reconciliation a/c) Dr
To Revenue Cr
* Reconciliation is a Iictious entry so you cannot consider as an entry to be entered by
the user. This rule is derived Irom the Iact that 'we cannot enter/post directly to
RECON account'.
That is why system needs a GL account to make the account balance as zero. Manual
entry could be:
Customer a/c Dr
To Domestic Sales a/c
(Sales invoiced posted)
Recon entry is automatically made once you post this entry since you have conIigured
your RECON in the IMG.
Scenario 5 :
am unable to figure out how to attach my GL Accounts to my company code
[copied chart of accounts. have my own company code. assigned my company
code to the chart of accounts].
Solution :
You can attach the GL Accounts by iust Iilling the details in the company code
segment oI the GL A/c. Hence you can use that gl a/c Ior your co code.
But that would be individually creating the accounts. Right?? How about creating all
accounts at one shot. Create in FS00
Scenario 6 :
Difference between Standard Hierarchy and Alternate Hierarchy.
Solution :
Standard Hierarchy is basic structure oI company but alternative hierarchy is iust Ior
reporting or temporary usage.
Scenario 7:
have created depreciation keys (diminishing balance) and assigned to asset
classes respectively. But at the time of asset master creation the system ask for
Useful Life of the asset while my understanding is that in diminishing balance
method there is useful life. just percentage is defined.
Solution :
UseIul liIe is required Ior depreciation change. Normally a company with WDV
depreciation may want to write oII its assets which have crossed their useIul liIe in 2
or 3 installments. This is achieved by depreciation change, where aIter useIul liIe, a
new method takes over.
Scenario :
have some conceptual problem in nternal Order.
Solution :
Internal order can only take a statistical posting & cost centre shall take a true posting
when the relevant internal order is deIined as statistical I/O IN T. code
KO01(CONTROL DATA ) tab. So while making a posting in FB50 and assigning
both I/O & COST CENTRE as relevant cost obiect in the transaction you shall get the
stated status oI these 2 cost obiect.
Scenario 9 :
n fb50. in the details tab. only if tick 'calculate tax' will the tax get calculated.
Our user wants this to happen always (by default). i.e. he does not want to tick
this for each transaction. s there any setup to be done for the tax to get
calculated always?
Solution :
Even now you are not clear. TCode FB50 is used Ior posting GL account only. I Iail
to understand how you can calculate tax which is generally Irom purchase / vendor or
Sales / Customer oriented through FB50.
In case oI local distribution, iI we Iorget to pay taxes on certain items and we need to
pass tax entries, then such a case is needed. This can be achieved thru deIault
parameter id Ior that particular user through transaction code SU3.
In SU3, in Parameters Tab put "XTX" in Parameter ID column and in Parameter
Value column put "X".
Scenario 10 :
We have an issue here where by the system is calculating the tax for an invoice
with a wrong tax base amount. How do i change the tax base amount? get the
tax rates from VER%EX and they are showing right. Where does the system pull
this tax base amount for an nvoice and how can change it.
Solution :
Kindly check this:
spro - Iinancial accounting - I.a global setting - with holding setting - extended with
holding setting -- calculation -- with holding tax type .
Check your withholding tax type, go in it and check the setting.
Some mportant %codes for F GL AR AP Asset
% Codes Details
Financial Accounting
SPRO Enter IMG
OX02 Company Code - Create, Check, Delete
OX03 Create Business Area
OKBD Functional Areas
OB45 Create Credit Control Area
OB29 Maintain Fiscal Year Variant
OB37 Assign Co. Code to Fiscal Year Variant
OB13 Creation oI Chart oI Account (CoA)
OBY7 Copy Chart oI Account (CoA)
OBY9 Transport Chart oI Account
OBD4 DeIine Account Group
OBY2 Copy GL Accounts Irom the Chart to Co. Code
OB53 DeIine Retained Earnings
OB58 Maintain Financial Statement Versions
OBC4 Maintain Field Status Variant
OBBO DeIine Posting Period Variant
OBA7 DeIine Document Type & Number Ranges
OB41 Maintain Posting Keys
OBA4 Create Tolerance Groups
FBN1 Create GL Number Ranges
OBL1 Automatic Posting Documentation
FBKP Automatic Account Assignment
OBYC MM Automatic Account Assignment
OBY6 Enter Global Parameters
FS00 Creation oI GL Master Records
(F-02) Posting oI GL Transactions
(FB03) Display oI GL Document
(FS10N) Display oI GL Accounts
OB46 DeIine Interest Calculation Types
OBD3 DeIine Vendor Account Group
(XK01) Creation oI Vendor Master
(F-43) Purchase Invoice Posting
(FK10N) Display Vendor Account
F112 DeIine House Bank
OBB8 Maintain Terms oI Payment (ToP)
OBD2 Creation oI Customer Account Group
OBA3 Customer Tolerance Groups
(XD01) Creation oI Customer Master
(FD10N) Display Customer Account
(F-28) Incoming Payment Posting
OB61 DeIine Dunning Area
EC08 Copy ReIerence Chart oI Depreciation (CoD)
OADB DeIine Depreciation Area
OAOB Assign Chart oI Depreciation to Co. Code
OAOA DeIine Asset Class
AO90 Assignment oI Account in Asset Class
OAY2 Determination oI Depreciation Area in Asset Class
(AS01) Creation oI Asset Master
(AS11) Creation oI Sub Asset
(F-90) Asset Purchase Posting
(AFAB) Depreciation Run
(F-92) Asset Sale Posting
(AW01N) Asset Explorer

Explain the difference between VOCE and BLLG in SAP.
Both are same in SD point oI view.
- In SD terminology we call as Billing Document and
- In FI terminology we call as INVOICE.
- In MM again only INVOICE will be there Ior Vendors.
Invoice is document indicating to delivery goods and Billing is a receipt oI payment.
II we receive the goods Irom vendors that is called bill iI we give the goods to
customer that is called invoice.

Bill means we have to pay the amount against bill invoice means we have to receive
the amount against invoice.
Invoice is Ior both : Vendor Invoice and Customer Invoice.
Billing %codes:
- VF01 create billing document. The delivery order comes up auto.
- VF02 the billing doc comes up auto . View the accounting enteries

nvoice %codes:
- FB60 Create invoice with respect to rawmaterial and tax.
- FB70 Invoice entries with respect to sales and tax
SAP F %ransaction Code List 1
How to reverse a cleared documents?
The Iollowing procedure is to be Iollowed to reverse the cleared document.
1. Reset the cleared document and reverse the document.
Path # Accounting --~ Iinancial Accounting --~ C/L --~ Document--~ Reset Cleared
items - T. code : FBRA
In this screen select resetting and reverse radio button and give the reversal reason. :
01 and save the settings.
*-- Maddipati
F-01 Enter Sample Document
F-02 Enter G/L Account Posting
F-03 Clear G/L Account
F-04 Post with Clearing
F-05 Post Foreign Currency Valuation
F-06 Post Incoming Payments
F-07 Post Outgoing Payments
F-18 Payment with Printout
F-19 Reverse Statistical Posting
F-20 Reverse Bill Liability
F-21 Enter TransIer Posting
F-22 Enter Customer Invoice
F-23 Return Bill oI Exchange Pmt Request
F-25 Reverse Check/Bill oI Exch.
F-26 Incoming Payments Fast Entry
F-27 Enter Customer Credit Memo
F-28 Post Incoming Payments
F-29 Post Customer Down Payment
F-30 Post with Clearing
F-31 Post Outgoing Payments
F-32 Clear Customer
F-33 Post Bill oI Exchange Usage
F-34 Post Collection
F-35 Post ForIaiting
F-36 Bill oI Exchange Payment
F-37 Customer Down Payment Request
F-38 Enter Statistical Posting
F-39 Clear Customer Down Payment
F-40 Bill oI Exchange Payment
F-41 Enter Vendor Credit Memo
F-42 Enter TransIer Posting
F-43 Enter Vendor Invoice
F-44 Clear Vendor
F-46 Reverse ReIinancing Acceptance
F-47 Down Payment Request
F-48 Post Vendor Down Payment
F-49 Customer Noted Item
F-51 Post with Clearing
F-52 Post Incoming Payments
F-53 Post Outgoing Payments
F-54 Clear Vendor Down Payment
F-55 Enter Statistical Posting
F-56 Reverse Statistical Posting
F-57 Vendor Noted Item
F-58 Payment with Printout
F-59 Payment Request
F-60 Maintain Table: Posting Periods
F-62 Maintain Table: Exchange Rates
F-63 Park Vendor Invoice
F-64 Park Customer Invoice
F-65 Preliminary Posting
F-66 Park Vendor Credit Memo
F-67 Park Customer Credit Memo
F-90 Acquisition Irom purchase w. vendor
F-91 Asset acquis. to clearing account
F-92 Asset Retire. Irm Sale w/ Customer
F.01 ABAP/4 Report: Balance Sheet
F.02 Compact Journal
F.03 Reconciliation
F.04 G/L: Create Foreign Trade Report
F.05 Foreign Currency Val.: Open Items
F.06 Foreign Currency Valuation:G/L Assts
F.07 G/L: Balance Carried Forward
F.08 G/L: Account Balances
F.09 G/L: Account List
F.0A G/L: FTR Report on Disk
F.0B G/L: Create Z2 to Z4
F.10 G/L: Chart oI Accounts
F.11 G/L: General Ledger Irom Doc.File
F.12 Advance Tax Return
F.13 ABAP/4 Report: Automatic Clearing
F.14 ABAP/4 Report: Recurring Entries
F.15 ABAP/4 Report: List Recurr.Entries
F.16 ABAP/4 Report: G/L Bal.Carried Fwd
F.17 ABAP/4 Report: Cust.Bal.ConIirmation
F.18 ABAP/4 Report: Vend.Bal.ConIirmation
F.19 G/L: Goods/Invoice Received Clearing
F.1A Customer/Vendor Statistics
F.1B Head OIIice and Branch Index
F.20 A/R: Account List
F.21 A/R: Open Items
F.22 A/R: Open Item Sorted List
F.23 A/R: Account Balances
F.24 A/R: Interest Ior Days Overdue
F.25 Bill oI Exchange List
F.26 A/R: Balance Interest Calculation
F.27 A/R: Periodic Account Statements
F.28 Customers: Reset Credit Limit
F.29 A/R: Set Up InIo System 1
F.2A Calc.cust.int.on arr.: Post (w/o OI)
F.2B Calc.cust.int.on arr.: Post(with OI)
F.2C Calc.cust.int.on arr.: w/o postings
F.2D Customrs: FI-SD mast.data comparison
F.2E Reconciliation Btwn AIIiliated Comps
F.2F Management Acct Group Reconciliation
F.2G Create Account Group Reconcil. G/L
F.30 A/R: Evaluate InIo System
F.31 Credit Management - Overview
F.32 Credit Management - Missing Data
F.33 Credit Management - BrieI Overview
F.34 Credit Management - Mass Change
F.35 Credit Master Sheet
F.36 Adv.Ret.on Sls/Pur.Form Printout(DE)
F.37 Adv.rept.tx sls/purch.Iorm print (BE
F.38 TransIer Posting oI DeIerred Tax
F.39 C FI Maint. table T042Z (BillExcTyp)
F.40 A/P: Account List
F.41 A/P: Open Items
F.42 A/P: Account Balances
F.44 A/P: Balance Interest Calculation
F.45 A/P: Set Up InIo System 1
F.46 A/P: Evaluate InIo System
F.47 Vendors: calc.oI interest on arrears
F.48 Vendors: FI-MM mast.data comparison
F.4A Calc.vend.int.on arr.: Post (w/o OI)
F.4B Calc.vend.int.on arr.: Post(with OI)
F.4C Calc.vend.int.on arr.: w/o postings
F.50 G/L: ProIitability Segment Adiustmnt
F.51 G/L: Open Items
F.52 G/L: Acct Bal.Interest Calculation
F.53 G/L: Account Assignment Manual
F.54 G/L: Structured Account Balances
F.56 Delete Recurring Document
F.57 G/L: Delete Sample Documents
F.58 OI Bal.Audit Trail: Ir.Document File
F.59 Accum.Clas.Aud.Trail: Create Extract
F.5A Accum.Clas.Aud.Trail: Eval.Extract
F.5B Accum.OI Aud.Trail: Create Extract
F.5C Accum.OI Audit Trail: Display Extr.
F.5D G/L: Update Bal. Sheet Adiustment
F.5E G/L: Post Balance Sheet Adiustment
F.5F G/L: Balance Sheet Adiustment Log
F.5G G/L: Subseq.Adiustment(BA/PC) Sp.ErA
F.5I G/L: Adv.Rep.I.Tx on Sls/Purch.w.Jur
F.61 Correspondence: Print Requests
F.62 Correspondence: Print Int.Documents
F.63 Correspondence: Delete Requests
F.64 Correspondence: Maintain Requests
F.65 Correspondence: Print Letters (Cust)
F.66 Correspondence: Print Letters (Vend)
F.70 Bill/Exchange Pmnt Request Dunning
F.71 DME with Disk: B/Excha. Presentation
F.75 Extended Bill/Exchange InIormation
F.77 C FI Maintain Table T045D
F.78 C FI Maintain Table T045B
F.79 C FI Maintain Table T045G
F.80 Mass Reversal oI Documents
F.81 Reverse Posting Ior Accr./DeIer.Docs
F.90 C FI Maintain Table T045F
F.91 C FI Maintain Table T045L
F.92 C FI Maintain T012K (Bill/Exch.)
F.93 Maintain Bill Liability and Rem.Risk
F.97 General Ledger: Report Selection
F.98 Vendors: Report Selection
F.99 Customers: Report Selection
F/LA Create Pricing Report
F/LB Change pricing reports
F/LC Display pricing reports
F/LD Execute pricing reports
F00 SAPoIIice: Short Message
F000 Accounting
F010 ABAP/4 Reporting: Fiscal Year Change
F01N Debit position RA single reversal
F01O Vacancy RU single reversal
F01P Accruals/deIerrals single reversal
F01Q Debit position MC single reversal
F01R MC settlement single reversal
F01S Reverse Periodic Posting
F01T Reverse Acc./DeI. General Contract
F040 Reorganization
F041 Bank Master Data Archiving
F042 G/L Accounts Archiving
F043 Customer Archiving
F044 Vendor Archiving
F045 Document Archiving
F046 Transaction Figures Archiving
F101 ABAP/4 Reporting: Balance Sheet Adi.
F103 ABAP/4 Reporting: TransIer Receivbls
F104 ABAP/4 Reporting: Receivbls Provisn
F107 FI Valuation Run
F110 Parameters Ior Automatic Payment
F111 Parameters Ior Payment oI PRequest
F13E ABAP/4 Report: Automatic Clearing
F150 Dunning Run
F48A Document Archiving
F53A Archiving oI G/L Accounts
F53V Management oI G/L Account Archives
F56A Customer Archiving
F58A Archiving oI Vendors
F61A Bank archiving
F64A Transaction Figure Archiving
F66A Archiving oI Bank Data Storage
F80 Display FI Main Role DeIinition
F81 Maintain FI Main Role DeIinition
F82 Display FI Amount Groups
F83 Maintain FI Amount Groups
F8B4 C FI Maintain Table TBKDC
F8B6N C FI Maintain Table TBKPV
F8BC C FI Maintain Table TBKFK
F8BF C FI Maintain Table T042Y
F8BG Maintain Global Data Ior F111
F8BH Inconsistencies T042I and T042Y
F8BJ Maintain Clearing Accts (Rec.Bank)
F8BK Maintain ALE-Compatible Pmnt Methods
F8BM Maintain numb.range: Payment request
F8BN Corr.Acctg Documents Payment Block
F8BO Payment request archiving
F8BR Levels Ior Payment Requests
F8BS Detail display oI payment requests
F8BT Display Payment Requests
F8BU Create payment runs automatically
F8BV Reversal oI Bank-to-Bank TransIers
F8BW Reset Cleared Items: Payt Requests
F8BZ F111 Customizing
F8XX Payment Request No. Ranges KI3-F8BM
FA39 Call up report with report variant
FAKA ConIig.: Show Display Format
FAKP ConIig.: Maintain Display Format
FAR1 S FI-ARI Maint. table T061A
FARA S FI-ARI Maint. table T061P/Q
FARB C FI-ARI Maint. table T061R
FARI AR InterIace: Third-party applicatns
FARY Table T061S
FARZ Table T061V
FAX1 BC sample SAP DE 2.1
FAX2 BC sample 2 SAP DE 2.1
FB00 Accounting Editing Options
FB01 Post Document
FB02 Change Document
FB03 Display Document
FB03Z Display Document/Payment Usage
FB04 Document Changes
FB05 Post with Clearing
FB05OLD Post with clearing
FB07 Control Totals
FB08 Reverse Document
FB09 Change Line Items
FB10 Invoice/Credit Fast Entry
FB11 Post Held Document
FB12 Request Irom Correspondence
FB13 Release Ior Payments
FB1D Clear Customer
FB1K Clear Vendor
FB1S Clear G/L Account
FB21 Enter Statistical Posting
FB22 Reverse Statistical Posting
FB31 Enter Noted Item
FB41 Post Tax Payable
FB50 G/L Acct Pstg: Single Screen Trans.
FB60 Enter Incoming Invoices
FB65 Enter Incoming Credit Memos
FB70 Enter Outgoing Invoices
FB75 Enter Outgoing Credit Memos
FB99 Check iI Documents can be Archived
FBA1 Customer Down Payment Request
FBA2 Post Customer Down Payment
FBA3 Clear Customer Down Payment
FBA6 Vendor Down Payment Request
FBA7 Post Vendor Down Payment
FBA7OLD Post Vendor Down Payment
FBA8 Clear Vendor Down Payment
FBA8OLD Clear Vendor Down Payment
FBB1 Post Foreign Currency Valn
FBBA Display Acct Determination ConIig.
FBBP Maintain Acct Determination ConIig.
FBCJ Cash Journal
FBCJC0 C FI Maintain Tables TCJCJOURNALS
FBCJC1 Cash Journal Document Number Range
FBCJC2 C FI Maint. Tables TCJTRANSACTIONS
FBCJC3 C FI Maintain Tables TCJPRINT
FBCOPY Copy Function Module
FBD1 Enter Recurring Entry
FBD2 Change Recurring Entry
FBD3 Display Recurring Entry
FBD4 Display Recurring Entry Changes
FBD5 Realize Recurring Entry
FBD9 Enter Recurring Entry
FBDF Menu Banque de France
FBE1 Create Payment Advice
FBE2 Change Payment Advice
FBE3 Display Payment Advice
FBE6 Delete Payment Advice
FBE7 Add to Payment Advice Account
FBF1 C80 Reporting Minus Sp.G/L Ind.
FBF2 Financial Transactions
FBF3 Control Report
FBF4 Download Documents
FBF5 Reports Minus Vendor Accounts
FBF6 Document Changes
FBF7 C80 Reports Minus Sp.G/L Ind.
FBF8 C84 Reports
FBFT Customizing BDF
FBIPU Maintain bank chains Ior partner
FBKA Display Accounting ConIiguration
FBKF FBKP/Carry Out Function (Internal)
FBKP Maintain Accounting ConIiguration
FBL1 Display Vendor Line Items
FBL1N Vendor Line Items
FBL2 Change Vendor Line Items
FBL2N Vendor Line Items
FBL3 Display G/L Account Line Items
FBL3N G/L Account Line Items
FBL4 Change G/L Account Line Items
FBL4N G/L Account Line Items
FBL5 Display Customer Line Items
FBL5N Customer Line Items
FBL6 Change Customer Line Items
FBL6N Customer Line Items
FBM1 Enter Sample Document
FBM2 Change Sample Document
FBM3 Display Sample Document
FBM4 Display Sample Document Changes
FBMA Display Dunning Procedure
FBME Banks
FBMP Maintain Dunning Procedure
FBN1 Accounting Document Number Ranges
FBN2 Number Range Maintenance: FIPYORD
FBP1 Enter Payment Request
FBR1 Post with ReIerence Document
FBR2 Post Document
FBRA Reset Cleared Items
FBRC Reset Cleared Items (Payment Cards)
FBS1 Enter Accrual/DeIerral Doc.
FBTA Display Text Determin.ConIiguration
FBTP Maintain Text Determin.ConIiguration
FBU2 Change Intercompany Document
FBU3 Display Intercompany Document
FBU8 Reverse Cross-Company Code Document
FBV0 Post Parked Document
FBV1 Park Document
FBV2 Change Parked Document
FBV3 Display Parked Document
FBV4 Change Parked Document (Header)
FBV5 Document Changes oI Parked Documents
FBV6 Parked Document $
FBVB Post Parked Document
FBW1 Enter Bill oI Exchange Pmnt Request
FBW2 Post Bill oI Exch.acc.to Pmt Request
FBW3 Post Bill oI Exchange Usage
FBW4 Reverse Bill Liability
FBW5 Customer Check/Bill oI Exchange
FBW6 Vendor Check/Bill oI Exchange
FBW7 Bank Iile to Iile system (Ior FBWD)
FBW8 File to Bank (Ior Transaction FBWD)
FBW9 C FI Maintain Table T045DTA
FBWA C FI Maintain Table T046a
FBWD Returned Bills oI Exchange Payable
FBWD2 Parameter Transaction Ior FBWD
FBWE Bill/Exch.Presentatn - International
FBWQ C FI Maintain Table T045T
FBWR C FI Maintain Table T045W
FBWS C FI Maintain Table T046s
FBZ0 Display/Edit Payment Proposal
FBZ1 Post Incoming Payments
FBZ2 Post Outgoing Payments
FBZ3 Incoming Payments Fast Entry
FBZ4 Payment with Printout
FBZ5 Print Check For Payment Document
FBZ8 Display Payment Run
FBZA Display Pmnt Program ConIiguration
FBZG Failed Customer Payments
FBZP Maintain Pmnt Program ConIiguration
FC10 Financial Statements Comparison
FC11 Data Extract Ior FI TransIer
FC80 Document C80
FC82 Document C82
FCAA Check Archiving
FCC1 Payment Cards: Settlement
FCC2 Payment Cards: Repeat Settlement
FCC3 Payment Cards: Delete Logs
FCC4 Payment Cards: Display Logs
FCCR Payment Card Evaluations
FCH1 Display Check InIormation
FCH2 Display Payment Document Checks
FCH3 Void Checks
FCH4 Renumber Checks
FCH5 Create Check InIormation
FCH6 Change Check InIormation/Cash Check
FCH7 Reprint Check
FCH8 Reverse Check Payment
FCH9 Void Issued Check
FCHA Check archiving
FCHB Check retrieval
FCHD Delete Payment Run Check InIormation
FCHE Delete Voided Checks
FCHF Delete Manual Checks
FCHG Delete cashing/extract data
FCHI Check Lots
FCHK Check Tracing Initial Menu
FCHN Check Register
FCHR Online Cashed Checks
FCHT Change check/payment allocation
FCHU Create ReIerence Ior Check
FCHV C FI Maintain Table TVOID
FCHX Check Extract - Creation
FCIWCU BW Customizing Ior CS
FCIWD00 Download InIoObiect text
FCIWD10 Download InIoObiect hierarchies
FCKR International cashed checks
FCMM C FI Preparations Ior consolidation
FCMN FI Initial Consolidation Menu
FCV1 Create A/R Summary
FCV2 Delete A/R Summary
FCV3 Early Warning List
FCBWBEX Business Explorer Analyser
FCBWRSA1 BW Administrator Workbench
FCBWRSZDELETE Delete BW Query Obiects
FCBWRSZV Maintain BW Variables
FD-1 Number range maintenance: FVVDRANL
FD01 Create Customer (Accounting)
FD02 Change Customer (Accounting)
FD02CORE Maintain customer
FD03 Display Customer (Accounting)
FD04 Customer Changes (Accounting)
FD05 Block Customer (Accounting)
FD06 Mark Customer Ior Deletion (Acctng)
FD08 ConIirm Customer Individually(Actng)
FD09 ConIirm Customer List (Accounting)
FD10 Customer Account Balance
FD10N Customer Balance Display
FD10NA Customer Bal. Display with Worklist
FD11 Customer Account Analysis
FD15 TransIer customer changes: send
FD16 TransIer customer changes: receive
FD24 Credit Limit Changes
FD32 Change Customer Credit Management
FD33 Display Customer Credit Management
FD37 Credit Management Mass Change
FDCU Loans customizing menu
FDFD Cash Management Implementation Tool
FDI0 Execute Report
FDI1 Create Report
FDI2 Change Report
FDI3 Display Report
FDI4 Create Form
FDI5 Change Form
FDI6 Display Form
FDIB Background Processing
FDIC Maintain Currency Translation Type
FDIK Maintain Key Figures
FDIM Report Monitor
FDIO Transport Reports
FDIP Transport Forms
FDIQ Import Reports Irom Client 000
FDIR Import Forms Irom Client 000
FDIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report
FDIV Maintain Global Variable
FDIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports
FDIY Reorganize Report Data
FDIZ Reorganize Forms
FDK43 Credit Management - Master Data List
FDMN
FDOO Borrower's notes order overview
FDTA TemSe/REGUT Data Administration
FDTT Treasury Data Medium Administration
FEBA Postprocess Electronic Bank Statmt
FEBC Generate Multicash Iormat
FEBMSG Display Internet Messages
FEBOAS Request Account Statement via OFX
FEBOFX OFX Functions
FEBP Post Electronic Bank Statement
FEBSTS Search String Search Simulation
FESR Importing oI POR File (Switzerland)
FEUB Adiust VIBEPP aIter EURO conversion
FEUI Real Estate Implementation Guide
FF$3 Send planning data to central system
FF$4 Retrieve planning data
FF$5 Retrieve transmission results
FF$6 Check settings
FF$7 Check all external systems
FF$A Maintain TR-CM subsystems
FF$B Convert Planning Group
FF$C Convert planning level
FF$D Convert business areas
FF$L Display transmission inIormation
FF$S Display transmission inIormation
FF$X ConIigure the central TR-CM system
FF-1 Outstanding Checks
FF-2 Outstanding Bills oI Exchange
FF-3 Cash Management Summary Records
FF-4 CMF Data In Accounting Documents
FF-5 CMF Records Ir.Materials Management
FF-6 CMF Records Irom Sales
FF-7 Forecast Item Journal
FF-8 Payment Advice Journal
FF-9 Journal
FF.1 Standard G/L Account Interest Scale
FF.3 G/L Account Cashed Checks
FF.4 Vendor Cashed Checks
FF.5 Import Electronic Bank Statement
FF.6 Display Electronic Bank Statement
FF.7 Payment Advice Comparison
FF.8 Print Payment Orders
FF.9 Post Payment Orders
FF.D Generate payt req. Irom advices
FF/1 Compare Bank Terms
FF/2 Compare value date
FF/3 Archive advices Irom bank statements
FF/4 Import electronic check deposit list
FF/5 Post electronic check deposit list
FF/6 Deposit/loan mgmt analysis/posting
FF/7 Deposit/loan management int accruals
FF/8 Import Bank Statement into Cash Mgmt
FF/9 Compare Advices with Bank Statement
FF63 Create Planning Memo Record
FF65 List oI Cash Management Memo Records
FF67 Manual Bank Statement
FF68 Manual Check Deposit Transaction
FF6A Edit Cash Mgmt Pos Payment Advices
FF6B Edit liquidity Iorecast planned item
FF70 Cash Mgmt Posit./Liquidity Forecast
FF71 Cash Position
FF72 Liquidity Iorecast
FF73 Cash Concentration
FF74 Use Program to Access Cash Concntn
FF7A Cash Position
FF7B Liquidity Iorecast
FF:1 Maintain exchange rates
FFB4 Import electronic check deposit list
FFB5 Post electronic check deposit list
FFLOLD Display Transmission InIormation
FFSOLD Display Transmission InIormation
FFTL Telephone list
FFW1 Wire Authorization
FFWR Post Payment Requests Irom Advice
FFWRREQUESTS Create Payment Requests Irom Advice
FF1 Standard G/L Account Interest Scale
FF3 G/L Account Cashed Checks
FF4 Vendor Cashed Checks
FF5 Import Electronic Bank Statement
FF6 Display Electronic Bank Statement

SAP F %ransaction Code List

FG99 Flexible G/L: Report Selection
FGI0 Execute Report
FGI1 Create Report
FGI2 Change Report
FGI3 Display Report
FGI4 Create Form
FGI5 Change Form
FGI6 Display Form
FGIB Background Processing
FGIC Maintain Currency Translation Type
FGIK Maintain Key Figures
FGIM Report Monitor
FGIO Transport Reports
FGIP Transport Forms
FGIQ Import Reports Irom Client 000
FGIR Import Forms Irom Client 000
FGIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report.
FGIV Maintain Global Variable
FGIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports
FGIY Reorganize Report Data
FGIZ Reorganize Forms
FGM0 Special Purpose Ledger Menu
FGRP Report Painter
FGRW Report Writer Menu
FI01 Create Bank
FI02 Change Bank
FI03 Display Bank
FI04 Display Bank Changes
FI06 Mark Bank Ior Deletion
FI07 Change Current Number Range Number
FI12 Change House Banks/Bank Accounts
FI12CORE Change House Banks/Bank Accounts
FI13 Display House Banks/Bank Accounts
FIBB Bank chain determination
FIBC Scenarios Ior Bank Chain Determin.
FIBD Allocation client
FIBF Maintenance transaction BTE
FIBHS Display bank chains Ior house banks
FIBHU Maintain bank chains Ior house banks
FIBL1 Control Origin Indicator
FIBL2 Assign Origin
FIBL3 Group oI House Bank Accounts
FIBPS Display bank chians Ior partners
FIBPU Maintain bank chains Ior partner
FIBTS Dis. bank chains Ior acct carry over
FIBTU Main. bank chains Ior acctCarry over
FIHC Create Inhouse Cash Center
FILAUFWFCUST Store Order: WorkIlow Customizing
FILE Cross-Client File Names/Paths
FILINVWFCUST Store Inventory:WorkIlow Customizing
FINA Branch to Financial Accounting
FINF InIo System Events
FINP InIo System Processes
FITPRESPO Contact Partner Responsibilities
FITPSETTINGS Settings Ior Travel Planning
FITPSETTINGSTREE Tree Maintenance Current Settings
FITVFELD Tree
FJA1 InIlation Adiustment oI G/L Accounts
FJA2 Reset Transaction Data G/L Acc.InIl.
FJA3 Balance Sheet/P&L with InIlation
FJA4 InIl. Adiustment oI Open Items (FC)
FJA5 InIl. Adi. oI Open Receivables (LC)
FJA6 InIl. Adi. oI Open Payables (LC)
FJEE Exercise Subscription Right
FK01 Create Vendor (Accounting)
FK02 Change Vendor (Accounting)
FK02CORE Maintain vendor
FK03 Display Vendor (Accounting)
FK04 Vendor Changes (Accounting)
FK05 Block Vendor (Accounting)
FK06 Mark Vendor Ior Deletion (Acctng)
FK08 ConIirm Vendor Individually (Acctng)
FK09 ConIirm Vendor List (Accounting)
FK10 Vendor Account Balance
FK10N Vendor Balance Display
FK10NA Vendor Balance Display
FK15 TransIer vendor changes: receive
FK16 TransIer vendor changes: receive
FKI0 Execute Report
FKI1 Create Report
FKI2 Change Report
FKI3 Display Report
FKI4 Create Form
FKI5 Change Form
FKI6 Display Form
FKIB Background Processing
FKIC Maintain Currency Translation Type
FKIK Maintain Key Figures
FKIM Report Monitor
FKIO Transport Reports
FKIP Transport Forms
FKIQ Import Reports Irom Client 000
FKIR Import Forms Irom Client 000
FKIT Translation Tool - Drilldown Report.
FKIV Maintain Global Variable
FKIX Reorganize Drilldown Reports
FKIY Reorganize Report Data
FKIZ Reorganize Forms
FKMN
FKMT FI Acct Assignment Model Management
FLB1 Postprocessing Lockbox Data
FLB2 Import Lockbox File
FLBP Post Lockbox Data
FLCV Create/Edit Document Template WF
FM0 Display FM Main Role DeIinition
FM1 Maintain FM Main Role DeIinition
FM2 Display FM Amount Groups
FM3 Maintain FM Amount Groups
FM4 Display FM Budget Line Groups
FM5 Maintain FM Budget Line Groups
FM6 Display FM Document Classes
FM7 Maintain FM Document Classes
FM8 Display FM Activity Categories
FM9 Maintain FM Activity Categories
FMA Display Doc.Class-~Doc.Cat. Assgmt
FMB Maintain Doc.Clase-~Doc.Cat.Assgmt
FM03 Display FM Document
FM21 Change Original Budget
FM22 Display Original Budget
FM25 Change Supplement
FM26 Display Supplement
FM27 Change Return
FM28 TransIer Budget
FM29 Display Return
FM2D Display Funds Center Hierarchy
FM2E Change Budget Document
FM2F Display Budget Document
FM2G Funds Center Hierarchy
FM2H Maintain Funds Center Hierarchy
FM2I Create Funds Center
FM2S Display Funds Center
FM2T Change Releases
FM2U Change Funds Center
FM2V Display Releases
FM3D Display Commitment Item Hierarchy
FM3G Commitment Item Hierarchy
FM3H Maintain Commitment Item Hierarchy
FM3I Create Commitment Item
FM3N Commitment Items Ior G/L Accounts
FM3S Display Commitment Item
FM3U Change Commitment Item
FM48 Change Financial Budget: Initial Scn
FM481 PS-CM: Create Planning Layout
FM482 PS-CM: Change Planning Layout
FM483 PS-CM: Display Planning Layout
FM49 Display Financial Budget: Init.Scrn
FM4G Budget Structure Element Hierarchy
FM5I Create Fund
FM5S Display Fund
FM5U Change Fund
FM5DEL Delete Iund preselection
FM5DISP Display Iund preselection
FM5SEL Preselection Fund
FM6I Create Application oI Funds
FM6S Display Application oI Funds
FM6U Change Application oI Funds
FM71 Maintain Cover Pools
FM72 Assign FM Acct Asst to Cover Pool
FM78 Charact.Groups Ior Cover Pools
FM79 Grouping Chars Ior Cover Pool
FM7A Display Cover Eligibility Rules
FM7I Create Attributes Ior FM Acct Asst
FM7P Maintain Cover Eligibility Rules
FM7S Display Cover Eligibility Rules
FM7U Maintain Cover Eligibility Rules
FM9B Copy Budget Version
FM9C Plan Data TransIer Irom CO
FM9D Lock Budget Version
FM9E Unlock Budget Version
FM9F Delete Budget Version
FM9G Roll Up Supplement
FM9H Roll up Original Budget
FM9I Roll Up Return
FM9J Roll Up Releases
FM9K Change Budget Structure
FM9L Display Budget Structure
FM9M Delete Budget Structure
FM9N Generate Budget Obiect
FM9P Reconstruct Budget Distrbtd Values
FM9Q Total Up Budget
FM9W Adiust Funds Management Budget
FMA1 Matching: Totals and Balances (CBM)
FMA2 Matching: CBM Line Items and Totals
FMA3 Matching: FI Line Items (CBM)
FMA4 Matching: FI Bank Line Items (CBM)
FMAA Matching: Line Items and Totals (FM)
FMAB Matching: FI FM Line Items
FMAC Leveling: FM Commitment Line Items
FMAD Leveling: FI-FM Totals Records
FMAE Display Change Documents
FMAF Level Line Items and Totals Items
FMB0 CO Document TransIer
FMB1 Display Security Prices-Collect.
FMBI Use Revenues to Increase Expend.Bdgt
FMBUD005 FIFM Budget Data Export
FMBUD006 FIFM Budget Data Import
FMBV Activate Availability Control
FMC2 Customizing in Day-to-Day Business
FMCB Reassignment: Document Selection
FMCC Reassignment: FM-CO Assignment
FMCD Reassignment: Delete Work List
FMCG Reassignment: Overall Assignment
FMCN Reassignment: Supplement.Acct Assgt
FMCR Reassignment: Display Work List
FMCT Reassignment: TransIer
FMD1 Change CarryIorward Rules
FMD2 Display CarryIorward Rules
FMDM Monitor Closing Operations
FMDS Copy CarryIorward Rules
FMDT Display CarryIorward Rules
FME1 Import Forms Irom Client 000
FME2 Import Reports Irom Client 000
FME3 Transport Forms
FME4 Transport Reports
FME5 Reorganize Forms
FME6 Reorganize Drilldown Reports
FME7 Reorganize Report Data
FME8 Maintain Batch Variants
FME9 Translation Tool - Drilldown
FMEB Structure Report Backgrnd Processing
FMEH SAP-EIS: Hierarchy Maintenance
FMEK FMCA: Create Drilldown Report
FMEL FMCA: Change Drilldown Report
FMEM FMCA: Display Drilldown Report
FMEN FMCA: Create Form
FMEO FMCA: Change Form
FMEP FMCA: Display Form
FMEQ FMCA: Run Drilldown Report
FMER FMCA: Drilldown Tool Test Monitor
FMEURO1 Create Euro FM Area
FMEURO2 ReIresh Euro Master Data
FMEURO3 Display Euro FM Areas
FMEURO4 Deactivate Euro FM Areas
FMEV Maintain Global Variable
FMF0 Payment Selection
FMF1 Revenue TransIer
FMG1 FM: Create Commitment Item Group
FMG2 FM: Change Commitment Item Group
FMG3 FM: Display Commitment Item Group
FMG4 FM: Delete Commitment Item Group
FMG5 Generate BS Obiects Ir.Cmmt Item Grp
FMHC Check Bdgt Structure Elements in HR
FMHG Generate Bdgt Struc Elements in HR
FMHGG Generate BS Elements I. Several Fnds
FMHH Master Data Check
FMHIST Apportion Document in FM
FMHV Budget Memo Texts
FMIA Display Rules Ior Revs.Incr.Budget
FMIB Increase Budget by Revenues
FMIC Generate Additional Budget Incr.Data
FMIL Delete Rules Ior Revs Incr. Budget
FMIP Maintain Rules Ior Revs.Incr.Budget
FMIS Display Rules Ior Revs.Incr.Budget
FMIU Maintain Rules Ior Revs.Incr.Budget
FMJ1 Fiscal Year Close: Select Commitment
FMJ1TR Settlement: Select Commitment
FMJ2 Fiscal Year Close: Carr.Fwd Commts
FMJ2TR Settlement: TransIer Commitment
FMJ3 Reverse Commitments CarryIorward
FMJA Budget Fiscal Year Close: Prepare
FMJATR Budget Settlement: Prepare
FMJB Determine Budget Year-End Closing
FMJBTR Budget Settlement: Determine
FMJC Budget Fiscal-Year Close: Carry Fwd
FMJCTR Budget Settlement: TransIer
FMJD Reverse Fiscal Year Close: Budget
FMLD Ledger Deletion
FMLF ClassiIy Movement Types
FMN0 Subsequent Posting oI FI Documents
FMN1 Subsequent Posting oI MM Documents
FMN2 Subsequent Posting oI Billing Docs
FMN3 TransIer Purchase Req. Documents
FMN4 TransIer Purchase Order Documents
FMN5 TransIer Funds Reservation Documents
FMN8 Simulation Lists Debit Position
FMN8OLD Simulation Lists Debit Position
FMN9 Posted Debit Position List
FMN9OLD Posted Debit Position List
FMNA Display CBA Rules
FMNP Maintain CBA Rules
FMNR Assign SN-BUSTL to CBA
FMNS Display CBA Rules
FMNU Maintain CBA Rules
FMP0 Maintain Financial Budget
FMP1 Display Financial Budget
FMP2 Delete Financial Budget Version
FMR0 Reconstruct Parked Documents
FMR1 Actual/Commitment Report
FMR2 Actual/Commitment per Company Code
FMR3 Plan/Actual/Commitment Report
FMR4 Plan/Commitment Report w.Hierarchy
FMR5A 12 Period Forecast: Actual and Plan
FMR6A Three Period Display: Plan/Actual
FMRA Access Report Tree
FMRB Access Report Tree
FMREARCH Archive Earmarked Funds
FMREEWU01 Earmarked Funds: Euro Preprocessing
FMREEWU02 Earmarked Funds: Euro Postprocessing
FMRESERLK Close Earmarked Funds
FMRP18 Clear Subsequent Postings
FMSS Display Status Assignment
FMSU Change Assigned Status
FMU0 Display Funds Reservation Doc.Types
FMU1 Maintain Funds Reservation Doc.Types
FMU2 Display Funds Reservtn Fld Variants
FMU3 Maintain Funds Resvtn Field Variants
FMU4 Display Funds Reservation Fld Groups
FMU5 Maintain Funds Reservatn Fld Groups
FMU6 Display Funds Reservtn Field Selctn
FMU7 Maintain Funds Resvtn Field Selctn
FMU8 Display Template Type Ior Fds Resvtn
FMU9 Maintain Template Type Ior Fds Resvn
FMUA Dispay Fds Res.Template Type Fields
FMUB Maintain Fds Res.Template Type Flds
FMUC Display Funds Res. ReIerence Type
FMUD Maintain Funds Res.ReIerence Type
FMUE Display Funds Res.ReI.Type Fields
FMUF Maintaine Fds Rsvtn ReI.Type Fields
FMUG Display Reasons Ior Decision
FMUH Maintain Reasons Ior Decisions
FMUI Display Groups Ior WorkIlow Fields
FMUJ Maintain Groups Ior WorkIlow Fields
FMUK Display Fields in Groups Ior WF
FMUL Maintain Fields in Groups Ior WF
FMUM Display Field Selctn -~Variant/Group
FMUN Display Field Seln-~Variant/Group
FMUV Funds Resvtn Field Status Var.Asst
FMV1 Create Forecast oI Revenue
FMV2 Change Forecast oI Revenue
FMV3 Display Forecast oI Revenue
FMV4 Approve Forecast oI Revenue
FMV5 Change FM Acct Asst in Fcst oI Rev.
FMV6 Reduce Forecast oI Revenue Manually
FMVI Create Summarization Item
FMVO Fund Balance CarryIorward
FMVS Display Summarization Item
FMVT Carry Forward Fund Balance
FMVU Change Summarization Item
FMW1 Create Funds Blocking
FMW2 Change Funds Blocking
FMW3 Display Funds Blocking
FMW4 Approve Funds Blocking
FMW5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Blkg
FMWA Create Funds TransIer
FMWAZ Payment TransIer
FMWB Change Funds TransIer
FMWC Display Funds TransIer
FMWD Approve Funds TransIer
FMWE Change FM Acct Asst in Funds TrsIr
FMX1 Create Funds Reservation
FMX2 Change Funds Reservation
FMX3 Display Funds Reservation
FMX4 Approve Funds Reservation
FMX5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Resvn
FMX6 Funds Reservation: Manual Reduction
FMY1 Create Funds Commitment
FMY2 Change Funds Commitment
FMY3 Display Funds Precommitment
FMY4 Approve Funds Precommitment
FMY5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Prcmmt
FMY6 Reduce Funds Precommitment Manually
FMZ1 Create Funds Commitment
FMZ2 Change Funds Commitment
FMZ3 Display Funds Commitment
FMZ4 Approve Funds Commitment
FMZ5 Change FM Acct Asst in Funds Commt
FMZ6 Reduce Funds Commitment Manually
FMZBVT Carry Forward Balance
FMZZ Revalue Funds Commitments
FMDL07 Delete Worklist
FMDLFI Deletes FI Documnts TransIerred Irom
FMDLFM Deletes all FM Data (Iast)
FMDLOI Deletes Cmmts TransIerred Irom FM
FMEUROM Parameter maintenance Ior euro conv.
FMRC06 Reconcile FI Paymts-~ FM Totals Itms
FMRC07 Reconcile FI Paymts-~ FM Line Items
FMRC08 Reconcile FM Paymts -~ FM Line Items
FMRC11 Select Old Payments
FMS123 GR/IR: Post OIs to FM Again
FMS201 Post Payments on Account to FIFM
FMSD07 Display Worklist
FN-1 No.range: FVVDRANL (Loan number)
FN-4 Number range maintenance: FVVDPNNR
FN-5 Number range maintenance: FVVDSNBNR
FN-6 Number range maintenance: FVVDRPNR
FN09 Create Borrower's Note Order
FN11 Change borrower's note order
FN12 Display borrower's note order
FN13 Delete borrower's note order
FN15 Create borrower's note contract
FN16 Change borrower's note contract
FN17 Display borrower's note contract
FN18 PayoII borrower's note contract
FN19 Reverse borrower's note contract
FN1A Create other loan contract
FN1V Create other loan contract
FN20 Create borrower's note oIIer
FN21 Change borrower's note oIIer
FN22 Display borrower's note oIIer
FN23 Delete borrower's note oIIer
FN24 Activate borrower's note oIIer
FN2A Change other loan application
FN2V Change other loan contract
FN30 Create policy interested party
FN31 Change policy interested party
FN32 Display policy interested party
FN33 Delete policy interested party
FN34 Policy interested party in applic.
FN35 Policy interested party in contract
FN37 Loan Reversal Chain
FN3A Display other loan application
FN3V Display other loan contract
FN40 Create other loan interested party
FN41 Change other loan interested party
FN42 Display other loan interested party
FN43 Delete other loan interested party
FN44 Other loan interest.party in applic.
FN45 Other loan interested prty in cntrct
FN4A Delete other loan application
FN4V Delete other loan contract
FN5A Other loan application in contract
FN5V PayoII other loan contract
FN61 Create collateral value
FN62 Change collateral value
FN63 Display collateral value
FN70 List 25
FN72 List 54
FN80 Enter manual debit position
FN81 Change manual debit position
FN82 Display manual debit position
FN83 Create waiver
FN84 Change waiver
FN85 Display waiver
FN86 Enter debit position depreciation
FN87 Change debit position depreciation
FN88 Display debit position depreciation
FN8A Manual Entry: Unsched. Repayment
FN8B Manual Entry: Other Bus. Operations
FN8C Manual Entry: Charges
FN8D Post Planned Records
FNA0 Policy application in contract
FNA1 Create mortgage application
FNA2 Change mortgage application
FNA3 Display mortgage application
FNA4 Complete mortgage application
FNA5 Mortgage application in contract
FNA6 Create policy application
FNA7 Change policy application
FNA8 Display policy application
FNA9 Delete policy application
FNAA Reactivate deleted mortgage applic.
FNAB Reactivate deleted mortg. int.party
FNAC Reactivate deleted mortgage contract
FNAD Reactivate deleted policy applicat.
FNAE Reactivate deleted policy contract
FNAG Reactivate deleted other loan applic
FNAH Reactivate del. other loan int.party
FNAI Reactivate deleted other loan cntrct
FNAK Select Iile character
FNAL Reactivate deleted BNL contract
FNAM Reactivate deleted policy contract
FNASL Loans: Account Analysis
FNB1 TransIer to a Loan
FNB2 TransIer Irom a Loan
FNB3 Document Reversal - Loans
FNB8 BAV InIormation
FNB9 BAV transIer
FNBD Loans-Automatic bal.sheet transIer
FNBG Guarantee charges list
FNBU DARWIN- Loans accounting menu
FNCD TransIer Customizing Ior Dunning
FNCW1 Maintain Standard Role
FNCW2 Transaction Release: Adiust WorkIlow
FNDD Convert Dunning Data in Dunn.History
FNEN Create Loan
FNENALG Create General Loan
FNENHYP Create Mortgage Loan
FNENPOL Create Policy Loan
FNENSSD Create Borrower's Note Loan
FNF1 Rollover: Create Iile
FNF2 Rollover: Change Iile
FNF3 Rollover: Display Iile
FNF4 Rollover: Fill Iile
FNF9 Rollover: Evaluations
FNFO ISIS: Create Iile
FNFP ISIS: Change Iile
FNFQ ISIS: Display Iile
FNFR ISIS: Fill Iile
FNFT Rollover: File evaluation
FNFU Rollover: Update Iile
FNG2 Total Loan Commitment
FNG3 Total Commitment
FNI0
FNI1 Create mortgage application
FNI2 Change mortgage application
FNI3 Display mortgage application
FNI4 Delete mortgage application
FNI5 Mortgage application to oIIer
FNI6 Mortgage application in contract
FNIA Create interested party
FNIB Change interested party
FNIC Display interested party
FNID Delete interested party
FNIE Reactivate interested party
FNIH Decision-making
FNIJ Create credit standing
FNIK Change credit standing
FNIL Display credit standing
FNIN Create collateral value
FNIO Change collateral value
FNIP Display collateral value
FNK0 Multimillion Loan Display (GBA14)
FNK1 Loans to Managers (GBA15)
FNKO Cond.types - Cond.groups allocation
FNL1 Rollover: Create Main File
FNL2 Rollover: Change Main File
FNL3 Rollover: Displ. Main File Structure
FNL4 New business
FNL5 New business
FNL6 New business
FNM1 Automatic Posting
FNM1S Automatic Posting - Single
FNM2 Balance sheet transIer
FNM3 Loans reversal module
FNM4 Undisclosed assignment
FNM5 Automatic debit position simulation
FNM6 Post dunning charges/int.on arrears
FNM7 Loan reversal chain
FNMA Partner data: Settings menu
FNMD Submenu General Loans
FNME Loans management menu
FNMEC Loans Management Menu
FNMH Loans management menu
FNMI Loans inIormation system
FNMO Loans Menu Policy Loans
FNMP Rollover
FNMS Loans Menu Borrower's Notes
FNN4 Display general Iile
FNN5 Edit general Iile
FNN6 Display general main Iile
FNN7 Edit general main Iile
FNN8 Display general main Iile
FNN9 Edit general overall Iile
FNO1 Create Obiect
FNO2 Change Obiect
FNO3 Display Obiect
FNO5 Create collateral
FNO6 Change collateral
FNO7 Display collateral
FNO8 Create Obiects Irom File
FNO9 Create Collateral Irom File
FNP0 Edit rollover manually
FNP4 Rollover: Display Iile
FNP5 Rollover: Edit File
FNP6 Rollover: Display main Iile
FNP7 Rollover: Edit main Iile
FNP8 Rollover: Display overall Iile
FNP9 Rollover: Edit overall Iile
FNQ2 New Business Statistics
FNQ3 Postprocessing IP reiection
FNQ4 Customer Inc. Payment Postprocessing
FNQ5 Transact.type - Acct determinat.adi.
FNQ6 Compare Flow Type/Account Determin.
FNQ7 Generate Ilow type
FNQ8 Automatic Clearing Ior Overpayments
FNQ9 Int. adiustment run
FNQF Swiss interest adiustment run
FNQG Swiss special interest run
FNR0 Loans: Posting Journal
FNR6 Insur.prtIolio trends - NEW
FNR7 Totals and Balance List
FNR8 Account statement
FNR9 Planning list
FNRA Other accruals/deIerrals
FNRB Memo record update
FNRC Accruals/deIerrals reset
FNRD Display incoming payments
FNRE Reverse incoming payments
FNRI PortIolio Analysis Discount/Premium
FNRS Reversal Accrual/DeIerral
FNS1 Collateral number range
FNS4 Cust. list parameters Ior loan order
FNS6 Installation parameter lists
FNS7 Loan PortIolio Trend Customizing
FNSA Foreign currency valuation
FNSB Master data summary
FNSL Balance reconciliation list
FNT0 Loan correspondence (Switzerland)
FNT1 Autom. deadline monitoring
FNT2 Copy text modules to client
FNUB Treasury transIer
FNV0 PayoII policy contract
FNV1 Create mortgage contract
FNV2 Change mortgage contract
FNV3 Display mortgage contract
FNV4 Delete mortgage contract
FNV5 PayoII mortgage contract
FNV6 Create policy contract
FNV7 Change policy contract
FNV8 Display policy contract
FNV9 Delete policy contract
FNVA Create paid oII contracts
FNVCOMPRESSION Loans: Document Data Summarization
FNVD Disburse Contract
FNVI Loans: General Overview
FNVM Change Contract
FNVR Reactivate Contract
FNVS Display Contract
FNVW Waive Contract
FNWF WF Loans Release: List oI Work Items
FNWFREP Release WorkIlow: Synchronization
FNWO Loans: Fast Processing
FNWS Housing statistics
FNX1 Rollover: Create Table
FNX2 Rollover: Change Table
FNX3 Rollover: Display Table
FNX6 Rollover: Delete Table
FNX7 Rollover: Deactivate Table
FNX8 Rollover: Print Table
FNXD TR-EDT: Documentation
FNXG List oI Bus. Partners TransIerred
FNXU List oI Imported Loans
FNY1 New Business: Create Table
FNY2 New Business: Change Table
FNY3 New Business: Display Table
FNY6 New Business: Delete Table
FNY7 New Business: Deactivate Table
FNY8 New Business: Print Table
FNZ0 Reiections report
FNZ1 Postprocessing payment transactions
FNZA Account Determination Customizing
FN1 Table maint. transIerred loans
FN2 Table maintenance transI. partner
FNUPDFELDAUSW Update Program Ior Field Selection

Useful Reports %code in SAP Financial Accounting
GENERAL LEDGER

InIormation Systems

1. Structured Account Balances (Balance Sheet & P&L Account in FS Version
Format)

SALR87012279
2. GL Account Balances (Totals & Balances ) SALR87012301
3. GL Line Items SALR87012282
4. Statements Ior GL Accounts, Customers & Vendors SALR87012332
5. Document Journal SALR87012287
6. Compact Document Journal SALR87012289
7. Line Item Journal SALR87012291
8. Display oI Changed Documents SALR87012293
9. Invoice Numbers assigned Twice SALR87012341
10. Gaps in Document Number Assignments SALR87012342
11. Posting Totals Document Type wise SALR87012344
12. Recurring Entry Documents SALR87012346

Master Data

13. Chart oI Accounts SAL:R87012326
14. GL Account List SAL:R87012328
15. Display Changes to GL Accounts SALR87012308
16. Financial Statement Version FSE2

CASH & BANK REPORTS

1. Check InIormation List FCH6
2. Check Register FCHN
3. Check Number Ranges SP9941000102


TAX REPORTS & REGISTERS

1. List oI Internally generated Excise Invoices J1I7

2. Capital Goods TransIer oI Credit J2I8
3. List oI GRs without Excise Invoice J1IGR

4. List oI SubContract Challans J1IFR

5. CENVAT Register J2I9
(Monthly Return under Rule 57AE oI the Central excise Rules Irom
which Monthly Return under Rule 7 oI the CENVAT Credit Rules 2001)

6. Registers : RG 23A/C Part I &II , RG1, PLA J1I5,J2I5,J2I6
ACCOUNTS RECEIVABLE

InIormation Systems

1. Bill Holdings (Bill oI Exchange Receivable List with ALV Iacility)
S-ALR87009987
2. Customer Balances in Local Currency SALR87012172
3. Customer Line Items SALR87012197
4. Due Dates Analysis Ior Open Items SALR87012168
5. List oI Customer Open Items SALR87012173
6. Customer Evaluation with Open Item Sorted List SALR87012176
7. Customer Payment History SALR87012177
8. Customer Open Item Analysis (Overdue Items Balance) SALR87012178
9. List oI Customer Cleared Line Items SALR87012198
10.List oI Down Payments open at key date SALR87012199
11. Debit & Credit Notes Register Monthly SALR87012287
12. Customer wise Sales SALR87012186

ACCOUNTS PAYABLE

(Note : Similar Reports available Ior A/R are available Ior A/P also)

1. Vendor Balances SALR87012082
2. Vendor Debit/Credit Memo Register SALR87012287
s there a Report displaying Master data. that is a list of vendors showing name.
address. payment
method. etc ( everything about vendor). s their any report like that and what's
the table name to display
all vendor master data too.
Go to this menu:
Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Payable -~ InIormation System -~ Reports Ior AP
accounting -~ Master Data.
How to get Report of Withholding %ax along with Vendor ame. What is the %-
Code or Path for this report?
You can get the withholding tax report Ior vendor by using these t.codes:
SP0007000134 - Generic Withholding Tax Reporting
SPL009000447 - Withholding tax report Ior the vendor
Which reports we can use for the receivables to be checked on daily basis?
Go to SAP Easy Access main menu.
Go To Accounting -~ FI Acc -~ customer(receivables) -~ inIormation system -~
reports .
Here you can get all the standard reports Ior receivables.
%he Financial Statement Closing %codes
1. Maintain Financial Statement Versions
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Documenting -~ DeIine Financial Statement Versions -
OB58
2. Execute a Balance Sheet (RFBILA00)
InIormation Systems -~ Accounting -~ Financial Accounting -~ General ledger -~
InIormation System-~ Balance Sheet
or
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ InIormation system -~
General LedgerReports -~ Balance Sheet/ProIit and Loss Statement/Cash Flow -~
General -~ Actual/Actual Comparisons -~ Balance Sheet/PL - F.01
3. Execute a Balance Sheet Drill Down Report
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ InIormation system -~
General LedgerReports -~ Balance Sheet/ProIit and Loss Statement/Cash Flow -~
General - Various
4. Execute a Cost-oI-Sales ProIit and Loss Report
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Tools -~ Report
Painter -~ Report -~ Display -~ Library 0F1, Report 0F-GUV1 -~ Display -~ Execute
- GRR3
Profit and Loss Closing %codes
1. Capital Investment Proiects Settle Order to AUC
Accounting -~ Investment management -~ Internal orders -~ Period-end closing -~
Single Iunctions -~ Settlement -~. Various
2. Capital Investment Proiects Settle AUC to asset in service
Accounting -~ Investment management -~ Fixed assets -~ Postings -~ Cap. asset u.
const. -~ Settle AIBU
3. PP/CO Period-End Closing
Logistics -~ Production -~ Production Control -~ Period-end closing -~.
or
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Product Cost Controlling -~ Cost Obiect Controlling -~
Product Cost by Order -~ Period-End Closing -~ Single Functions -~. Various
4. Internal Order Period-End Closing
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Internal Orders -~ Period-end closing -~ Single
Iunctions -~. Various
5. Cost Center Accounting Period-End Closing
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Cost Center Accounting -~ Period-end closing -~ Single
Iunctions -~. Various
6. ProIitability Analysis Period-End Closing
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ ProIitability Analysis -~ Actual Postings -~ Cost Center
Costs/Process Costs -~. KEU5, KEG5, CPAE
7. Lock Controlling Transactions
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Cost Center Accounting -~ Environment -~ Period lock
-~ Change OKP1
8. Reconciliation Ledger
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Cost Element Accounting -~ Actual postings -~
Reconciliation withFI KALC
9. Reconciliation Ledger Follow Up Postings
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Cost Element Accounting -~ Environment -~
Reconciliation ledger -~ Follow up posting KAL1
10. Reconciliation Ledger ConIiguration
IMG -~ Controlling -~ Overhead Cost Controlling -~ Cost and Revenue Element
Accounting -~ Reconciliation Ledger Various
11. Post payroll inIormation to accounting
Human Resources -~ Payroll -~ (Country-speciIic) PC00 M99 CIPE
12. ConIigure Payroll Ior posting to accounting
IMG -~ Payroll -~ Payroll: (country-speciIic) Various Customizing Technical,
Organizational and Documentary Steps
13. DeIine Iiscal year variants
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Financial Accounting Global Settings -~ Fiscal Year
-~ Maintain Fiscal Year Variant (Maintain Shortened Fisc. Year) OB29
14. Allocate Iiscal year variant to a company code
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Financial Accounting Global Settings -~ Fiscal Year
-~ Assign Company Code to a Fiscal Year Variant OB37
15. DeIine Variants Ior Open Posting Periods
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Financial Accounting Global Settings -~ Document -
~ Posting Periods -~ DeIine Variants Ior Open Posting Periods OBBO
16. Allocate Posting Period Variant to Company Code
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Financial Accounting Global Settings -~ Document -
~ Posting Periods -~ Assign Variants to Company Code OBBP
17. Open and Close Posting Periods
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Environment -~ Current
settings -~ Open and Close Posting Periods OB52
18. Carry Forward Balance to New Fiscal Year
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Carry Forward -~ Balances F.16
19. DeIine Retained Earning account
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Carrying Forward -~ DeIine Retained Rarnings Account
OB53
20. Schedule Manager
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Schedule Manager SCMA
21. Subsequent Business Area/ProIit Center Adiustment Calculate
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Regroup -~ Balance Sheet Readiustment -~ Calculate F.5D
22. Subsequent Business Area/ProIit Center Adiustment Post
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Regroup -~ Balance Sheet Readiustment -~ Post F.5E
23. TransIer B/S Items to ProIit Center Accounting
Accounting -~ Enterprise Controlling -~ ProIit Center Accounting -~ Actual Postings
-~ Period-End Closing -~ TransIer Payables/Receivables 1KEK
24. PCA Balance Carried Forward
Accounting -~ Enterprise Controlling -~ ProIit Center Accounting -~ Actual Postings
-~ Period-End Closing -~ Carrying Forward oI Balances 2KES
25. ProIit and Loss Adiustment
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Regroup -~ ProIit and Loss Adiustment F.50
26. Run Compact Document Journal
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ InIormation system -~
General Ledger Reports -~ Document -~ General -~ Compact Document Journal
27. Create Balance Audit Work Files
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Documenting -~ DeIine Accumulated Work Files Ior
Balance Audit Trail OBBQ
28. Run Monthly Balance Audit Trail Ior Open Item Accounts
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ Open item accounts -~ Open Item
Account Balance Audit Trail Irom the Document File
29. Run Monthly Balance Audit Trail Ior Other Accounts
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ All accounts -~ General Ledger Irom
the Document File
30. Create Extract Ior Accumulated Open Item Balance Audit Trail
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ Open item accounts -~ From balance
audit trail -~ Extract Ior Accumulated Open Item Audit Trail
31. Run Accumulated Open Item Balance Audit Trail
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ Open item accounts -~ From balance
audit trail -~ Accts Detailed Listing Irom Open Item Account Accumulated Audit
Trail
32. Create Extract Ior Accumulated Balance Audit Trail Ior Other Accounts
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ All accounts -~ From balance audit
trail -~ Extract Ior the Accumulated Historical Balance Audit Trail
33. Run Accumulated Balance Audit Trail Ior Other Accounts
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Document -~ Balance audit trail -~ All accounts -~ From balance audit
trail -~ Account Details Irom Historical Accumulated Balance Audit Trail
Assets and Liabilities Closing %codes
1. Process Depreciation Run
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~
Depreciation run -~ Execute - AFAB
2. Process Investment Grant
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~
Investment grant
- AR11
3. Process Revaluation
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~
Revaluation Ior the balance sheet -~ Post revaluation - AR29
4. AA Fiscal Year Change
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~ Fiscal
year change - AJRW
5. AA Fiscal Year Close Account Reconciliation
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~ Year-
end closing -~ Account reconciliation - ABST2
6. AA Fiscal Year Close
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ Periodic processing -~ Year-
end closing -~ Execute - AJAB
7. Produce Asset History Sheet
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ InIo system -~ Reports on
Asset Accounting -~ Balance Sheet Explanations -~ International -~ Asset History
Sheet
or
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Fixed assets -~ InIo system -~ Reports on
Asset Accounting -~ Balance Sheet Explanations -~ Country SpeciIics - various
8. Produce GR/IR Balance Report
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Inventory Management -~ Environment -~
Balances Display -~ List oI GR/IR Bals. - MB5S
9. Maintain GR/IR Clearing Account
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Invoice VeriIication -~ Invoice VeriIication -~
Further processing -~ Maintain GR/IR acct - MR11
10. Material Revaluations Price Changes (manual)
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Price Determination
-~ Change price - MR21
11. Material Revaluations Debit/Credit Material
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Price Determination
-~ Debit/cred. material - MR22
12. Product Costing Material Price Change
Accounting -~ Controlling -~ Product Cost Controlling -~ Product Cost Planning -~
Material Costing -~ Price Update - CK24
13. Material Ledger Closing
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Actual Costing/Material Ledger -
~ Periodic material valuation -~ Post closing - CKMI
14. Materials Management Closing
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Material Master -~ Other -~ Close period -
MMPV
15. Materials Management Closing Control Posting to Prior Period
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Material Master -~ Other -~ Allow posting to
previous period - MMRV
16. Lowest Value Determination Market Prices
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ Determ. lowest values -~ Market prices - MRN0
17. Lowest Value Determination Range oI Coverage
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ Determ. lowest values -~ Range oI coverage - MRN1
18. Lowest Value Determination Movement Rate
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ Determ. lowest values -~ Movement rate - MRN2
19. Lowest Value Determination Loss-Free Valuation
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ Determ. lowest values -~ Loss-Iree valuation - MRN3
20. LIFO Valuation
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ LIFO Valuation - Various
21. FIFO Valuation
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Valuation -~ Valuation -~ Bal. sheet valuation
-~ FIFO Valuation - Various
22. Physical Inventory Processing
Logistics -~ Materials Management -~ Physical Inventory - Various
23. Analyze GR/IR Clearing Accounts and Display Acquisition Tax
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Regroup -~ GR/IR clearing - F.19
24. DeIine Adiustment Accounts Ior GR/IR Clearing
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Regrouping -~ DeIine Adiustment Accounts Ior GR/IR
Clearing - OBYP
25. Print Balance ConIirmation
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ A/P or A/R -~ Periodic processing -~ Closing
-~ Check/count -~ Balance conIirmation: Print
or
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ A/P or A/R -~ Periodic processing -~ Print
correspondence -~ Balance conIirmation -~ Print letters - F.17
26. ConIigure Balance ConIirmation
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ A/P or A/R -~ Periodic processing -~ Closing
-~ Check/count -~.
or
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ A/P or A/R -~ Periodic processing -~ Print
correspondence -~ Balance conIirmation - F.1B, F.1A
27. Post Individual Value Adiustment
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Accounts receivable -~ Document entry -~
Other -~ Intern. trans. posting -~ Without clearing - F-21
28. DeIine Account Determination Ior Flat-Rate Individual Value Adiustment
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Closing -~ Valuate -~ Valuations -~ DeIine Accounts
OBB0
29. ConIigure Flat-Rate Individual Value Adiustment
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Closing -~ Valuate -~ Valuations -~. SPRO
30. Calculate Flat-Rate Individual Value Adiustment
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Accounts receivable -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Valuate -~ Further valuations - F107
31. Writing-OII DoubtIul Receivables
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ Accounts receivable -~ Document entry -~
Other -~ Intern. trans. psting -~ With clearing - F-30
32. Customizing Exchange Rates
IMG -~ General Settings -~ Currencies - Various
33. Maintaining Exchange Rates
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Environment -~ Current
settings -~ Enter exchange rates - OB08
34. Customizing Valuation Methods
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Valuating -~ Foreign Currency Valuation -~ DeIine
Valuation Methods - OB59
35. Foreign Currency Open Item Valuation
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing~~Valuate -~ Valuation oI Open Items in Foreign Currency - F.05
36. Account Determination Ior Exchange Rate DiIIerences
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business
Transactions -~ Closing -~ Valuating -~ Foreign Currency Valuation -~ Prepare
automatic postings Ior Ioreign currency valuation - OBA1
37. Regroup Receivables and Payables
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ A/P or A/R -~ Periodic processing -~ Closing
-~ Regroup -~ Receivables/ Payables - F101
38. Account Determination Ior Regrouping Receivables and Payables
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Closing -~ Regrouping - OBBV, OBBW, OBBX
39. Revalue Foreign Currency G/L Account Balances
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Valuate -~ Foreign Currency Valuation oI Inventory - F.06
40. Posting Accruals/DeIerrals
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Valuate -~ Enter Accrual/DeIerral Doc. - FBS1
41. Posting Accrual/DeIerral Reversal
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Closing -~ Valuate -~ Reverse Accrual/DeIerral Document - F.81
42. Generate Recurring Entry Posting
Accounting -~ Financial accounting -~ General ledger -~ Periodic processing -~
Recurring Entries -~ Execute - F.14
Controlling %ransaction Codes List 1


Business Area Sub-Grouping Transaction Code

Acct. Pay. MK03 Display Vendor Master
FK10 Display Vendor Account Balance
FBL1 Display Vendor Account Line Irems
FB03 Invoice Retrieval FI
MR3M Invoice Retrieval MM
ME23 Display Purchase Order History
MR02 View Blocked Invoices
ZMRXRR055 GR/IR Reconciliation - Material Account

Acct. Rec. VF03 Display an Invoice v45b

Cost Accounting Cost Accounting - CCA/PCA Master/Date

KSH1 Create Cost Center Group
KSH2 Delete/Change Cost Center Group
FSP3 Display G/L Account Posting COA
FSS3 Display Account in Company Code
KS03 Display Cost Center
KSH3 Display Cost Center Group
KA03 Display Cost Element
KAH3 Display Cost Element Group
KE53 Display ProIit Center
KCH3 Display ProIit Standard Hierarchy
KK03 Display Stat Key Figure
KBH3 Stat Key Figure Group

Cost Accounting - Cost & ProIit Center Planning

KP06 CC-Input/Change Budget Plan(Cost Element Planning
KP46 CC-Input/Change Budget Plan(Cost Element Planning
KP26 Input or Chg Activity Type or Price Planning
KSU7 CC-Create Plan Assessment Cycle
KSU8 CC Planned Assessment Cycle/ Change
KSU9 CC Planned Assessment Cycle/ Display
KSUA CC Planned Assessment Cycle Delete
KSUB CC Execute/Reverse Plan Assessment Cycle
KSV7 CC Planned Distribution Cycle - Create
KSV8 CC Planned Distribution Cycle - Change
KSV9 CC Planned Distribution Cycle - Display
KSVA CC Planned Distribution Cycle - Delete
KSVB CC Planned Dist. Cycle - Execute/Reverse.
KP97 CC Copy Plan Version
KPMN CC Set Planner ProIile
KSMN DeIine Report Currency
KSMN DeIine Selection Criteria Ior Cost Center Reports
7KE1 CC Input/Change Budget Plans(Acctg. Planning.)
7KE5 CC Stat Key Figure Planning.

Cost Accounting - Period End Accounting.

F-02 Create various types oI Journals.
FB11 Display/Complete/Post a Parked or Held Doc
FB08 Reverse an Incividual GL Posted Document
FB04 Display Changes to a Document
FB02 Change Document Header
FB09 Change Document Line Iems
FBS1 Create Accrual/DeIerral w/out a ReIerence Doc.
F.81 Create an Accrual Reversal Entry
F.80 Mass Reversal oI Documents.
FB03 Display a Document
FS10 Create Worklist and/or Display Gen Ledger Bal
FYLS """"
FBL3 Display General Ledger Line Items
KSH1 "CC Create a ""Local"" Cost Center Group"
KSH2 "CC Change a :Local"" Cost Center Group"
KSV1 CC Create an Actual Distribution Cycle
KSV2 CC Change Actual Distribution Cycle
KSV3 Display Actual Cost Center Distribution cycle
KSV4 Delete Actual Distribution Cycle
KSV5 CC Execute or Reverse Actual Dist. Cycle
KSU1 CC Create an Actual Assessment Cycle
KSU2 CC Change Actual Assessment cycle
KSU3 CC Display Actual Assessment Cycle
KSU4 CC Delete cost Center Actual Assessment Cycle
KSU5 CC Execute/Reverse Actual Assessment Cycles
4KE1 PC Create Actual Distribution Cycle
4KE2 PC Change Actual Distribution Assessment Cycle
4KE3 PC Display Actual Distribution Cycle
4KE4 PC Delete Actual Distribution Cycle
4KE5 PC Actual distribution Cycle Execute
3KE1 PC Create Actual Assessment Cycle
3KE2 PC Change Actual Assessment Cycle
3KE5 PC Execute Actual Assessment Cycle
KB31 CC Post Actual Statistical Key Figures
3KED PC Post Actual Statistical Key Figures
F.5D Calculate BS Readiustment Ior PCA
1KEK TransIer Payables & Receivables.
KE5T Reconcile FI to PCA
ZFAF Create AIIiliate Invoice
KOK5 Create/Maintain Storeroom & Maint. Order Group
K086 Settle Maint. Orders
CO88 Settle Process Order - Collective Process
KOB1 Report-Generate Actual Cost Line Item Rpt. Oreders
KSB1 Report-Generate Actual Cost Line Item Rpt. Cost Centers
KE5Z Report-Genrate an Actual Line Item Rpt. Ior PCA
SARP Generate Transit Maqterials Irom Custom Reports
Generate a Purchase Price & Exchange Rate Variance Report
Generate Production Order variance Report
SART Generate a COPS ReclassiIication Report
Generate a FPLC Mix-Adiustment Report
Generate a COC Cost Element Actual vs. Budget Report
Generate a COC Cost Center Actual vs. Budget Report
Generate a Cost Center Actual/Plan/Variqnce Report
Generate an EC-PCA Actual Line Items Report
Generate a TDC PCA Analysis Report
GR55 Generate a PCA Actuals Report
SART Generate a COPS ReclassiIication Ior Carrier Sales Report
SA38 Generate a FPLC Mix Adiusted Report
What %he %code %o Design Report n KE30
Which tcode to edit the design of the report in ke30?
Why when execute the report in ke30. no variant and all report not able to run
despite parameter entered?
In COPA, beIore creating report, you have to deIine Iorms.
For Iorms check this t.codes:
KE34 - DeIine Forms Ior ProIitability Reports
KE94 - DeIine Forms Ior Reports Based on Line Items
Reports check this t.codes.
KE31 - Create ProIitability Report
KE91 - Create Report Based on Line Items
KE32 - Change Report

n KE30 Profitability analysis reports. how do include
CoCode as selection parameter in GRMARG001C & GRMARG004B
These are custom reports created in your Op Co.
Option 1. Call the Iorm using KE35 and check iI the Company Code is assigned to
any oI the columns or rows by double-clicking these. II it has been assigned and iI
there is a Fixed Value, rather than a Variable, you may then have to change that to a
variable. The Company Code will then appear on your selection screen by deIault.
Option 2. Call KE35 and check iI the Company Code has been assigned in the
General Selections screen. chances are it is not. In which case, include it Irom the list
oI Characteristics to your right. Provide a variable value, so the system prompts Ior an
entry while running the report.
Option 3. Call up the report using KE32 and check iI the Company Code
characteristic appears under "Variables". Make sure that small box next to it is
checked (Entry at Execution). This should bring up the Iield during report run.
In KE96 pick the Iorm that relates to your report. Then EDIT- Gen. Data Selection- .
Move the Characteristic you want to the leIt in the selected characteristics.

Where to find the transparent tables where those data(s) are stored in tcode
KE30
PA transparent tables are in the Iollowing;
xxxx operating concern
Table COEP CE1xxxx actual line items
table COEJ CE2xxxx plan line items
tables COSP COSS CE3xxxx segment level
CE4xxxx ProIitability segment.
Check individual data Ior KE30
KE24 - Display Actual Line Items

mportant %ables in SAP F
Financial Accounting
%able ame Description mportant Fields
Financial Accounting
FBAS Financial Accounting 'Basis
BKPF Accounting Document Header BUKRS / BELNR / GJAHR
BSEG Accounting Document Segment BUKRS / BELNR / GJAHR /
BUZEI
BSIP Index Ior Vendor Validation oI Double BUKRS / LIFNR / WAERS /
BLDAT /
Documents XBLNR / WRBTR / BELNR / GJAHR /
BUZEI
BVOR Inter Company Posting Procedure BVORG / BUKRS / GJAHR /
BELNR
EBKPF Accounting Document Header (docs Irom GLSBK / BELNR /
GJHAR / GLEBK
External Systems)
FRUN Run Date oI a Program PRGID
KLPA Customer / Vendor Linking NKULI / NBUKR / NKOAR /
PNTYP
/ VKULI / VBUKR / VKOAR

KNB4 Customer Payment History KUNNR / BUKRS
KNB5 Customer Master Dunning Data KUNNR / BUKRS / MABER
KNBK Customer Master Bank Details KUNNR / BANKS / BANKL /
BANKN
KNC1 Customer Master Transaction Figures KUNNR / BUKRS / GJHAR
KNC3 Customer Master Special GL Transactions KUNNR / BUKRS /
GJAHR / SHBKZ
Figures
LFB5 Vendor Master Dunning Data LIFNR / BUKRS / MABER
LFBK Vendor Master Bank Details LIFNR / BANKS / BANKL /
BANKN
LFC1 Vendor Master Transaction Figures LIFNR / BUKRS / GJHAR
LFC3 Vendor Master Special GL Transactions LIFNR / BUKRS / GJHAR /
SHBKZ
Figures
VBKPF Document Header Ior Document Parking AUSBK / BUKRS /
BELNR / GJHAR
FBASCORE Financial Accounting General Services ~Basis
KNB1 Customer Master (Company Code) KUNNR / BUKRS
LFA1 Vendor Master (General Section) LIFNR
LFB1 Vendor Master (company Code Section) LIFNR / BUKRS
SKA1 G/L Account Master (Chart oI Accounts) KTOPL / SAKNR
SKAT G/L Account Master (Chart oI Accounts SPRAS / KTOPL / SAKNR
Description)
MAHNS Accounts Blocked by Dunning Selection KOART / BUKRS /
KONKO / MABER
MHNK Dunning Data (Account Entries) LAUFD / LAUFI / KOART /
BUKRS /
KUNNR / LIFNR / CPDKY / SKNRZE /
SMABER / SMAHSK / BUSAB
F-GL-GL (FBS) General Ledger Accounting: Basic Functions- G/L Accounts
SKAS G/L Account Master (Chart oI Accounts SPRAS / KTOPL / SAKNR
/ SCHLW
Key Word list)
SKB1 G/L Account Master (Company Code) BUKRS / SAKNR
FI-GL-GL (FBSC) General Ledger Accounting: Basic
Functions - R/3 Customizing Ior G/L Accounts
FIGLREP Settings Ior G/L Posting Reports MANDT
TSAKR Create G/L account with reIerence BUKRS / SAKNR
FI-GL-GL (FFE) General Ledger Accounting: Basic
Functions - Fast Data Entry
KOMU Account Assignment Templates Ior G/L KMNAM / KMZEI
Account items
F-AR-AR (FBD) Accounts Receivable: Basic Functions - Customers

KNKA Customer Master Credit Management : KUNNR
Central Data
KNKK Customer Master Credit Management : KUNNR / KKBER
Control Area Data
KNKKF1 Credit Management : FI Status data LOGSYS / KUNNR /
KKBER / REGUL
RFRR Accounting Data A/R and A/P RELID / SRTFD / SRTF2
InIormation System
F-BL-P% Bank Accounting: Payment (BFBLCHECKD) %ransactions -
General Sections
PAYR Payment Medium File ZBUKR / HBKID / HKTID /
RZAWE /
CHECT
PCEC Pre-numbered Check ZBUKR / HBKID / HKTID /
STAPL
F-BL-P%-AP(FMZA)Bank Accounting: Payment %ransactions - Automatic
Payments

F111G Global Settings Ior Payment Program Ior MANDT
Payment Requests
FDZA Cash Management Line Items in Payment KEYNO
Requests
PAYRQ Payment Requests KEYNO

What is the table name for G/L Master data. when we create centrally (%.Code -
FS00)?
As Iar as general ledger master data is concerned, the Iollowing tables are involved :

Table name : SKB1 : G/L Account Master ( Company Code)
Fields:
BUKRS : Company Code
SAKNR : G/L Account

Table name : SKA1 : G/L Account Master ( Chart oI Accounts )
Fields:
KTOPL : Char oI Accounts
SAKNR : G/L Account

Table name : SKAT : G/L Account Master Record ( Chart oI Accounts : Description
)
Fields:
SPRAS : Language
KTOPL : Char oI Accounts
SAKNR : G/L Account `-- Viji Balakrishnan
mportant %ables in SAP CO
Controlling
%able ame Description mportant Fields
AUSP Characteristic Values MANDT / OBJEK / ATINN / ATZHL
CO-KBAS Overhead Cost Controlling
A132 Price per Cost Center MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS
A136 Price per Controlling Area MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
KOKRS
A137 Price per Country / Region MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
KOKRS
COSC CO Obiects: Assignment oI Origina MANDT / OBJNR / SCTYP /
VERSN
CSSK Cost Center / Cost Element MANDT / VERSN / KOKRS /
GJAHR
CSSL Cost Center / Activity Type MANDT / KOKRS / KOSTL /
LSTAR
KAPS CO Period Locks MANDT / KOKRS / GJAHR / VERSN

CO-KBASCORE Overhead Cost Controlling: General Services
CSKA Cost Elements (Data Dependent on MANDT / KTOPL / KSTAR
CSKB Cost Elements (Data Dependent on MANDT / KOKRS / KSTAR /
DATBI
CSKS Cost Center Master Data MANDT / KOKRS / KOSTL /
DATBI
CSLA Activity Master MANDT / KOKRS / LSTAR / DATBI
CO-OM (KACC) Overhead Cost Controlling
COBK CO Obiect: Document Header MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR
COEJ CO Obiect: Line Items (by Fiscal MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEJL CO Obiect: Line Items Ior Activit MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEJR CO Obiect: Line Items Ior SKF (by MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEJT CO Obiect: Line Items Ior Prices MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEP CO Obiect: Line Items (by Period) MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEPL CO Obiect: Line Items Ior Activit MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEPR CO Obiect: Line Items Ior SKF (by MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COEPT CO Obiect: Line Items Ior Prices MANDT / KOKRS / BELNR /
BUZEI
COKA CO Obiect: Control Data Ior Cost MANDT / OBJNR / GJAHR /
KSTAR
COKL CO Obiect: Control Data Ior Activ MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR /
GJAHR
COKP CO Obiect: Control Data Ior Prima MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR /
GJAHR
COKR CO Obiect: Control Data Ior Stati MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR /
GJAHR
COKS CO Obiect: Control Data Ior Secon MANDT / LEDNR / OBJNR /
GJAHR
CO-OM-CEL (KKAL) Cost Element Accounting (Reconciliation Ledger)
COFI01 Obiect Table Ior Reconciliation L MANDT / OBJNR
COFI02 Transaction Dependent Fields Ior MANDT / OBJNR
COFIP Single Plan Items Ior Reconciliat RCLNT / GLSIRID
COFIS Actual Line Items Ior Reconciliat RCLNT / GLSIRID

CO-OM-CCA Cost Center Accounting (Cost Accounting Planning RK-S)
- What is RK-S
A138 Price per Company Code MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
KOKRS
A139 Price per ProIit Center MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL / KOKRS
CO-OM-OPA (KABR) Overhead Orders: Application Development R/3 Cost
Accounting Settlement
AUAA Settlement Document: Receiver Seg MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR
AUAB Settlement Document: Distribution MANDT / BELNR / BUREG /
LFDNR
AUAI Settlement Rules per Depreciation MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR /
AFABE
AUAK Document Header Ior Settlement MANDT / BELNR
AUAO Document Segment: CO Obiects to b MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR
AUAV Document Segment: Transactions MANDT / BELNR / LFDNR
COBRA Settlement Rule Ior Order Settlem MANDT / OBJNR
COBRB Distribution Rules Settlement Rul MANDT / OBJNR / BUREG /
LFDNR
CO-OM-OPA (KAUF) Overhead Orders: Cost Accounting Orders
AUFK Order Master Data MANDT / AUFNR
AUFLAY0 Enttity Table: Order Layouts MANDT / LAYOUT
EC-PCA (KE1) Profit Center Accounting
CEPC ProIit Center Master Data Table MANDT / PRCTR / DATBI /
KOKRS
CEPCT Texts Ior ProIit Center Master Da MANDT / SPRAS / PRCTR /
DATBI
CEPCBUKRS Assignment oI ProIit Center to a MANDT / KOKRS / PRCTR
/ BUKRS
GLPCA EC-PCA: Actual Line Items RCLNT / GLSIRID
GLPCC EC-PCA: Transaction Attributes MANDT / OBJNR
GLPCO EC-PCA: Obiect Table Ior Account MANDT / OBJNR
GLPCP EC-PCA: Plan Line Items RCLNT / GLSIRID

EC-PCA BS (KE1C) PCA Basic Settings: Customizing for Profit Center
Accounting
A141 Dependent on Material and Receive MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
KOKRS
A142 Dependent on Material MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
WERKS
A143 Dependent on Material Group MANDT / KAPPL / KSCHL /
WERKS

mportant %ables in SAP AA

F-AA-AA (AA) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions - Master Data

ANKA Asset Classes: General Data ANLKL
ANKP Asset Classes: Fld Cont Dpndnt on Chart ANLKL / AFAPL
oI Depreciation
ANKT Asset Classes: Description SPRAS / ANLKL
ANKV Asset Classes: Insurance Types ANLKL / VRSLFD
ANLA Asset Master Record Segment BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2
ANLB Depreciation Terms BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 /
AFABE
/ BDATU
ANLT Asset Texts SPRAS / BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2

ANLU Asset Master Record User Fields .INCLUDE / BUKRS / ANLN1
/ ANLN2
ANLW Insurable Values (Year Dependent) BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 /
VRSLFD /
GJAHR
ANLX Asset Master Record Segment BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2
ANLZ Time Dependent Asset Allocations BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 /
BDATU
F-AA-AA (AA) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions - Master Data .0

ANAR Asset Types ANLAR
ANAT Asset Type Text SPRAS / ANLAR
FI-AA-AA (AB) Asset Accounting: Basic Functions
Asset Accounting
ANEK Document Header Asset Posting BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 /
GJAHR /
LNRAN
ANEP Asset Line Items BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / GJAHR /
LNRAN / AFABE
ANEV Asset Downpymt Settlement BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 /
GJAHR /
LNRANS
ANKB Asset Class: Depreciation Area ANLKL / AFAPL / AFABE /
BDATU
ANLC Asset value Fields BUKRS / ANLN1 / ANLN2 / GJAHR
/
AFABE
ANLH Main Asset Number BUKRS / ANLN1
ANLP Asset Periodic Values BUKRS / GJAHR / PERAF /
AFBNR /
ANLN1 / ANLN2 / AFABER
F-SL-VSR (GVAL) Special Purpose Ledger: Validation. Substitution and Rules

GB03 Validation / Substitution User VALUSER
GB92 Substitutions SUBSTID
GB93 Validation VALID
nventory Accounting Entries
All the nventory transactions will look for the valuation class and the
corresponding G.L. Accounts and post
the values in the G.L accounts.

For Example: during Goods Receipt
Stock Account - Dr
G/R I/R Account - Cr
Freight Clearing account - Cr
Other expenses payable - Cr

During Invoice VeriIication
G/R I/R Account - Dr
Vendor - Cr
When the Goods are issued to the Production Order the following transactions
takes place:
Consumption oI Raw Materials - Dr
Stock A/c - Cr
When the Goods are received from the Production Order the following
transactions takes place:
Inventory A/c - Dr
Cost oI Goods Produced - Cr
Price diIIerence - Dr/Cr
(depending on the diIIerence between standard cost and actual cost)
When the Goods are dispatched to customer through delivery the following
transactions takes place:
Cost oI Goods Sold - Dr
Inventory A/c - Cr
When the Goods are issued to a Cost Center or charged off against expenses the
following transactions takes place:
Repairs and Maintenance - Dr
Inventory A/c - Cr
When the Goods are stock transferred from one plant to another. the following
transactions takes place:
Stock A/c - Dr (Receiving location)
Stock A/c - Cr (Sending location)
Price diIIerence - Dr/Cr
(due to any diIIerence between the standard costs between the two locations)
When the stocks are revalued. the following transactions takes place:
Stock A/c - Dr/Cr
Inventory Revaluation A/c - Cr / Dr
When the Work in Progress is calculated the following transaction takes place:
Work in Progress A/c - Dr
Change WIP A/c - Cr
Physical verification /shortages and excesses : Shortages/excesses on
authorizations shall be adjusted using the physical inventory count
transaction.

Sales and Distribution Accounting Entries
VOCE GEERA%O
Invoices will be generated at the Smelters and stock points. The accounting entries
Ior the sale oI goods despatched will Ilow Irom the Sales invoice generated in SAP
Sales and Distribution module. The Iollowing entries shall be passed
Customer Account Dr
Revenue Cr
Excise Duty Payable Cr
Sales Tax Payable (local or central) Cr
Note: As mentioned above in the FI document, which is created in the background,
the SD invoice number shall be captured. However as per the current accounting
procedure the accounting entry passed is as Iollows :-
Customer Account Dr
Revenue Cr
Excise Duty Billed Cr
Sales Tax Payable (local or central) Cr
Excise duty paid a/c Dr
Excise duty payable a/c Cr
EXPOR% SALES
There have been very Iew export transactions in the past. SAP system will be
designed to handle export business. Exports are mainly Irom the mines and will be
handled at the mines, however the documentation part will be taken care at the Head
OIIice. The accounting entry is:
Customer Account Dr
Revenue (Exports) Cr
The realisation oI export sales will be directly credited to the bank. The accounting
entries will be as Iollow:
Bank Dr
Customer Cr
Exchange Fluctuation Dr/ Cr
The accounting entries will be:
Rebates/Discounts Dr
Customer Cr

DEB% MEMOS
Debit Memos shall be issued in case oI price diIIerence, sale tax diIIerence and
interest on usance period and overdue payments.
The accounting entries Ior two possible scenarios are as Iollows:
Price Undercharged:
Customer Account Dr.
Revenue Cr.
Sales tax payable Cr.
Sales tax undercharged
Customer Account Dr.
Sales tax adiustment Cr.
Interest on delayed payments/usance period and other charges
Customer Account Dr.
Interest Others Cr.
In case oI HZL a complete retirement or a partial retirement oI asset is done. The
system uses the asset retirement date to determine the amount to be charged oII Ior
each depreciation area. The existing accounting policy is to provide depreciation Ior
the Iull quarter in which the asset is sold/discarded, recommended that the
depreciation be provided Irom the date oI acquisition on prorata basis .
Accounting entry Ior sale oI Asset to customers:
Customer Account Dr
Asset Sale Cr
Accumulated Depreciation Dr
Loss on Sale (iI applicable) Dr
Asset Sale account Dr
Asset account Cr
ProIit on sale (iI applicable) Cr
Note: In case oI any Sales Tax /Excise duty applicable Ior this transaction, SAP will
calculate the Sales Tax/Excise Duty based on the Tax Code selected the entry is
posted to the GL Account (Sales Tax Payable)
Accounting entry Ior sale without a customer:
Accumulated Depreciation Dr
Loss on Sale (iI applicable) Dr
Asset Sale account Dr
Asset account Cr
ProIit on sale (iI applicable) Cr
Accounting entry Ior scrap
Accumulated Depreciation Dr
Loss on Sale oI Assets Dr
Asset account Cr
SALE OF SCRAP
The sale oI scrap (non-stock) shall be mapped as a direct manual FI entry. The
customer will be created as a FI customer. No Logistics module will be involved in
the process.
A FI Invoice will be prepared Ior the sale oI scrap with the Iollowing entries:
Customer Dr
Sale oI Scrap Cr
Excise Duty Payable Cr
ADVACES FROM CUS%OMERS
Advances are received Irom the customers against delivery. These advances will be
recorded in a special general ledger account. The accounting entry Ior the same will
be:
Bank Account Dr
Advance Customer Payments Cr
These advances will be later on adiusted against the invoices raised on the customers.
Advances can be adiusted against more than one invoice at the time oI clearing oI the
invoices against advances.
Adiustment oI Advances
Customer Account Cr
Advance Customer Payments Dr
A Iinancial document would be created Ior each Bank Guarantee received and this
document number will be reIerred to in the Sales Order which would then monitor the
value and the validity oI the oI the Bank Guarantee instrument wise while doing the
billing.The letter oI credit /Bank guarantee given will be recorded as a noted item.
Accounting Entry Ior Goods receipt
Stock/Inventory account Dr
GR/IR account Cr
Freight clearing account Cr
Accounting Entry on invoice veriIication oI supplier
GR/IR Dr
Vendor account Cr
Accounting Entry on invoice veriIication oI Ireight vendor
Freight clearing account Dr
Freight Vendor account Cr
GOODS RECEP%
Based on the Purchase order and the Quantity actually received Goods Receipts (GR)
will be done. Based on the GR done the Iollowing accounting entry will be passed in
the Financial Accounts
RM/PM Stock Account Dr
GR/IR Account Cr
Freight Clearing Account Cr
EXCSE VOCE VERFCA%O
On receipt oI the excise invoice cum gate pass the Iollowing entry will be passed
RG 23 A / RG 23 C Part 2 Account Dr
Cenvat Clearing Account Cr
Vendor nvoice Verification Accounting Entries
VEDOR VOCE VERFCA%O
The detail process related to invoice veriIication is documented in Materials
Management Document.
On receipt oI vendor bill the Iollowing entry will be passed:
GR/IR Account DR
Freight Clearing Account DR
Cenvat Clearing Account DR
Vendor Account CR
Invoice VeriIication Ior Foreign Vendor
On receipt oI vendor bill the Iollowing entry will be passed:
GR/IR Account DR
Vendor Account CR
Invoice VeriIication Ior Custom vendor
On receipt oI Vendor bill the Iollo wing entry will be passed:
1) RG 23A/RG 23C Part 2 A/c (CVD) A/c DR
Cenvat Clearing A/c CR
2) G/R I/R A/c DR
Cenvat Clearing A/c DR
Vendor A/c CR
3) Cost oI Material A/c DR
Vendor A/c (Customs) CR
Invoice VeriIication Ior Freight / Clearing Agent
Cost oI Material A/c DR
Vendor A/c (Clearing Agent) CR
Invoice VeriIication Ior Octroi Expenses
Cost oI Material DR
Vendor A/c (Octroi) CR
TDS (Work Contract Tax) Ior Service Orders shall be calculated and deducted
accordingly.
The Iollowing entry will be passed on bill passing:
Expenses Account DR
Vendor Account CR
TDS Account CR
The material shall be returned to the vendor using the
Return to vendor movement type in SAP
Creating a Return PO
These transactions will be processed in the MM module.
The accounting entries will be :
Returns aIter GRN
GR/IR A/c Dr
Stock A/c Cr
The accounting in respect oI debit / credit memos Ior FI vendors, the process will be
similar to that oI invoice processing. The accounting entries will be:
On issue oI debit note
Vendor Account DR
Expenses Account CR
In respect oI import vendor - capital goods exchange diIIerences are to be accounted
manually through a Journal Voucher Ior capitalization.
Exchange rate diIIerences will be accounted at HO. An example oI the accounting
entry in this case shall be:
Invoice entry ( 40 INR: 1 USD
Asset / Expense A/c DR 100
Vendor A/c CR 100
Payment Entry ( 41 INR: 1 USD
Vendor A/c DR 100
Bank A/c CR 110
Exchange rate loss Capital A/c DR 10
Asset A/c DR 10
Exchange rate loss Capital A/c CR 10
A new G/L account shall be created Ior the special G/L transactions.
The accounting entry Ior making the down payment shall be:
Advance to supplier account Debit
Bank A/c Credit
When the invoice is booked the Iollowing entry is passed
GR/IR account Debit
Vendor account Credit
Clearing oI Invoice against Down Payment
Vendor A/c Debit
Vendor down payment account Credit
Wherever, TDS is applicable, the TDS will be deducted at the time oI down-payment
to the vendor.
Down Payment Ior Capital (tangible) Assets
Down payment to vendors Ior capital acquisitions is to be reported separately in the
Balance Sheet under the head Capital Work in Progress. Hence down payment Ior
capital goods would be tracked through a separate special general ledger indicator.
The procedure to be Iollowed is:
DeIinition oI alternative reconciliation accounts Ior Accounts Payable Ior posting
down payments made Ior Capital assets
Clearing the down payment in Accounts Payable with the closing invoice.
A new G/L account shall be created Ior the special G/L transactions.
The accounting entry Ior making the down payment shall be:
Vendor Advance Ior Capital Goods Account Debit
Bank A/c Credit
When the invoice is booked the Iollowing entry is passed
Asset A/c / Asset WIP Debit
Vendor A/c Credit
Clearing oI Invoice against Down Payment
Vendor A/c Debit
Vendor Advance Ior Capital Goods Account Credit
The Following are the TDS Rates (to be conIirmed with the recent changes)
Particulars Tax Rate Surcharge Rate Total
Contractors 194 C 2 5 2.10
Advertising 194 C 1 5 1.05
ProI. Fees 194 J 5 5 5.25
Rent Others 194 I 15 5 15.75
Rent Company 194 I 20 5 21
Commission 194H 5 5 5.25
Interest - Others 194 A 10 5 10.50
Interest Company 194 A 20 5 21
Special Concessional Tax
Works Contract Tax
SECURITY DEPOSITS /EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT RECEIVED FROM
VENDORS
Bank A/c DR
Security Deposit Vendor CR
EMD to give the age so as to enable the same to be transIerred to unclaimed EMD
account.
PAYMENT OF TOUR ADVANCE DOMESTIC TOURS
Employee Advances will be paid by the Accounts Department unit wise based on the
requisition or recommendation oI the respective departmental head.
Employee Travel Advance A/c DR
Cash / Bank Account CR `-- Shashikanth %eegala -
skteegalamyahoo.co.in

Reversal Entry n Accounting
Why do we pass reversal enteries?
At times some incorrect documents might have been entered in the systems.

II you have entered an incorrect document, you can reverse it. Note that R/3 can
reverse a document only iI the Iollowing conditions are met:

- Contains no cleared items
- Contains only vendor, customer, or G/L line items
- Was posted within the FI system
- Contains only valid values, such as business areas, cost centers, and tax codes

Ordinarily, you post a reversing document in the same period you posted the original
document. The period oI the original document must be open to post a reversing
document. II the period is not open, you can overwrite the posting date Iield with a
date in an open period, such as the current period.

Reversal can be done individually - FB08 or Mass F.80.

II the document to be reveresed contain cleared items, then cleared item must be reset
beIore the reversal oI document.

Banking %ransaction Financial Accounting Entries
Settlement Of %our Advances Domestic/Foreign
1) Settlement oI advance will be done by the Accounts Department based on the
Travel Expense Statement submitted by the employee, which is approved by the
Concerned Department Head.
2) Expenses Account DR
Cash/Bank Account DR (iI, reIund)
Employee Advance Account CR
Cash/Bank Sub ledger Account CR (iI, payable)
3) Banking Operations - Maintenance OI Bank Master
4) A House Bank is a combination oI a Bank and a Branch. Account id is the account
number. A house bank can have multiple account IDs.. There could be a main account
as also payable account, which will be deIined as separate account ids. General
Ledger accounts have to be created Ior each combination oI a house bank and account
ID. The bank master details are to be provided by HZL.
5) General Ledger accounts have to be created Ior each account ID in the house bank.
Bank Account Master data will be maintained by the Finance Department centrally.
6) Each house bank and account ID combination shall have one main general ledger
account and several sub accounts mainly based on broad transaction types. These sub
accounts are necessary to Iacilitate automatic bank reconciliation process in R/3
system.
Bank Accounting
7) The accounting entries will be generated automatically according to the posting
rules attached to the Transaction type. The Iollowing accounting entry is passed by the
system in respect oI cheque deposit on account oI collection Irom domestic
customers.
Bank cheque deposit account Debit
Customer account Credit
8) In this case, a bank sub account is selected based on the transaction code entered
by the user. The customer account is cleared i.e. invoice is cleared against the receipt.
In respect oI any other deposits, the relevant accounts to be credited will depend on
the nature oI transaction.
9) Payment against bills Ior collection. Based on the bank advices Ialling due on a
particular day one payment advice is made debiting the vendors and crediting bank.
Cheque Deposit - Customer Receipts
10) All cheques received Irom customers shall be accounted at the point oI receipt.
The entry posted shall be
Bank Sub account Dr
Customer Account Cr
Cheque Deposit - Other %han Customer Receipts
11) All other receipts will be accounted through the Incoming Payment Transaction
oI the Accounts Receivables module.
Cheque Bouncing - Other %han Customer Receipts
12) Based on the inIormation oI cheque bounced Irom the Bank, the accounts
Department will pass accounting entries Ior the cheque that have been bounced. The
procedure to handle bouncing oI a cheque has been discussed under the Iollowing
13) Reset the clearing document II the document has been cleared i.e. an open
outstanding item has been cleared against an incoming receipt, then the clearing
document has to be reset to its original status oI open item. This process is known as
reset oI cleared document.
14) Reverse the entry passed Ior cheque deposited earlier Once the document has
been reset it will be reversed. The Iollowing accounting entry will be passed.
FI Customer DR
Bank cheque deposit account CR
15) In case oI cheques being damaged while printing, the concerned cheques no. has
to be voided and the payment will be rerun.
Bank Reconciliation
16) The Bank reconciliation process is based on the entries passed through the Bank
sub account and main account. The process is dependent on the Bank Statement
received Irom the Bank that will be entered into SAP. Accounting rules are to be
deIined Ior each transaction type and posting rule Ior posting accounting entries as per
bank statement. Bank statements to be uploaded into SAP.
17) Bank Main account balance is the actual balance as per the bank statement
whereas the Bank sub accounts denote the reconciliation items. These sub accounts
show those entries, which will Ilow Irom the sub account which are not cleared in the
bank statement.
18) Adding or subtracting the Bank sub accounts will help in preparing the Bank
reconciliation statement.
19) The Iollowing scenarios would explain the reconciliation process:
- Cheque received Irom customer
- Cheque issued to vendors
- Cheque received Irom Other than Customers
- Direct Debits in Bank Statement
- Direct Credits in Bank Statement
- Fund TransIer between Bank Accounts
Cheque Received From Customer
20) Accounting entry at the time oI cheque deposit entry
Bank Cheque deposit account Debit
Customer Credit
21) Accounting entry aIter cheque has been cleared in the Bank statement Main Bank
account
Debit Bank
Cheque deposit account Credit
22) The clearing criteria Ior updating the bank main account and bank sub account
will be amount and document number which will be captured in the allocation Iield
oI the bank sub account. The items, which have not been cleared in the bank
statement, will remain open in the bank sub account and will Iorm part oI the bank
reconciliation statement.
Cheque ssued %o Vendors
23) Accounting entry at the time oI cheque issue
Vendor account Debit
Bank cheque payment account Credit
24) Accounting entry aIter cheque has been presented in the Bank
Bank cheque payment account Debit
Main Bank account Credit
25) The clearing criteria used Ior updating vendor account and Bank cheque payment
account will be amount and cheque number. The cheques presented to the bank and
are cleared are transIerred to the bank main account. The remaining cheque issued
will Iorm part oI the bank reconciliation statement.
Direct Debit n Bank
26) Direct debit instructions will be given to the bank Ior example, LC payments or
certain bank charges are directly debited in the Bank Statement. In this case
accounting entry is passed only aIter the entry is passed in the bank statement.
Vendor / Expense Account Debit
Bank clearing account Credit
Direct Credit n Bank
27) Customer receipts are sometimes directly credited in Bank. E.g. export receipts. In
this scenario accounting entry is passed only at the time oI bank statement entry. The
Iollowing accounting entry is passed
Bank clearing account Debit
Customer account Credit
Main Bank A/c Debit
Bank Clearing A/c Credit
Bank Fixed Deposits
28) HZL has a practice oI converting any amount above Rs. 1 crore in its Main bank
account, to a Iixed deposit subiect to a minimum oI Rs. 1.01 crores. The FDR number
can be Iilled in one oI the Iields available in the accounting document.
Cheque Management / Cheque Printing Cum Advice
29) The Iunction oI cheque management will enable printing oI cheque through SAP.
Cheque series will be deIined Ior a combination oI a Company code and Bank
Account. Cheque numbering will be sequential order.
30) Cheque series Ior automatic payment has to be in sequential order. Cheque
printing Iacility will be available Ior the bank account.
Cash Management / Liquidity Analysis
31) The day-to-day treasury process in a company includes a number oI transactions.
This includes determining the current liquidity using bank account balances (cash
position), determining open receivables and liabilities (liquidity Iorecast), manually
entering planned cash Ilows (payment advice notes), through to clearing bank
accounts, that is, collecting multiple bank account balances on one target account.
32) The main obiective is to ensure liquidity Ior all due payment obligations. It is also
important to control and monitor eIIectively the incoming and outgoing cash Ilows.
33) This section shows you the overall liquidity status oI your company by displaying
together the cash position and the liquidity Iorecast. The cash position is used in Cash
Management to show the value-date-dependent bank accounts and bank clearing
accounts, as well as the planned cash Ilows (payment advice notes). The liquidity
Iorecast comprises the incoming and outgoing cash Ilows, as well as the planned items
on the sub-ledger accounts.
Clear Off Duplicate House Banks n System
We have certain duplicate house banks in the svstem. Now we want to clear them off.
so that we can have a better control over the bank activities including reconciliation.

Can we delete the house bank directlv?

Answer:

It is possible to delete a house bank. First de-assign the GL account assigned to the
account id.

Delete all the account IDs.

Then delete the Bank ID.

By this way you can delete the house bank. The values are stored under the GL
account and not under the house bank. Hence it is possible to delete the house bank
once you de assign the GL account Irom the account ID.

Do not delete the house bank directly.

You need to do the below things:-

(1) First make the GL account balance as zero Ior the duplicate house bank, e.g. by
transIerring to the original house bank.

(2) Then block this GL master.

(3) Then remove all the assignment oI this duplicate house bank and account ID in
FBZP

(4) Close the check lot inIormation Ior this house bank.

Then this house bank will become ineIIective, you can change the description oI this
house bank to 'Obsolete etc.

II you delete this house bank, the eIIect will be that Ior check inIormation, it will
show with incorrect house bank. II not important in your case, then you can delete the
house bank.
What Are %he Posting Keys For AP. AR & GL
Below given is the recommended posting key to be used Ior particular transaction by
SAP. II we use posting key according to this then standard reports set /given by SAP
will come with accuracy. This is Ior inIormation
By: Abhiiit
1-19 customer
20-39 Vendor
40 & 50 GL
70 debit Asset
75 credit Asset
Posting key Name Credit /Debit Account type
21 Credit memo Debit Vendor
22 Reverse invoice Debit Vendor
24 Other receivables Debit Vendor
25 Outgoing payment Debit Vendor
26 Payment diIIerence Debit Vendor
27 Clearing Debit Vendor
28 Payment clearing Debit Vendor
29 Special G/L debit Debit Vendor
31 Invoice Credit Vendor
32 Reverse credit memo Credit Vendor
34 Other payables Credit Vendor
35 Incoming payment Credit Vendor
36 Payment diIIerence Credit Vendor
37 Other clearing Credit Vendor
38 Payment clearing Credit Vendor
39 Special G/L credit Credit Vendor
Posting key Name Account type
01 Invoice Debit Customer
02 Reverse credit memo Debit Customer
03 Bank charges Debit Customer
04 Other receivables Debit Customer
05 Outgoing payment Debit Customer
06 Payment diIIerence Debit Customer
07 Other clearing Debit Customer
08 Payment clearing Debit Customer
09 Special G/L debit Debit Customer
11 Credit memo Credit Customer
12 Reverse invoice Credit Customer
13 Reverse charges Credit Customer
14 Other payables Credit Customer
15 Incoming payment Credit Customer
16 Payment diIIerence Credit Customer
17 Other clearing Credit Customer
18 Payment clearing Credit Customer
19 Special G/L credit Credit Customer
Posting key Name Credit /Debit Account type
40 Debit entry Debit G/L account
50 Credit entry Credit G/L account
%ransfer of Balance of Vendor Customer and Ledger
How can transfer balance of customer. vendor and ledger from previous
accounting system to sap r/3 envioroment?
1. Prepare the Balance Sheet at one cut oII date.
2. ClassiIy the Accounts into Group.
3. Create Group wise clearing GL (You should create clearing account through
OBD4)
Ior eg. Capital General Clearing A/c
Capital Initial Clearing A/c

Expenditure General Clearing A/c
Expenditure initial clearing A/c

Customer General Clearing A/c
Customer initial Clearing A/c

Create the GL each Account Group.

4. Create one Doc.Type "LD" Ior upload Legacy Data.
5. Post the Balance Sheet Figures through T.Code F-02 use Doc.Type "LD"
Ior eg. Sundry Debtors Balance Rs,5 lac in Balance Sheet. This Iig was arrived
Irom 5
customers Mr.A - Rs.75,000 Mr.B Rs.25,000 Mr.C Rs. 400000

Post

Customer General Clg A/c Cr.5,00,000
Customer Initial Clg A/c Dr.5,00,000

Like that post all the Balance Figures in SAP group wise. Maintain one XL
Sheet. CareIully maintain this sheet.

All the General Clg GL Iigures are opposit to BS, only Ior controlling

Then post

Customer Inital Clg A/c Cr. 5,00,000

Mr.A A/c Dr. 75,000
Mr.B A/c Dr. 25,000
Mr.C A/c Dr. 4,00,000

AIter completed the posting all the inital accounts are "0" Value and all the General
Clg A/c are "0".

II you want to post the Customer open item line by line, prepare the XL sheet upload
through LSMW.

II you want to check the TB in SAP to Tally, select all the document and Iilter the
Doc.Type "LD" the debit balance and credit balance are "Zero".
MG %ransaction code OBYC ntegration
%hrough %.code Obyc. configure the BSX Key for nventory Material.
Configure Valutiaon Class. and Valuation Modifier and Given G.L. Account
umber and save.
After configuration all these. what are step to configure because have been
nterviwed by this question and don't know what are next step.
Transaction code : OBYC (in easy access)
In this transcation we have to speciIy GL account codes Ior material valuation created
by MM consultants.
The process in MM is here below:
1) Purchase Order : Tr code ME21N - here no integration required with FI
2) Goods Issue : Tr Code MIGO - here no integratinwith FI
3) Invoice Reciept - Tr Code MIRO - here when the invoice is recieved & MM
process the transaction based on OBYC conIiguration system will generate FI
document. System also generates Material document as well
4) Payment : Tr code F110 - Here also the the transcation aIIects FI
FI-SD integation:
This integration done using Tr Code VKOA. here we have to deIine GL account
codes to Condition types.
Process :
1) SD Raises Sales Order - No implication in FI
2) SD raises Delivery doc - No implication in FI
3) SD processes billing - no implication in FI
4) SD releases billing doc to FI - FI document gets generated (Tr Code VFX3)

%he theory of how MM activity triggers A/c posting is:
Each movement type has quantity and value string, which decides what to update.
Also each movement type has transaction event key (account modiIier) which in turn
depending upon valuation grouping code and valuation class decides which G/L
account to post.
The Ilow is as Iollows:
Material type --~ Account Category reIerence --~ Valuation class --~Material.
Movement type --~Transaction event key--~Account modiIier.
You have to do the conIiguration settings using Tr. code OBYC.
Try with Tr.code OMBW to check which G/L accounts are being hit on Plant,
Material and movement type.
OBYC Different transaction like BSX. GBB
Stock posting (BSX) - This transaction is used Ior all postings to stock accounts.
Such postings are eIIected, Ior example:
In inventory management in the case oI goods receipts to own stock and goods issues
Irom own stock.
In invoice veriIication, iI price diIIerences occur in connection with incoming
invoices Ior materials valuated at moving average price and there is adequate stock
coverage.
In order settlement, iI the order is assigned to a material with moving average price
and the actual costs at the time oI settlement vary Irom the actual costs at the time oI
goods receiptBecause this transaction is dependent on the valuation class, it is
possible to manage materials with diIIerent valuation classes in separate stock
accounts.
Caution:
Take care to ensure that:
A stock account is not used Ior any transaction other than BSX.
Postings are not made to the account manually.
The account is not changed in the productive system beIore all stock has been booked
out oI it.
Otherwise diIIerences would arise between the total stock value oI the material master
records and the balance on the stock account.
Offsetting entry for stock posting (GBB) - OIIsetting entries Ior stock postings are
used in Inventory Management. They are dependent on the account grouping to which
each movement type is assigned. The Iollowing account groupings are deIined in the
standard system:
O AUA: Ior order settlement
O AUF: Ior goods receipts Ior orders (without account assignment) and Ior order
settlement iI AUA is not maintained
O AUI: Subsequent adiustment oI actual price Irom cost center directly to
material (with account assignment)
O BSA: Ior initial entry oI stock balances
O INV: Ior expenditure/income Irom inventory diIIerences
O VAX: Ior goods issues Ior sales orders without account assignment obiect (the
account is not a cost element)
O VAY: Ior goods issues Ior sales orders with account assignment obiect
(account is a cost element)
O VBO: Ior consumption Irom stock oI material provided to vendor
O VBR: Ior internal goods issues (Ior example, Ior cost center)
O VKA: Ior sales order account assignment (Ior example, Ior individual purchase
order)
O VKP: Ior proiect account assignment (Ior example, Ior individual PO)
O VNG: Ior scrapping/destruction
O VQP: Ior sample withdrawals without account assignment
O VQY: Ior sample withdrawals with account assignment
O ZOB: Ior goods receipts without purchase orders (mvt type 501)
O ZOF: Ior goods receipts without production orders (mvt types 521 and 531)
You can also deIine your own account groupings. II you intend to post goods issues
Ior cost centers (mvt type 201) and goods issues Ior orders (mvt type 261) to separate
consumption accounts, you can assign the account grouping ZZZ to movement type
201 and account grouping YYY to movement type 261.
Caution:
II you use goods receipts without a purchase order in your system (movement type
501), you have to check to which accounts the account groupings are assigned ZOB.
II you expect invoices Ior the goods receipts, and these invoices can only be posted in
Accounting, you can enter a clearing account (similar to a GR/IR clearing account
though without open item management), which is cleared in Accounting when you
post the vendor invoice.
Note that the goods movement is valuated with the valuation price oI the material iI
no external amount has been entered.
As no account assignment has been entered in the standard system, the assigned
account is not deIined as a cost element. II you assign a cost element, you have to
enter an account assignment via the Iield selection or maintain an automatic account
assignment Ior the cost element.
GR/R clearing (WRX) - Postings to the GR/IR clearing account occur in the case oI
goods and invoice receipts against purchase orders.
Caution:
You must set the Balances in local currency only indicator Ior the GR/IR clearing
account to enable the open items to be cleared.
Price differences (PRD) - Price diIIerences arise Ior materials valuated at standard
price in the case oI all movements and invoices with a value that diIIers Irom the
standard price. Examples: goods receipts against purchase orders (iI the PO price
diIIers Irom the standard pricedardpreis), goods issues in respect oI which an external
amount is entered, invoices (iI the invoice price diIIers Irom the PO price and the
standard price).
Price diIIerences can also arise in the case oI materials with moving average price iI
there is not enough stock to cover the invoiced quantity. In the case oI goods
movements in the negative range, the moving average price is not changed. Instead,
any price diIIerences arising are posted to a price diIIerence account.
Depending on the settings Ior the posting rules Ior transaction/event key PRD, it is
possible to work with or without account modiIication. II you use account
modiIication, the Iollowing modiIications are available in the standard system:
None Ior goods and invoice receipts against purchase orders.
Purchase account(E). purchase offsetting account (EKG). freight purchase
account (FRE)
These transactions are used only iI Purchase Account Management is active in the
company code.
Note
Due to special legal requirements, this Iunction was developed specially Ior certain
countries (Belgium, Spain , Portugal, France, Italy, and Finland).
BeIore you use this Iunction, check whether you need to use it in your country.
SAP F FAQ
1. %here is "company" field in the Company Code global settings. %he R/3 help
says that it is being used for consolidation. We can use Group Chart of account
to do the same.
What is the significance of this field?
What is different between company & company code?
. When we copy the COA. only one Fin Stat Version is being copied. A COA can
have many Fin Stat Version. Why copying of COA allows only one Fin St Ver?
3. What are the information that are not copied to new company code when we
copy company code?
4. Whether one group chart of account can be assigned to Operational charts.
For Eg. %A and %B is being used by group of company as OCA. Whether
GCA GRP can be assigned to %A and %B?
1A). Company is an organizational unit which is generally used in the legal
consolidation to roll up financial statements of several company codes. A
company can include one or more company codes. II we are going Ior Consolidation ,
we need to enter the 6 character alphanumeric company identiIier that relates to this
company code.
Company Codes within a Company must use the same chart oI accounts and Iiscal
year. And Ior consolidation purpose we use Group COA wherein we link the
Operating COA thru entering the GL account no. oI the Group COA in the GL
Account oI the Operating COA.
2A). A Iinancial statement version corresponds to the chart oI accounts and wherein
Individual (operational) accounts are assigned to the corresponding FS item on the
lowest level oI this version. But as Ior the rollup oI Accounts is not possible in all the
FSV which can be copied, n rather can update manually n create multiple FSVs iI
necessary depending on the Financial Statements which are necessary Ior the
Organisation.
3A). All the Organizational units (Global Data) Ior a company code will b copied to
new company code upon using the copy Iunction except Ior the transactional data.
4A). Yes, Group COA can be assigned i.e., the GL A/c.No. is linked to the GL
Accounts oI the both Operating COA . That means Group COA consists oI Unique
set oI Accounts which can be linked to Op.COA 1 and Op.COA 2.
SAP F/CO %ips by: Sneha Reddy
Ans: Q.No.1. In the SAP system, consolidation Iunctions in Iinancial accounting are
based on companies. A company can comprise one or more company codes. Ior
example: Company A have 4 company codes which is existing in diIIerent state and /
or country. When Company A wants to consolidated the accounts, it will give the
common list oI accounts which in turn called group chart oI accounts. Group chart oI
account is used to deIine/ list the GL account uniIormly Ior all company codes.
Ans: Q.No.2. In SAP R/3 system, will allow only one Iinancial statement version Ior
single COA which you need to assign the same while copying the COA. T.code
OBY7
Ans: Q.No.3. When you want to create FYV, PPV, COA etc Ior new company code
which is as same as existing company code, then you can copy all the inIormation
Irom the source company code to the target company else whatever is required as per
the new company code requirement you can only copy the same, rest you can create
as per the requirement. Ior example Fiscal year Ior new company code may be
shortented Iiscal year which is diIIer Irom the existing company code. In this case,
Iiscal year Ior new company code you have to create and assign it to company code.
Ans: Q.No.4. Operational chart oI accounts is something diIIer Irom the Group chart
oI accounts but Group chart oI account can be assigned to Operating chart oI account
1 and 2 through GL account no.
Operating chart oI accounts: The operating chart oI accounts contains the GL
accounts that you use Ior posting in your company code during daily activities.
Financial accounting and controlling both use this chart oI accounts. You have to
assign an operating chart oI account to a company code.
Group chart oI accounts: The group chart oI accounts contains the GL accounts that
are used by the entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports Ior
the entire corporate group.
SAP F/CO %ips by: Palanivel Elangovan

How do know which target cost version we are using?
To Iind out which version is used Ior your Target Cost, try this menu path
IMG ~ Controlling -~ Product Cost Controlling -~ Cost Obiect Controlling -~ Product
Cost by Order -~ Period-end Closing -~ Variance Calculation -~ DeIine Target Cost
Versions (tcode OKV6).

How do you change the "nput tax code - Assets without input tax" value for a
company in Asset Accounting? %echnically. how do you change field
MWSKZVA field in table %093C? %A.
You can used transaction 'OBCL'.
Via customizing: Asset accounting -~ Integration with general ledger -~ Assign input
tax indicator Ior non-taxable acquisitions

Require GR & V report
s there any report on GR pending for V?
You could try executing program RFWERE00, without postings.
This is the same program which is used Ior period end closing- regrouping oI
GR/IR...but Ior only a report do not create postings.
or
May be transaction MB5S can help you out.

Retained Profit Account
After you run the GL balance carry forward. you only manage to know the
balance carry forward for the retained profit account but you don't how much is
actually post to the particular account. You have try almost all of the standard
report but still can't find any report that can show you the figure.
The balance carried Iorward is only a 'calculated' Iigure and not a 'posted' Iigure. The
break-up oI the retained earnings Iigure is available when you run the balance carried
Iorward report.
You can also derive the balance by selecting only the P&L Accounts Ior the relevant
period. The net balance oI these accounts should equal the retained earnings account.

ACH payment configuration
Based on 4.0B. s it possible to configure the system for ACH payments or do we
need to upgrade?
You can use RFFOUST to produce an ACH Iile. You may have to use user exits to
write header and trailer records. Please read documentation on this program and it is
selI-explanatory.

Locking of Planning Data in Profit Center Accounting
How to lock planning data in profit center accounting.
In 4.6 b the transaction is SALR87004395 - Maintain Versions you can lock
versions Ior each Iiscal year

Changes in vendor master
s there a report which shows changes in vendor master data.
ot only for one like MK04 or XK04 but for a range like all changes in vendors
per ccode.
(should be similar to customer master transdaction OV51)
You can used report "RFKABL00".
In the accounts payable reporting menu this program can be Iound via:
Accounts payable -~ Adequacy and documentation -~ Master data -~ Display oI
vendor changes
(depending on your SAP version oI course)

Bank Statement Upload
How to used the program RFEBKA%X? %his creates two files S%A%E.%X% and
%EM.%X%.
How are these files imported into SAP?
Try using program RFEBKA00 to upload the two Iiles.
- one is the header Iile containing the House bank & account inIormation along with
the date and the statement number
- the other is the item details.
SAF F Frequently Asked Questions 1
1. Whether any F doccument will be created during PO(Purchase order)? f
please mention the entry also.
. What factors differentiates from one dunning level and other dunning level?
3. APP %here will be many banks in a house bank. f the payment should be
maid from particular bank GL account. Where it is need to configured.
4. What are various types of servers in SAP R/3
5. Can anybody explain me F-MM integartion.pl explain in detail
i. movement types
ii. account class
iii. material types
6. Maximum no. of dunning levels are created?
7. n how many ways APP is configured
. What is diff between AAM. Recurring entries. Sample doccument?
Find here with the answers Ior your questions
1.Whether any FI document will be created during PO(Purchase order)?II pl mention
the entry also?
Ans: There is no document that is created in FI side during PO. But in controlling
there can be a commitment posting to a Cost Center. The oIIsetting entry is posted at
the time oI GR.
2.What Iactors diIIerentiates Irom one dunning level and other dunning level
Ans: The most important thing that diIIerentiates the dunning levels are the dunning
texts. The dunning text deIines the urgency oI the dunning notice. The other things
can be the dunning charges, minimum & maximum amounts etc.
3.APP
There will be many banks in a house bank. II the payment should be maid Irom
particular bank GL account. Where it is conIigured.
Ans: There can be several accounts in the same house bank. We should assign the GL
accounts exclusively at the time oI creating the Bank master data and the bank
accounts. Accordingly we can do the bank determination in FBZP Ior the individual
banks and the corresponding sub accounts.
Tr code Ior DeIining bank : FI12.
4.What are various types oI servers in SAP R/3?
Ans: The Typical SAP landscape looks something like Iigure 1.4 below:

5.can anybody explain me FI-MM integartion.pl explain in detail
i. Movement types:
ClassiIication key indicating the type oI material movement (Ior example, goods
receipt, goods issue, physical stock transIer).
The movement type enables the system to Iind predeIined posting rules determining
how the accounts oI the Iinancial accounting system (stock and consumption
accounts) are to be posted and how the stock Iields in the material master record are to
be updated.
ii. Valuation class
Assignment oI a material to a group oI G/L accounts
Along with other Iactors, the valuation class determines the G/L accounts that are
updated as a result oI a valuation-relevant transaction or event, such as a goods
movement.
The valuation class makes it possible to:
- Post the stock values oI materials oI the same material type to diIIerent G/L
accounts
- Post the stock values oI materials oI diIIerent material types to the same G/L
account
iii. Transaction/Event Key
Key allowing the user to diIIerentiate between the various transactions and events
(such as physical inventory transactions and goods movements) that occur within the
Iield oI inventory management.
The transaction/event type controls the Iiling/storage oI documents and the
assignment oI document numbers.
iv. Material Type
Groups together materials with the same basic attributes, Ior example, raw materials,
semiIinished products, or Iinished products.
When creating a material master record, you must assign the material to a material
type. The material type you choose determines:
- Whether the material is intended Ior a speciIic purpose, Ior example, as a
conIigurable
material or process material
- Whether the material number can be assigned internally or externally
- The number range Irom which the material number is drawn
- Which screens appear and in what sequence
- Which user department data you may enter
- What procurement type the material has; that is, whether it is manuIactured in-house
or
procured externally, or both
Together with the plant, the material type determines the material's inventory
management requirement, that is:
- Whether changes in quantity are updated in the material master record
- Whether changes in value are also updated in the stock accounts in Iinancial
accounting
6.Maximum no. oI dunning levels are created?
Ans: 9 levels maximum.
7.In how many ways APP is conIigured?
Tr Code: FBZP
8.What is diII between AAM,Recurring entries,Sample doccument?
Account Assignment Model:
A reIerence Ior document entry that provides deIault values Ior posting business
transactions. An account assignment model can contain any number oI G/L account
items and can be changed or supplemented at any time. In contrast to sample
documents, the G/L account items Ior account assignment models may be incomplete.
Recurring Entries:
A periodically recurring posting made by the recurring entry program on the basis oI
recurring entry original documents.
The procedure is comparable with a standing order by which banks are authorized to
debit rent payments, payment contributions or loan repayments.
Sample Documents:
Special type oI reIerence document. Data Irom this document is used to create deIault
entries on the accounting document entry screen.
Unlike an accounting document, a sample document does not update transaction
Iigures but merely serves as a data source Ior an accounting document.
SAF F Frequently Asked Questions
1. Where to assign activity type in cost centers? OR how to link cost centers &
activity types?
~~ There is no direct assignment. You plan the output Ior a cost center Iirst in kp26.
Then you've to plan the value oI that cost center which you budget Ior a period in
kp06. Planned Activity expenditure / Planned Actvty qty gives yoa planned act rate
which you can use to valuate your activity conIirmations in mIg ordrs. You can also
deIine your own prices,but you have to run the price revaluation iI you want to
revaluate your actual activity prices.
. For stat. key figure what is the significance of sender & receiver cost elements
& cost centers?
~~ Stat key Iig are not real account assignments. In simple traditionl terms it is the
base to allocate or deIine praportions with which the cost is allocated. SKFs are used
to calculate the debit on a receiver obiect. These values can be used Ior assessing
common costs which are used by all the other cost centers.
3. How SKF works .. Kindly give me % Codes Also.
~~ You create & plan SKF.
Create using KK01 & PLAN the parameters oI SKF in KP46
SAP %ips by: Dhiraj
1. Does any one know what is Software life cycle. it was a question asked in an
interview.
. n GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account
currency". What does it mean?
3. n movement type(MM). what is value & quantity string know it updates
values and quantities in GL with mix of valuvation class. transaction key
modifier and GL A/c. But how does it work when doing a mvt type?
4. n F when doing Special GL transaction what determines the fields statues of
the screen and why do we have so many screens followed by it. s it determined
by Posting Keys? is it to determine Account type for which we are using the
Special GL and debit and credit?
Q: SoItware LiIe Cycle,
Ans: it is nothing but Road Map - Iive phases like, Proiect Preparation, Blue print,
Realisation, Final preparation and Go-live support.
Q: In GL master we have a option "Balance in local currency" and "Account
currency".What does it mean?
Ans: Account currency is that the GL account in which currency do you want to
maintain. iI you decided that you want maintain in company code currency, you can
post any currency in that account.
II not, you want to maintain separate currency Ior that GL then exchange rate
diIIerence will come because the conversion rate.
Balance in local currency - some GL account can't be maintain on open item basis and
can't in Ioreign currency like clearing account and discount account etc., in such case
you can assign this indicator to show the balance in local currency.
Q. In movement type(MM), what is value & quantity string I know it updates values
and quantities in GL with mix oI valuvation class, transaction key modiIier and GL
A/c. But how does it work when doing a mvt type?
Ans: Basically, the system does not know which GL has to be updated with what.
here, we are giving a direction to the system to update the data.
What you said is correct, the system will update the value and qty in the material
master. You would have seen some more Iields also, like Movement indicator,
consumption, value string and transaction event key etc.,
While creating a PO, the system will take the Movement type as a base, with MT, it
will identiIy the MI(movement indicator - used to deIine whether it is goods
movement Ior production order, purchase order, delivery note etc), and it will identiIy
the consumption,( like it is assets, or consumption or sales order) and it will identiIy
the value string ( it is must to assigned to movement type, through allocation oI value
string to movement type, system will automatically identiIy the GL ) and it will post
the entry (dr/cr)in the GL based on the transaction and event key Iigure which is used
to determine the debit and credit entry oI a GL
SAP %ips by: Elangovan
4. In Field Status Group there are options like Suppress, optional, Required, Display.
So that it is Iollowed by so many screens and it is determined by posting key. Its both
debit (or) (Both) credit.
Questionnaire with Answers for SAP F
What is the difference between company and company code?
A company is the organizational unit used in the legal consolidation module to roll up
Iinancial statements oI several company codes.
The Company Code is the smallest organizational ! unit Ior which a complete selI-
contained set oI accounts can be drawn up Ior purposes oI external reporting.
How many chart of accounts can be attached to a company code?
One or more Operative Chart oI Accounts can be assigned to a company code.
A COA must be aasigned to a company code. This COA is the operative COA and is
used in both FI and CO. One Chart oI Account can be assigned to many Company
codes i.e., Multiple company codes can either share the same or have separate COA.
But a company code (Country speciIic Company code or International Company
code) can have a country speciIic COA also along with Operative COA. The link
between the regular COA and the country COA appears in the alternate number Iield
oI the G/L master record.
Eg: II a company's subdidiaries are located in both US & Mexico. We need to
conIigure 2 Company codes - one Ior US and another Ior Mexico,Ior eg U100 and
M100. The same way we create 2 COA's one Ior US & one Ior Mexico, USCA and
MXCA. Mexico has diIIerent govt reporting requirements than the US so we will
need to deIine a company code speciIic to Country Mexico and also create a country
speciIic COA to be used, in addition to normal COA. In tcode OBY6(Comp Code
Global Parameters) oI CC M100 we deIine normal COA i.e.,USCA in Chart oI
Accounts Iield and MXCA in Country Chart/Accts Iield.
What are substitutions and validations? What is the precedent?
Validations are used to check settings and return a message iI the prerequisite check
condition is met.
Substitutions are similar to validations; they actually replace and Iill in Iield values
behind the scenes without the user`s knowledge unlike validations that create on-
screen msgs to the user.
What is a controlling area?
The Controlling Area is the central organizational unit within CO module. It is
representative oI a contained Cost Accounting envt where costs and revenues can be
managed.
Define relationship between controlling area and company code?
A controlling area may include one or more company codes which must use the same
operative chart oI accounts as the controlling area. A Controlling Area can contain
multiple company code assignments but a single company code can be assigned to
only one controlling area.
What is a fiscal year variant?
Fiscal Year is a period oI 12 months and SAP provides 4 special periods to posting
adiustment Entries. Fiscal year determines posting periods. Posting periods are used to
assign business transactions. Fiscal year may be year dependent or year independent.
What are special periods used for?
The Special periods in a Iiscal year variant can be used Ior things like posting audit or
tax adiustments to a closed Iiscal year.
What do you mean by year dependent in fiscal year variants?
Year Dependent: the Iinancial year is same as calendar year. Starting Irom 1st Jan to
31st Dec (where posting periods and the calendar months are equal)
Year Independent: the Iinancial year is diIIerent Irom calendar year Starting Irom 1st
April to 31st March (where the posting period months are not equal to calendar year
months)
What are shortened fiscal year? When are they used?
Shortened Fiscal Year: a Iinancial year, which has less than 12 periods.
What are posting periods?
The Posting period variant controls which posting periods, both normal and special,
are open Ior each company code. It is possible to have a diIIerent posting period
variant Ior each company code in the organization. The posting period is independent
oI the Iiscal year variant.
What are document types and what are they used for?
Document type is the identiIier oI diIIerentt account transactions like SA Ior G/L,AA
Ior Asset Accounting etc.The doc. Types controls things like type oI the account that
can be posted to, the number range assigned to it, and required doc header Iields.
How are tolerance group for employees used?
Tolerance group stores Posting amount deIaults. Tolerance groups are assigned to
User ID`s that ensures only authorized persons can make postings.
What are posting keys? State the purpose of defining posting keys?
Posting keys determine whether a line item entry is a debit or a credit as well as the
possible Iield status Ior the transaction. Posting keys are SAP delivered. II u want
changes like making additional Iields optional on payment type posting keys then the
best possible action is to copy the posting key that needs to be modiIied and then
modiIy it.
What are field status groups?
Field status groups control the additional account assignments and other Iields that
can be posted at the line item level Ior a G/L account.
SAP Financial %ips by : Komal
Questionnaire with Answers for SAP F
Q1-What are adjustment postings and its use? Give t.codes and paths if possible?
Answer: Ib50,I-02 and others could be used Ior adiustments. These adiustments are to
correct any Iinancial representation that has already been booked into the accounts.
Q-Suppose have purchased goods of 10 units(raw materials or semi-finished
goods) worth Rs10000 from vendor A (suppose) and also made payment for the
same. ow during the manufacturing process. it was observed that 3 units are
defective. now my question is how do we deal with the defective units in SAP as
have already made payment for the 10 units(i.e Rs10000).
Answer: II you have a GRN against these materials, then the same can be return
delivered. An appropriate movement type needs to be conIigured Ior the same. As Ior
the payment, raise a credit note on the vendor.
* Using Debit Memo you can get the money Ior deIective 3 units. *-- Gnan Eswari
Q.3-We always copy company code or we can create manually also? f possible
give reasons also.
Answer: There are loads oI tables that get copied over when copying co codes. This
might be incomplete in a manual copy, and hence the manual route is not advisable.
Q.4-n case of APP. when bank master data updated?
Q.5-Suppose in 004 have depreciation key 'AB&in 005 depreciation key
have changed to"CD". n what way my balances would be affected like balances
of depreciation.accumulated depreciation.assets etc.
Answer: The diIIerence in the depreciation that is posted already, and what should be
posted with historical eIIect will be posted in the current accounting period.
Q.6 How many chart of accounts can be assigned to company code we can assign
company code to chart of account through OB6? ow my question is in what
way we can assign three types of chart of account to company code in one
transaction code ( might be wrong plz correct me)
Answer: Three, although the group and country chart oI accounts are optional. The
group chart oI accounts is assigned to the
operational chart oI accounts, and the only mandatory CoA is the Operational CoA.
Q.7 How many financial statement versions can be assigned to co.code?
Answer: As many FSVs as you want can be assigned to the co code i.e. 1:n as oI Co
Code: FSV.

have created Company Code and all other configuration related to the CCode.
Also in MM have created purchase order. created vendor. material etc.
couldn't activate the PO due to the following error messages in red:
1. MA%A %OLERACE LM%S FOR %OLERACE KEY PE
ACCOU% ASSGME%
. CO%ROL DCA%ORS FOR CO%ROLLG AREA DO O% EXS%.
have assigned controlling area to company code and could see the controlling
area in existance via master file and gl verification.
1. MAINTAIN TOLERANCE LIMITS FOR TOLERANCE KEY PE ACCOUNT
ASSIGNMENT ----~ Please Iollow this link --~ SPRO ---~ MM---~ Purchasing --~
Purchase Order --~ Set Tolerance limits Ior price variance --~ Here you have to set Ior
Tolerance keys PE and SE. Just copy them Irom std co. code.

2. CONTROL INDICATORS FOR CONTROLLING AREA DO NOT EXIST. ----
~

In Controlling --~ General Controlling --~ Maintain Controlling Area --~ Maintain
Controlling Area --~ Activate Components/Control Indicators --~ You need to check
iI you want to activate the order management/activity based costing/commitment
management etc.
ntegration of FCO with Other Modules
What are the steps for integration of FCO with other modules SD. MM etc. ?
Some basic inIormation :
F-MM: %he integration between F-MM happens in %-code OBYC.
1. When PO is created :
---- No Entry -----
2. When GR is posted
Inventory Account dr (Transaction Key BSX in OBYC)
To GRIR account (T.Key WRX in T-code OBYC)
3. When Invoice is posted
GRIR account Dr.
Vendor account Cr.
4. Payment made to Vendor
Vendor A/c Dr
To Bank Clearing A/c Cr.
Points to know : Movement Types, Assignment oI Movement types to T-keys (T-code
OMJJ), Value string (I also need some inIormation on this) , OMWN and OMWB
transactions.
---
There is a close integration b/w FI & MM, actually document Ilows Irom MM to FI in
the Iollowing areas such as,

1. Movement Types:

Used to enable the system to Iind the predeIined posting rules determining how the
accounts oI Iinancial accounting system are to be posted & to update the stock Iields
in the matrl master data.(Goods Receipt, Goods Issue, etc)

2. Valuation Class:

Assignment oI material to grp oI gl account, used to determine the gl accounts that are
updated as a result oI goods movement.

3. Transaction/Event key:

Used to control the storage or Iiling oI documents & assignment oI documents.Used
to diIIereniate b/w various transactions such as goods movement tht occur in
inventory.

4. Material Type:

Each material should assign mtrl type in mtrl master record used to update whether
changes made in qty are updated in material master record & change in value also
updated in stock account.

F-SD ntegration: %he integration is done in %-code VKOA
1. Sales Order Created
---No Entry---
2. PGI done (Goods issue)
Cost oI Goods Sold Dr (ConIigured in OBYC GBB T-Key)
To Inventory Account
3. Billing document released to Accounting
Customer Account Dr.
To Sales Revenue Account (ERL T-key in Pricing procedure)
Note : The GL account is assigned to this ERL in VKOA
4. Payment Received
Bank Clearing A/c Dr
Customer A/c Cr.
Points to Know : Good to understand the pricing procedure and how the diIIerent
transaction keys are used like ERL, ERS etc.
Open and Close Posting Periods
DeIine the posting company code variant in SM30 - V%010O
Assign the company code variant in SM30 - V001R
Maintain the open and close posting period with OB5.
You can control period by : -
1. G/L number range.
2. Company code.
3. Company code and G/L range.


Allowed OB5 based on company code
II you have several company codes and want your users only to be able to open and
close periods
(transaction OB52) belonging to their posting period variant (company code).
First you conIigure the Posting Variant :-
1) FI- FI Global Settings - Document - Posting Periods - DeIine Variants Ior Posting
Periods
2) FI- FI Global Settings - Document - Posting Periods - Assign Variants to Company
Code
Second Step:-
Goto SE11 copy the view VT001B to ZVT001B000X (000X indicate the Posting
Variant)
In Change mode, tabstrips Selection Conditions Insert line 2 with
%able Field ame Operator Comparative Value AD/OR
T001B BUKRS EQ '000X' AND
Save your entries
Third Step :-
Goto SE54, Options Generated Obiects -~ Create
Authorizations Group FC31
Function Group Z00F0
Maintenance Type One Type
Overview Screen 65
Single Screen 0
Final Step :-
Goto SE93, Create a new transaction code ZOB52000X
Start obiect - Transaction with parameters (parameter transaction)
Transaction SM30, Tick Skip initial screen
ame of screen field Value
VIEWNAME ZVT001B000X
UPDATE X
Save your entries.
Now, test your new transaction code ZOB52000X which will only display the
Posting Variant that you have deIine in your table view.
Variants in OB5 to use Multiple %ime Zones
s there anyway to configure the posting periods variants in OB5 to use multiple
time zones? For example. if the US is one company code can multiple variants be
setup for the different time zones?
Dawn %ooke
In T-code OBBO you can create, iI you are need, Ior every company code a posting
period variant which must assign to company code - T-code OBBP. With OB52 you
can determine Ior every posting period variant a posting period Ior every account type
(A,S,D,K,M and ).
Important: In FI it is possibile only two period ranges have to be open at the same
time, during oI the closing procedure, one Ior posting period oI Iiscal year (1-12) and
one Ior special posting period (13-16).
II my answer it is not suIIicient, please give me a example Ior what you want to say
with "to use multiple time zones".
Emilia
The Last column in OB52 Screen Ior authorisation group.
I think this Iield can be eIIectively to restrict the posting by diIIerent users situated in
diIIerent time zones. OI course iI a user is travelling Irom one time zone to other, this
option may not work unless authorisation group in his user Id is changed.

s %here an Automatic Program for MMPV
By : Sydnie McConnell
%he client am working with has an outdated training client. %he current
posting period right now is ovember 004. have two questions:
1. Does anyone know of a shortcut to get the current posting period updated
versus opening each month from ov. '04 until today.
. s there an automatic program that can be set up to change to current period
without having to go in manually every month to initiate MMPV.
In IMG, you can go to Logistics - General ~ Material Master ~ Basic Settings ~
Maintain Company Codes Ior Materials Management. You can then enter the periods
that you need to have open.
As Iar as running something monthly, iI you are working only in one general region oI
the world, you can run program RMMMPERI Irom SE38 at 00:01:00 on day 1 oI each
period. You'll need to create a selection variant with a variable to tell it which period
to use.
We run into problems with MMPV/RMMMPERI, and have to actually manually
schedule it each month. I run it three times - one to open the periods Ior our Asian
plants (at 09:00:00 my time, on the last day oI my month), one to open periods Ior our
European plants (at 16:00:00 my time, on the last day oI my month), and one to open
periods Ior our US plants (at 00:01:00 my time, on the Iirst day oI my month). I've
not been able to schedule recurring iobs Ior the Asian and European plants, because I
can't Iigure out a way to set up a recurrence Ior the last day oI the month. I can do it
on day 1, or day 28, or something speciIic like that, but since the last day oI the month
can Iall on day 28, 30, or 31, I'm not able to do that.
Check List for F Year End Closing
1 Execute Report Ior InterCompany Activity & Journal Entries
2 Open posting period Ior next yr
3 Run Business Area's Assignment report.
4 Review list oI recurring iournal entries
5 Execute Recurring Entries Ior A/R, A/P, G/L
6 Process Parked A/R, A/P, G/L accounting documents
7 Final CutoII Ior the Maintenance oI Fixed Asset- Add TransIer and Retire
8 Run Depreciation in Test Run and post
9 VeriIy Display Log Ior Depreciation Test Run
10 Capitalize AUC Assets iI needed
11 Enter Payroll Data to SAP
12 VeriIy Depreciation Balances with GL balances
13 Post Depreciation
14 Execute Asset History Report, and retire assets iI needed
15 Adiust speciIic depreciation areas iI necessary
16 Reconcile AM subledger with GL
17 Check Bank Data
18 Review AR Open Items
19 Review AP Open Items
20 Execute Pending Invoices
21 Clear Open Item Ior GRIR, Ireight
22 Reconciliation oI Financial Documents and transactional Iigures
23 Open new CO Posting Period
24 Compare current (cost estimates) with last current price (Moving Avg)
25 Update current cost price to material master price Iield.
26 Process Freight charges, Match SD Ireight to actual
27 Review Internal Order Postings
28 Settle All Orders
29 VeriIy All Post Goods Issue have been Invoiced (Billing Due List)
30 Review SD Billng Doc Irom prior mth that have not yet been released to
accounting
31 Reconciliation oI MM movements in Transit Intra-SAP to NonSAP
32 Reconcile PI Inventory with SAP
33 PerIorm Manual Adiustment iI needed
34 VeriIy balance oI the GR/IR account
35 Post Accruals and DeIerrals
36 Clearing oI Cancelled Documents
37 Check ProIitability Segment Adiustment
38 Aging Report-Reconcile GL balances with subledger balances AP
39 Check the check run numbers
40 Bank reconciliation Data
41 Enter Tax Journal Entry
42 Reconcile GL balances with subledger balances AR/MM/AP
43 Display Balance Sheet Adiustments
44 Post Balance Sheet Adiustments
45 Post Foreign Currency Valuation (Ioreign exchange)
46 Check generic cost centers Ior posting with wrong accounts
47 Correct wrong postings on generic cost centers
48 Check Validation dates Ior Cost Centers, Cost Elements, CO area
49 Check COGI--Ior both month end and year end
50 DoubtIul receiviables
51 VeriIy In-transist Inventory
52 Reconcile PA to G/L
53 Post Cost Centre Assessments and Distributions
54 Run CO-FI Reconciliation to balance
55 Run BW reports P&L and Balance Sheet
56 Maintain CO yr variant
57 Fiscal Yr Balance carryIorward AP/AR/AM
58 Fiscal Yr Balance carryIorward CO
59 Fiscal Yr balance carryIorward FI
60 Fiscal Yr balance carryIorward PCA
61 Set Document number ranges - FI - new year
62 Set Document number ranges AP/AR - new year
63 Generate Financial statement Reports
64 Change Fiscal Year For Assets
65 Year end Closing-- Asset Accounting--Iinal Ior year end
66 Close CO Posting Period
67 Close Prior A/R Posting Period
68 Close Prior A/P Posting Period
69 Close Prior MM Posting Period
70 Reverse accruals and deIerrals Ior the new month
71 Reconciliation oI Financial Documents Irom old Iiscal year and new Iiscal year
72 Load Balances, Budget Data Ior Cost centers, sales
73 Update Retained Earning Account , balance carry Iwd
Setup F Fiscal Year Period
%he client wants fiscal year to be set from May 1 - April 30 but they use a 4.4.5
accounting period setup meaning that every month end on the last Friday of the
month. am setting for 006-007. As you know. the FYV should be year
dependent. so how can the periods be set up.
In IMG go to Iinancial accounting global setting then go to Iiscal year variant and set
the Iiscal year variant on year dependent year and Iollow the Iollowing procedure:
1. enter name oI month started Irom may and end on april
2. enter the number oI days in a month you want to close Ior example in may number
oI days is 28 instead oI 31
3. enter period Irom 01 to 12 started Irom may to april
4. enter -1 against the month Irom ian to april
For Example :
Month umber of Days Period Year Shift
May06 28 01 0
June 35 02 0
July 28 03 0
Aug 28 04 0
Sep 35 05 0
Oct 28 06 0
Nov 28 07 0
Dec 35 08 0
Jan07 28 09 -1
Feb 28 10 -1
Mar 35 11 -1
Apr 31 12 -1



Fiscal Year Varient & Posting Periods Varient
What's the relation between between fiscal year varient & posting periods
varient.
By : Rams
Fiscal year variant determines iI you are using calendar dependent year or year
dependent (where you can create your own periods) eg you want your period 1 to be
April period 2 to be May and so on.
Posting period determines which period is open. Your company code is tied to a
posting period variant. Each posting period variant is tied to an account type (GL,
vendor Asset etc)
Here you determine iI period 1 should be open or period 2 etc.
Fiscal year variant and Posting period variant are diIIerentiated based on their
purpose. While Iiscal year variant is to deIine no oI posting a period allowed and is
assigned to co code, posting period variant is to decide which periods can be opened
at particular point oI time Ior posting. Separate rules can be deIined Ior each type oI
account. This is used Ior control purpose.
There isn't relation between Fiscal year variant and Posting period variant. But there is
relation between Fical year and Posting Periods. Fiscal year structure contains posting
periods. For each posting period we have speciIied day end. To process business
transactions these posting periods must be in open status. You can open all the posting
periods (or) you can restrict the posting periods by Account Type wise and Account
No wise and Authorization group wise.

To restrict the posting periods by Account Types wise Iirst you need to open the
posting periods Ior all Account Types (' symbol).
Whether fiscal year is defined only at once or it is defined for each year.
This depends upon the client requirement. Generally Fiscal year will be deIined once.
But in some cases (where business will run Ior certain period means business will run
Ior 6 months or 8 months) evry year they will deIine Iiscal year.

Independent Fiscal Year: In any year the starting period and ending period will be
same and same posting periods Ior continues years. It is called as INDEPENDANT
F.Y.

Dependant Fiscal Year: In any year the starting period and ending period may be
diIIerent (or) iI you have less than 12months, that Iiscal year must be deIine as a
DEPENDANT FISCAL YEAR (or) SHORT END FISCAL YEAR.
SAP Chart of Account
It deIines the structure oI G/L accounts. It is a list oI G/L accounts used by one or
more company codes. In that Chart oI account you have to speciIy the length oI G/L
accounts.
In SAP all the entries are document oriented. so Irom the balance sheet oI any entry
you can identiIy the root oI an entry. so it's like a Ilow chart in computer terms.
There are threee types oI Chart oI Account are there.
1.Operative Chart oI Accounts
2.Group oI Chart oI Accounts
3.Country Chart oI Accounts.
1.Operative Chart oI Accounts is a Chart oI Account you use Ior the company code.
2.For diIIerent chart oI accounts(operative COA) Ior diIIerent company code, you can
group the chart oI account into one chart oI account Ior internal reporting, but cross
company code controlling is not possible, because oI diIIerent chart oI account Ior
diIIerent company code.

3.For diIIerent country you can have diIIerent reporting system. so Ior diIIerent
company code you can have diIIerent company code, but can have same Operative
Chart oI account, so cross company code controlling is possible.
%ips by : 1ayaraman
What is the difference between standard chart of accounts and the operating
chart of accounts? What is the difference between Corporate group chart of
accounts. Operating chart of accounts and Group chart of accounts?
To summarise, here is the COA setup in SAP:-
1. Operative chart oI account - It is the main chart oI account assigned to each
company code in OBY6.
2. Group chart oI accounts - This is structured in accordance with requirements
pertaining to Consolidation
3. Country-speciIic charts oI accounts - These are structured in accordance with legal
requirements oI the country in question.
Standard COA is a sample COAs provided by SAP. like INT, CAUS etc. You can use
them as your operative COA or can create your own operative COA Irom these
standard COA.
Corporate Group COA is same as Group COA.
Cost Elements not created for General Ledger Accounts
How can find out the GL accounts of Profit & Loss type for which Cost
Elements have not been created?
s there a standard report to throw these exceptions?
What is the best control to ensure that cost element is created for all expense
accounts in GL?

Well, the Iirst thing that comes to mind is iust download the GL Accounts, download
Cost Elements and do a quick VLookup in Excel. That will tell you. That'll take you
about 5 minutes or so.
or
You could try this respective transactions:
OKB2;
OKB3; and
SM35
To prevent creating oI GL P&L items without creating the cost elements on 4.6 / 4.7
there is an option to allow the automatic creation oI Cost Elements whenever a G/L
account is created in a Company Code. i.e. It does not create when an account is
created at the Chart oI Accounts Level, only when it is created in a Company Code.
To do this;
// Financial Accounting // General ledger Accounting // G/L Accounts // Master
Records // Preparations // Edit Chart oI Accounts List // Select the Chart oI Accounts
then;
Integration // Controlling Integration // then I'll let you guess.
Also, you need to speciIy within controlling which account ranges should be created
under which Cost Element Category;
// Controlling // Cost Element Accounting // Master Data // Cost Elements //
Automatic Creation oI Primary and Secondary Cost Elements // *.*
II this was conIigured, you could also create a batch Iile now that would catch up with
any cost elements not yet created.
What is GL At Company Level and Chart of Accounts
Please explain what is meant by general ledger at company code level and chart
of accounts level?
General Ledger has two segments i.e.,
1. Chart oI Accounts Data (T.Code FSPO)and
2. Company Code Data (T.Code FSSO)
GL account master records are divided into two areas to that company code with the
same chart oI account can use the same GL account. The chart oI account area
contains the data valid Ior all company codes, such as Account Number.
The Company code speciIic area contains data that may vary Irom one company code
to another, such as the currency in which the account may be posted.
Lets, suppose there are not segment both the segments are combined, at that time it
will become diIIicult to copy the Company Code data because the Iields may vary in
company code. Ior example Currency, though you have same Chart oI Account Data.
Because, GL Accounts has two segments, it will be easy to copy Chart oI Accounts
data Irom A company code which matches your requirement and Company Code data
oI B Company code and you can create a separate chart oI account in C company
code.
To copy Chart oI account data and Company code data seperately, see Alternative
method oI creating GL Master in IMG screen.
Change Reconciliation Account of Customer Master
There is no problem to change the account number in the vendor or customer master
data, that is :
All Document Items that were created in the old account will be posted in the same
old account when you have a payment posting, compensations, etc.
All document created aIter the change will be posted in the new account as well as the
payment postings, compensations and others.
The system will separate the postings in accordance with the moment at the
documents were created.
You can do a test in the development client beIore you do the change in the
production.
For example :-
You can create a new reconciliation account because you want the G/L accounts to
separate out sales. Just switched the setting in Customer Master and oII you go. SAP
will recognized the old account Ior the old postings and used the new account Ior any
new postings.
Here is the oIIicial SAP help on the subiect:-
You should run balance sheet adiustment program aIter any reconciliation account
change.
The system perIorms any adiustments required due to the change oI reconciliation
accounts or G/L accounts. The items Irom the old reconciliation accounts are
allocated to the new accounts.
Since you cannot post to the reconciliation accounts directly, the postings are made to
temporary adiustment accounts.
These adiustment accounts should be displayed along with the relevant reconciliation
account in the balance sheet. The postings are then reversed aIter the balance sheet
has been created.
The program Ior sorting the payables and receivables makes the necessary
adiustments automatically. This means that you have to deIine the adiustment account
numbers and the posting keys Ior these postings in the system.
II you purchase and install the FI-LC Consolidation application and have bought up a
previous customer or vendor (thus also taking on his/her payables and receivables),
please reIer to the note in the report documentation on changed reconciliation
accounts. To deIine the account numbers, select the activity DeIine adiustment
accounts Ior changed reconciliation accounts in the Accounts Receivable and
Accounts Payable Implementation Guide.
You should only run this program iI your new reconciliation account is classiIied
diIIerently Irom the original in your FS. e.g.. AR to Intercompany accounts. It will
iust reclassiIy the existing balance. The line items will not be transIerred. II not then
no need to run the program at all.
How to Configure FCO Reconciliation
In Co, we create Recon accts to keep Fi gl in balance with CO. Not all transactions
aIIect FI gls, best example oI it is internal order settlements, they use secondary cost
elements and does not aIIect your G/l accts. To update FI side oI it we maintain recon
accts. These are primarily Ior cross company, cross Iunctional and cross business area
transactions.
The number oI recon accts to be deIined is dependant on various Iactors, like how
your management wants to see the reports.. whether they want to classiIy the cost
based on CO obiect class or by Co types etc..
However the basic conIig you got to Iollow is:
1. Activate Recon accts (iI you have created CO area newly, it would be active).
use T.code: KALA
2. Assignment oI Recon document type to the Controlling area.
T.code: OKKP
3. Creating clearing accts (that you want to us! e Ior reconciliation. During FI-Co
recon.. inter company clearing accounts will be automatically credited or debited and
now you need to create oIIset acct which will show up in P&l acct).
Acct determination set up thru T.code: OBYA
4. Maintain accts Ior Automatic Recon posting.
T.code OBYB
5. Assign Number ranges to Recon activity.
Tcode OK13 *-- Radha
Krishna
Without creating of reconciliation account. can you create vendor? What is the
use of reconciliation?
Customer and vendor accounts are sub ledger GL's. We will have to create two
reconciliation GLs in viz. Reconciliation GL Ior Customer and Vendor in chart oI
accounts.
AIter, while creating customer and vendor master records, we have to mention
respective reconciliation GL in their company code segment details. This recon a/c
will show you the net balances in GL Ior customer and vendor a/cs.
Without creating Vendor you can still create individual GL Ior each customer and
vendor , but then
1) Your list oI GL's in chart oI account will be very lengthy.
2) Duplication oI work as SD/ MM people are also required to create their own list.
3) Cross company code consolidation will not be possible as the chart oI accounts will
be diIIerent.
4) Very diIIicult to keep track oI individual customer/ vendor a/cs.
5) Not advisable even in real time accounting system i.e. manual book keeping. *-
- Mahaian
Step-by-Step Procedure for Customizing an Electronic Bank Reconciliation
Statement
To set up Electronic Bank Statements (EBS)
Processing in SAP Ior most customers in North America.
1. Create House Bank and Account ID (FI12)
2. Setup EDI Partner ProIile Ior FINSTA Message Type (WE20)
3. ConIigure Global Settings Ior EBS (IMG)
- Create Account Symbols
- Assign Accounts to Account Symbols
- Create Keys Ior Posting Rules
- DeIine Posting Rules
- Create Transaction Types
- Assign External Transaction Types to Posting Rules
- Assign Bank Accounts to Transaction Types
4. DeIine Search String Ior EBS(Optional)
- Search String DeIinition
- Search String Use
5. DeIine Program and Variant Selection
Additional inIormation is also available in the SAP Library under:
Financial Accounting ~ Bank Accounting (FI-BL) ~ Electronic Bank Statement ~
Electronic Account Statement Customizing.
SAP F %ips by: Ramesh
Bank Reconcilliation Statement
The Iollowing are the steps Ior BRS:
Create Bank Master Data - This can be created through T.Code FI01 or you can also
create the house bank through IMG/FA/Bank accounting/Bank account
2. DeIine House Bank
3. Set up Bank selection payment programe- IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/AUTOIP/PM/Bank
selection Ior payment prg.
a. setup all co codes Ior payment transaction - Customer and vendors
b.setup paying co codes Ior payment transactions
c.setup payment method per country
d.setup payment method per co code Ior payment transaction
e.setup bank determination Ior payment transaction
Please go Ior Cheque mangement using T code FCHI
(IMG/FA/ARAP/BT/OP/AutoOp/PaymentMedia/CheckManagement) and Ior void
reasons FCHV. You can create Bank Reconcilliation statement by TC FF67
(SAP/AC/Treasury/CashManagement/Incomings/ManualBankStatement) . Don't
Iorget to keep the opening Balance as zero. Use FBEA Ior post process.
All the steps together will lead to (FF67) Bank reconciliation statement.
Explain Reconciliation Between F Books & CO Books
What is Reconciliation Ledger?
The purpose oI Recon Ledger is to display the summarized balances oI cost ledger. It
is a ledger used Ior summarized display oI values that appear in more detailed Iorm in
the transaction Iorm. It has the Iollowing Iunctions:
1) Reconciles controlling with Financial accounting.
a) The recon ledger provide the reports Ior monitoring the reco oI CO with FI by
accounts.
b) It can identiIy & display value Ilows in Controlling across Company codes,
Iunctional area or business area boundaries.
c) Value Ilows can be used in FI as a basis Ior summarized reco. postings.
2) Provides an overview oI all costs incurred.
Updation oI Recon ledger can be done online or periodically. To update online, you
need to activate the recon ledger. For periodical updation, proceed as Iollows :
a) During month end, activate the recon ledger. (T Code-KALA)
b) Do Iollow up postings.
c) Deactivate the Recon ledger. (T Code-KALB).
RECOCLA%O LEDGER EXAMPLE 1
When you need to drill back Irom the FI G/L to Iind which cost center was Posted to
on an expense account, the reconciliation ledger is accessed.
The need to have a CO to FI reconciliation process is a result oI cross company Code,
cross-business area, or cross Iunctional area activity that may occur in the CO module.
Order settlement or conIirmation, cost center assessment, or other internal CO
movement may initiate these postings. When costs moved internally within CO, the FI
G/L is not updated because oI CO use oI secondary Cost elements to Iacilitate the
postings.
The Iirst two steps in reconciliation ledger conIiguration are to activate the Ledger
within the controlling area and assign a document type. II you have an Existing
controlling area that does not have the reconciliation ledger activated.
Activate the reconciliation ledger:
Controlling -~ Overhead Cost Controlling -~ Cost and Revenue Element -~
Accounting -~ Reconciliation Ledger -~ Activate Reconciliation Ledger (KALA)
RECOCLA%O LEDGER EXAMPLE
A good receipt posting oI Rs.100 has occurred on internal order 1, which is assigned
to company code
One hundred percent oI the value oI internal order No.1 is settled to internal order 2.
Which is assigned to company code 2.
A Settlement cost element is used Ior the settlement posting. When an order
Settlement is run, internal order 1 is credited with Rs.100 and internal order 2 is
debited with Rs.100. The balances oI internal order 1 and internal order 2 are 0 and
Rs.100, respectively. However, the balances oI company code 1 and 2 remain as they
were prior to settlement. The reason: settlement activity was internal to CO. No FI
update occurred.
To place the FI company codes back in balance, the CO-FI reconciliation posting
transaction should be run. The resulting FI postings would credit company code 1 Ior
Rs.100 and debit company code 2 Ior Rs.100. The internal CO activity will now have
been accounted Ior in FI and company codes are now in balance.
Document flow confusion in SAP F
have a problem understanding basic things like how a document flows in the
Sap system. When posting a customer invoice the subledger will be debited with
that amount. now my confusion is will the same amount be posted to the G/L
only or the very same amount will also be posted to the reconciliation general
ledger - making 3 postings or %he recon acc is the G/L . don't see 3 postings
happening because then debits will be Posted against one debit -please clarify
me on this.

Also the different between the G/L. Special ledgers and the recon acc is not clear
to me.

Customer and Vendor accounts are maintained in a subledger. Posting to these
accounts will also be posted to the A/R and A/P reconciliation accounts. All
Reconciliation accouints are GL accounts.
All G/L accounts are not reconciliation accounts.
Why is this done?
In large businesses, there will be hundreds/thousands oI customers/vendors. All these
are personalaccounts (there are three types oI accounts: nominal, personal and real).
These personal accounts are grouped in to sub-ledgers and any posting to them is
reconciled to the G/L
via the reconciliation accounts.
Prakash

For IulIilling completing the double entry system accounting the Reconciliation
accounts i.e., Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable are used. All the Vendors
are grouped under Acounts Payable & Customers are grouped under Accounts
Receivable. And also always any time the balance in reconciliation account shows as
zero.
Ex: 1) Vendors transaction:
For Invoice posting:
Inventory A/c Dr
To Vendor A/c................Accounts Payable A/c (Reconciliation Ledger)
(In SAP since we are linking in the G/L Master Accounts Payable with the
Reconciliation Accounts type setting as Vendors. Hence, with one entry 3 Accounts
are automatically updated)
Accounts Payable is Liability & Inventory is Current Assets.
For Payment to Vendor:
Vendor A/c Dr.....Accounts Payable A/c
To Bank/ Cash A/c

Ex:2) Customer Transaction:
Sales Invoice Posting:
Customer A/c Dr...Accounts Receivable A/c (Reconciliation A/c)
To Sales A/c

Receipt Posting:
Bank A/c Dr
To Customer A/c...........Accounts Receivable A/c

In Normal Accounting the Reconciliation Accounts are called as Control Accounts
and we pass 2 entries Ior each transaction i.e., Sale, as Iollowing:
1) Customer A/c Dr (Sales Ledger / Accounts Receivable A/c)
To Sales A/c (General Ledger)
2) Accounts Receivable A/c Dr (General Ledger)
To Customer A/c (Sales Ledger Adiustment A/c)
Hence, any time the Control A/c balance is zero.

I hope I am clear and now your conIusion problem gets resolved.

Ashok

These are basic accounting diIIerentiation Ior diIIerent types oI accoutns. This is a
basic accounting concept and is not speciIically mentioned anywhere in SAP
terminology.
Personal accounts:
Accounts in the name oI individuals, organizations etc.
For example, Company A A/c, XYZ limited co A/C, Suresh A/C, Indian Bank A/C
etc
Real Accounts:
These are accounts related to assets, both real and tangible.
example, Iurniture a/c, machinery a/c, accounts receivables a/c etc
Nominal Accounts:
These are related to incomes/expenditures and proIit/losses.
Ior example, sales A/c, salary a/c etc
I hope this clears your doubts
What is "Real %ime" ntegration?
What is "real time integration" advantage of SAP?
What is the Config for ntegration entry? How these entries get formulated in
backend?
Real time integration is nothing but the data posting to all the aIIected areas instantly
when an activity is perIormed. For E.g. When you do a FI-SD integration, when a PGI
is posted, the Iollowing entry is aIIected :
1. Cost oI Goods Sold Dr 100
To Inventory Account Cr 100
Here the Cost oI Goods Sold is an FI entry and Inventory Account related to MM but
both oI them gets aIIected immediately when you post a PGI in SD.
The updation oI these entries when PGI is done is called Real Time Integration. The
aIIect is shown in all FI, MM and SD modules once you save the entry.
The conIiguration Ior the below entry is done in OBYC
1. Cost oI Goods Sold Dr 100 (T-Key GBB)
To Inventory Account Cr 100 (T-Key BSX)
The automatic entries are posted to inventory accounts through T-keys to which GL
accounts are assigned. These T-keys are assigned to movement types in MM. Please
reIer to T-code OMWN and OMWB Ior proper understanding.
Configuration for Special Purpose Ledger
AP F Question:
Why do we use special purpose ledger?
What are the configurations we need to make?
We are using the Special Purpose Ledger Ior statutory reporting or mangement
reporting purpose. It also help us in doing single entry, adistment posting like income
tax deperication.
Steps Ior coIig.
- DeIine Table Group
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Basic Settings -~ Tables -~
DeIinition -~ DeIine Table Group
- Maintain Field Movement
GCF2
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Basic Settings -~ Master Data -~
Maintain Field Movements
- Maintain Ledger Ior statutory ledger
GCL2
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Basic Settings -~ Master Data -~
Maintain Ledgers -~ Copy Ledger
Assign Co Code
Assign Activities
- DeIine Versions
GCW1
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Periodic Processing -~ Currency
Translation -~ DeIine Versions
- Set Up Exchange Rate Type
OC47
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger Periodic Processing -~ Currency
Translation -~ Set Up Exchange Rate Type
- Create Number ranges
GC04
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Actual Posting -~ Number
Ranges -~ Maintain Local Number Ranges
- Create Currency Translation document type
GCBX
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Actual Posting -~ Maintain Valid
Document Type
- Create Posting period variant
GCP1
IMG Menu Path :
Financial Accounting -~ Special Purpose Ledger -~ Actual Posting -~ Posting Period
-~ Maintain Local Posting Period
What is Hold and Parking of Document?
Hold Document: It is Ior short term and is used when tranaction Dr or Cr is
uncertained and generally its is used Ior external purpose. eg: Advance Irom potential
customer
Parking Document: Its is Ior longer period generally used Ior internal purpose. eg:
Advance made Ior employes.
What is the main purpose of this document. Why we are using this one to in F?
How it is useful?
Parking documents is used when we need to get any clariIication regarding some
account.
We can temporarily park or store this document till we get it cleared or approved.
Then we can post it.
Remember.... parking does not update the accounts....... it iust stores the document.....
whereas posting will update the accounts....( Ior example.... the reducing/increasing oI
the account balances).
The TC Ior Parking Documents is F-02 -~ enter the required details -~go to the menu
(at top ) -~Document-~ Park.
To post a parked document : FBV0-~ go to the menu Document-~ Post.
Other TCs used pertaining to Parking oI Documents are :
FV50 : Post / Delete : Single Screen Transaction
FBV2 : Change
FBV3 : Display
FBV4 : Change Header
FBV5 : Display Changes
FBV6 : ReIuse
SAP F %ips by : Viji Balakrishnan

F-63 Park Document - Only transfer amounts in document curr. in invoice
n F-63. there is a checkbox "Only transfer amnts in document curr. invoice".
may know what is the purpose of this checkbox & under what circumstances
we will use this checkbox.
"Only transIer amounts in document curr. in invoice"
II we sets this indicator it translates the doc. currency into local currency at the time oI
parked document.
II we not set this indicator it translates the doc. currency into local currency when
posting oI document.
Eg: We are parking a document with doc. currency in USD (40- the next day we are
posted that document then it is (42- the system takes the exchange rate Irom the
header which was speciIied in the parked document (40- only. II we not set this
indicator it will take at the time oI posting oI document (42-
Difference between Posting Key and Field Status Variant
What is the use of Field Status Variant. Why it is required?
What is the difference between "Posting Key Variant and Field Status Variant".
Why both the things are required to define as both control the fields. What
specific fields are controlled this fields.
'Posting Key Variant ' Controls- Iields oI Posting Key and 'Field Status Variant'
controls Iields oI G/L Account.Fields oI G/L Account which are controlled by FSV
can see in T.Code OBC4 and Fields oI Posting Keys in SPRO-FAGS-Document- Line
Item. Both can controls common Iields, then SAP applies 'SDRO' rule.
SDRO rule. %he fields can be Suppressed. Displayed. Required. Optional.
Posting is key controls
- which type oI accounts can be posted to
- whether the line item is debit or credit
- and the Iield status oI the document line item
Where as FSG (group into Field status Variant) controls only the the document line
item Ior that account.
There are only three Iield status options during document entry:
- Suppressed
- Required
- Optional
II both Posting key and FSV has the same Iield as Required and optional, system uses
the link rules, takes the one which has the highest priority(in this case required).
But in case oI Master record Field status which is controlled by Account Group, there
are 4 options oI Iield status:
- Suppressed
- Display
- Required
- Optional
Account group deIines:
a. length oI gl account number
b. no. ranges oI the gl account numbers
c. Iield status oI the GL account master data in the company code segment.(which
Iields to appear when you create a gl account) (to control...double click on your GL
account group in Screen transaction code OBD4)
Posting key deIines:
a. whether the line item is a debit or credit
b. to which type oI account the amount should be posted to(ex: when you use posting
key 40, you will be able to post to gl accounts. When you use Posting key 01, you
will be only able to post to customer account.
c. document screen layout during posting oI a document. (which Iields to appear in a
document...double click on the posting key and select Iield status and make the entries
as required /optional etc)
Field status group deIines:
Document screen layout during posting oI a document. (which Iields to appear in a
document...double click on the Iield status group and select Iields and make the
entries as required /optional etc)
LOGIC: you assign Iield status variant to the company code, FSV is a bundle oI Iield
status groups.
ex: in FSG G001 you have made the text as required entry...you assigned the Iield
status group g001 to cash account..so when you use cash account and try to post a
document it will deIinitely prompt you to enter the text (text made as required.)
Both FSG and PK control the same Ieilds in a document.There is no dominance
between FSG and Posting keys..but we should know the allowed combinations....
II text is made required in PK and suppressed in FSG..the system will issue a error
msg..Rules Ior PK...and FSG....is set incorrectly Ior SGTXT Iield.
Permissable combinations:
Pk R/S O/S R/o R S O
FSG S/R S/O o/r R S O
Result e SD RD NP NP NP
R required
s suppressed
e error
SD Suppressed dominates
Rd required dominates
np no problem.
Various Postings %o %he GL Account Postings
During various postings, the GL account postings will be taken place as Iollows:

For Domestic Procurement oI Raw Material
During GR
Material Stock Dr.
GR/IR clearing Cr.
During Excise Invoice Credit
Cenvat Account Dr.
Cenvat Clearing Cr.
During Invoice VeriIication
Cenvat Clearing Dr.
GR/IR Clearing Dr.
Vendor Payable Cr.
For Domestic proceurement oI Capital Goods
During GR
Material Stock Dr.
GR/IR clearing Cr.
During Excise Invoice Credit
Cenvat Account Dr. (50)
Cenvat On-hold Dr. (50)
Cenvat Clearing Cr.
During Invoice VeriIication
Cenvat Clearing Dr.
GR/IR Clearing Dr.
Vendor Payable Cr
Subsequent oI Capital Goods
Cenvat Account Dr. (50)
Cenvat On-hold Cr. (50)
For Import Procurement oI Raw Material
During Customs Duty Clearing invoice
Custom Clearing Dr.
Custom Payable Cr.
During GR
Material Stock Dr.
GR/IR clearing Cr.
During Excise Invoice Credit
Cenvat Account Dr.
Custom Clearing Cr.
During Invoice VeriIication
GR/IR Clearing Dr.
Vendor Payable Cr.

For Excise Duty Credit oI Raw Material without PO

Cenvat Account Dr.
Cenvat Clearing Cr.

For Excise Duty Reversal through Excise JV

Cenvat Clearing Dr.
Cenvat Account Cr.
During Excise Invoice Creation
Cenvat Suspense Account Dr.
Cenvat payable Cr.

For TR6C Challan
PLA Account Dr.
PLA on hold Account Cr.

During Fortnightly Utilization
Cenvat payable Dr.
Cenvat Account Cr.
PLA Account Cr.
What is Debit note and Credit note?
Debit Memo - It is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a debit
memo Ior a customer. II the prices calculated Ior the customer were too low, Ior
example, calculated with the wrong scaled prices, you can create a debit memo
request. The debit memo request can be blocked so that it can be checked. When it has
been approved, you can remove the block. It is like a standard order. The system uses
the debit memo request to create a debit memo.
Credit Memo - A transaction that reduces Amounts Receivable Irom a customer is a
credit memo. For eg. The customer could return damaged goods. A debit memo is a
transaction that reduces Amounts Payable to a vendor because, you send damaged
goods back to your vendor.
Credit memo request is a sales document used in complaints processing to request a
credit memo Ior a customer. II the price calculated Ior the customer is too high, Ior
example, because the wrong scale prices were used or a discount was Iorgotten, you
can create a credit memo request. The credit memo request is blocked Ior Iurther
processing so that it can be checked. II the request is approved, you can remove the
block. The system uses the credit memo request to create a credit memo.
As mentioned above, creating a credit or debit memo request enables you to create
credit or debit memos based on a complaint. For this Iirst create a sales document with
the order type Ior a credit or debit memo request. You can create the debit or credit
memo requests in the Iollowing ways:
Without reIerence to an order
With reIerence to an existing order
Here you enter which order the complaint reIers to.
With reIerence to an invoice
Here you enter which invoice the complaint reIers to.
In all cases, you speciIy the value or quantity that should be in the credit or debit
memo
You can block the credit or debit memo request Irom being billed in Customizing. Go
to Sales -~ Sales Documents -~ Sales document header -~ DeIine sales document type
and select the billing block Iield in the billing section. This request can later be
reviewed along with similar ones, - iI necessary, by another department. The request
Ior a credit or debit memo can then be approved or reiected.
%o create Credit / Debit Memo request:
- Use the same procedure that you use Ior Creating Sales Orders i.d T Code VA01
- Give Order Type as CR Ior Credit Memo and DR Ior Debit Memo reuest

While creating the request you have to enter Customer Number, Reason Ior the
request. and Material and its quantity. Once the credit or debit memo request is
released you can create credit or debit memo. The credit memo request will be
automatically blocked Ior checking with Billing Block 08 (to check credit memo) &
09 (to check debit memo) Ior the sales order type 'CR .
II it is not so you can customize the block Ior credit memo requests in Customizing
Ior SD when you deIine the order type Sales and Distribution -~ Sales -~ Sales
Documents -~ Sales Document Header -~ DeIine sales document types. The release
oI block is allowed to be removed only by the people who are authorized Ior it. II the
amount is within acceptable limit the block is automatically released otherwise all the
people assigned to this iob receive a work item in their integrated inbox Ior release.
II the complaint is not automatically blocked by the settings in Customizing, you can
set a delivery or billing block manually.
- Logistics -~ Sales and distribution -~ Sales.
- Choose Order -~ Change.
- Enter the number oI the sales document, or use a matchcode to search Ior it.
- Choose Enter.
- II all the items have been blocked, choose Select all.
- II only some items should be blocked, select the corresponding items.
- Choose Edit -~ Fast change oI... -~ Delivery block or Billing block.
- Enter the delivery or billing block Ior the header or individual items.
- Choose Copy.
- The system copies (or deletes) the delivery or billing block in all the selected items.
- Save your document
Sample Account Assignment in G/L Account
Where do we specify the sample account in FS00. created a sample account for
all expense accounts to use a particular field status group. ow want to specify
that sample account while creating g/l accounts. how do do that?
We deIine Sample account at OB15 and the path is SAP ReI:
IMG\Financial
Accounting\GLAccounting\GLAccounts\MasterRecords\Preparations\Additional
Activities\Sample Accounts
Step1: Maintain List of Rules types
In this step you iust create a code Ior your Sample Account
Create a New Entry
XXXX Sample account Ior Pleasecontact1 then save
Step : Define Data %ranfer Rules FSK
In this step you deIine the data tranIer rule i.e., whether it can be editable or only
display etc aIter a Master recored is created with Sample Account.
Selects the Iields that you want to transIer (check boxes)and can be changed and can't
be changed etc., then save.
Step 3: Assign Company Code to Rule %ype
In this step you will assign your sample account to your company code.
Just select your company and select your Sample account and assing then save.
Step 4: Create Sample Account. FSM1
Now create Sample Account same as you create at FS00, then Save.
Now Sample account is created. Now you can Iind Sample account Iield in FS00 (iI
you assign it company code it won't be displayed) enter Sample account no, and press
enter all the Iiels that you have selected in Step 2 will be copied (transIerred) accrding
the the rule (checkboxes) you have selected there.
At %code FS00
At FS00 you can see/Edit/Create a GL Master Record which is maintained by the
Company Code. Where as Sample Account is not GL Master Record but it is a set oI
settings/rules which are easily available to create a GL Master Record (understand this
point clearly) This sample account does not hold your transaction data nor you can
edit or view at FS00.
To use your Sample Account:
1. Go to FS00, give a GL account no (other than Sample account no oIcourse). Select
create
2. Then check all Iields, whether any Iield is Iilled like Currency, Open Item
Management, etc *Ior your conIirmation* (obviously every Iield is empty)
3. Now enter Sample Account no in Sample Account Iield and give Account Group.
press Enter. U will get a message that "Data Irom changed Sample account was
accepted", check data.
4. Now chek all Iields again. Now u will Iind some Iields Iilled with values which you
have deIined in Data TransIer Rules while creating Sample Account.
Configuration Steps For Preparation of GL A/C
Explain the steps for the creation of GL Account.
By : Naidu
Check all the conIiguration steps Ior preparation oI GL a/c:
1. DeIine company T.code ox15 (its is necessary Ior consolidation purpose)
2. DeIine Company code t.code ox02
3. Assign company code to company t.code ox16
4. Edit chart oI account t.code ob13
5. Assign company code to chart oI account t.code ob62
6. Maintain Iiscal year variant t.code ob29
7. Assign company code to Iiscal year variant t.code ob37
8. DeIine posting period variant t.code obbo
9. Open and close posting period t.code ob52
10. Assign posting period variant to company code t.code obbp
11. DeIine document type and number range t.code oba7
12. DeIine Iield status variant t.code obc4
13. Assign company code to Iield status variant
Go to SPRO --~ Financial accouting -~ Global settings --~ Select your company
code and double click. You can see the Iield status variant Iield there.

%he Procedure For F Bad Debt Configuration
How do you configure bad debts in F module?
By: Prakash Sharma
%he procedure for Bad debt configuration:-
DeIine Methods: SPRO / Financial Accounting / Accounts Receivables & Payables /
Business transactions / Closing / Valuate / Reserve Ior bad debts
- OB04
- Double click deIine methods
- Select New entries button
Prov Period Months Percent1 M Percent2 M Percent3 M
Percent4
SAI 1 10 2 20 3 30 4 100
Save
Creation oI Bad Debts Account: FS00
Co.code: XXXX
- Select with template button G/L A/c:XXXXXX Co.Code : XXXX
Account group: Administration
- Select P & L Radio button
Short text: Bad debts Long text: Bad debts
- Select control tab button Current currency: INR
- Select only local currency check box
- Select line item check box, Sort key:001 Field status variant:
G001
- Save
DeIine Accounts Ior Reserve & Bad Debts:
- OBXD
SPRO / Financial Accounting / Accounts Receivables & Payables / Business
transactions / Closing / Valuate / DeIine Accounts Ior Reserve & Bad debts
Chart oI Accounts: XXXX
PROVISION METHOD DEBIT CREDIT
XXX XXXXXX XXX XXX
Select rules tab button Accounts are determined based on
- Select Debit/Credit check box 40/50
- Select provision method check box
- Save
Special G/L Account:
- FBKP
Double click Special G/L
Account Type Special G/L Special G/L Indicator Description
D E Reserve Reserve Ior Bad debts
Double click Reserve
- Chart oI Accounts: SAI (Enter)
Account Assignment
Reconciliation A/c:XXXXXX (SD) Spl.G/L-XXXXXX Save
Receivable TransIer posting (Gross):
- F103
Accounting / Financial Accounting / Accounts Receivable / Periodic processing /
Closing / Value / Receivable transIer posting (Gross)

Customer A/c:XXXXXX Provision method: XXXX
Special G/L Indicator Ior Debit Rec: E (Reserve Ior bad debts)
- Select create batch input session check box
- Batch input session name: SAPF103
- Posting Key:09 Posting document: DA
- F8
From the menu Select -~ System -~ Batch Input -~ Session
- Select batch input session: SAPF103 Select process
- Select display errors only V
- Select process button
- Exit Batch input
Reserve Ior bad debts (Gross):
Customer A/c:XXXXXX Co.Code: XXXX G/L Account: XXXXXX Co.code:
XXXX
Accounts group: reserves and surplus
- Select balance sheet option button
Short text: Provision Ior Bad Debts Long text: Provision Ior bad debts
A/c Currency: INR Rec.Accounts Ior account type: Customer
- Select line item display check box
Sort key: 031 Field status group: G067
- Save
What s ew General Ledger Accounting
ERP n SAP > SAP FCO
%ell me about new G/L?
Explain to me what is new G/L?
General Ledger Accounting (FI-GL) (New)
The central task oI G/L accounting is to provide a comprehensive picture oI external
accounting and accounts. Recording all business transactions (primary postings as
well as settlements Irom internal accounting) in a soItware system that is Iully
integrated with all the other operational areas oI a company ensures that the
accounting data is always complete and accurate.
Beyond IulIilling the legal requirements, General Ledger Accounting also IulIills
other requirements Ior modern accounting:
- Parallel Accounting
General Ledger Accounting allows you to perIorm parallel accounting by managing
several parallel ledgers Ior diIIerent accounting principles.
- Integration oI Legal and Management Reporting
In General Ledger Accounting, you can perIorm internal management reporting in
parallel with legal reporting. For this purpose, the ProIit Center Accounting Iunctions
are integrated with General Ledger Accounting. Furthermore, you can generate
Iinancial statements Ior any dimension (such as proIit center).
- Segment Reporting
General Ledger Accounting supports the segment reports required by the accounting
principles IFRS (International Financial Reporting Standards) and US GAAP
(Generally Accepted Accounting Principles). For this purpose, General Ledger
Accounting contains the Segment dimension.
- Cost oI Sales Accounting
You can perIorm cost oI sales accounting in General Ledger Accounting. For this
purpose, General Ledger Accounting contains the Functional Area dimension.
Features
General Ledger Accounting comprises the Iollowing Iunctions Ior entering and
evaluating posting data:
- Choice between group level or company level
- Automatic and simultaneous posting oI all subledger items in the appropriate general
ledger accounts (reconciliation accounts)
- Simultaneous updating oI the parallel general ledgers and oI the cost accounting
areas
- Real-time evaluation oI and reporting on current posting data, in the Iorm oI account
displays, Iinancial statements with diIIerent balance sheet versions, and additional
analyses.
In this way, General Ledger Accounting automatically serves as a complete record oI
all business transactions. It is the central and up-to-date component Ior reporting.
Individual transactions can be checked at any time in real time by displaying the
original documents, line items, and monthly debits and credits at various levels such
as:
- Account inIormation
- Journals
- Totals/transaction Iigures
- Balance sheet/proIit and loss evaluations
However, SAP still oIIers to choose between the New GL and the old Classic GL way
oI accounting.
There are certain limitations in the new GL and clients are adopting to the new gl
concept.

Document Splitting Feature Available in ew General Ledger
What are the splitting feature available in ew General Ledger which is
available from the version ECC5.00 onwards?
By: Manieera
nformation on Document Splitting
You can use the document splitting procedure to split up line items Ior selected
dimensions (such as receivable lines by proIit center) or to eIIect a zero balance
setting in the document Ior selected dimensions (such as segment). This generates
additional clearing lines in the document. Using the document splitting procedure
ensures that you can draw up complete Iinancial statements Ior the selected
dimensions at any time.
You can choose between displaying the document with the generated clearing lines
either in its original Iorm in the entry view or Irom the perspective oI a ledger in the
general ledger view. For document splitting to be possible, the individual document
items and the documents must be classiIied. Each classiIication corresponds to a rule
in which it is speciIied how document splitting is to occur and Ior which line items.
SAP delivers a set oI standard rules that should usually prove suIIicient. II not, you
can deIine your own set oI rules and adapt these according to your needs.
Example 1: nvoice
Suppose a vendor invoice containing the Iollowing items is entered:
Posting Key Account Segment Amount
31 Payables -100
40 Expense 0001 40
40 Expense 0002 60
Document splitting then creates the Iollowing document in the General Ledger view:
Posting Key Account Segment Amount
31 Payables 0001 -40
31 Payables 0002 -60
40 Expense 0001 40
40 Expense 0002 60
Example 2: Payment
The payment Ior the above vendor invoice then contains the Iollowing items when
entered:
Posting Key Account Segment Amount
50 Bank -95
25 Payables 100
50 Cash Discount Received -5
Document splitting then creates the Iollowing document in the General Ledger view:
Posting Key Account Segment Amount
50 Bank 0001 -38
50 Bank 0002 -57
25 Payables 0001 40
25 Payables 0002 60
50 Cash Discount Received 0001 -2
50 Cash Discount Received 0002 -3
Unplanned and Plan Delivery Costs n Stock and G/L Account
1) f maintain freight in condition FRA1 or FRA or in info record. then
subsequently if choose planned delivery cost in miro. it will show. correct?
Ans: Yes.
Planned delivery cost --- Maintain FRA1 and FRA2 in PO Details with same or
diIIerent vendor.
Select Goods receipt/service planned delivery
) Planned delivery cost in miro only show freight? What about other cost?
Ans: II you want to see other costs, then choose Goods itemsplanned delivery costs
3) What is unplanned delivery cost and where to define?
Ans: In MIRO, aIter entering PO as a reIerence, choose delivery tab in header and
enter any unplanned delivery costs amount in the Iield Unplanned dely costs. You can
customize to post the unplanned dely costs to separate G/L Account or stock account.
Enter MIRO --Header details ----Enter unplanned delivery cost.
---
Planned delivery costs, iI you want to capture Ior diIIerent vendor in PO than go to -
Conditions in item level, select the delivery condition to be captured and go to
condition detail wherein you can mention diIIerent vendor to capture delivery cost,,
In MIRO Transaction Select Delivery tab.
II you are posting the Delivery costs & Other costs as Unplanned delivery cost.
Unplanned delivery costs are posted in a separate line. You must enter a speciIic tax
code Ior the posting.
Maintain in MIRO ---Transaction Enter unplanned delivery cost.
While doing MIRO, in the header ( details tab ) there is a Iield Ior Unplanned delivery
cost ( Unpl. Del. Csts ). Here you can enter extra delivery charges that are not in the
conditions on the Purchase Order.
---
Unplanned delivery costs are delivery costs that were not speciIied in the purchase
order and are only entered when you enter the invoice. They are posted in exactly the
same manner as subsequent debits/credits.
For a material subiect to moving average price control, unplanned delivery costs are
posted to the stock account, provided that there is suIIicient stock coverage. For a
material subiect to standard price control, unplanned delivery costs are posted to a
price diIIerence account.
Unplanned delivery costs were not agreed on in the purchase order and are not entered
until the invoice is received.
You can enter the unplanned delivery costs in the invoice document alongside the
costs incurred. You can post unplanned delivery costs as Iollows:
Distribute them prorated to calculated invoice items
Post them to separate G/L accounts
You can use the Business Add-In MRMUDCDISTRIBUTE to deIine your own
rules Ior distributing unplanned delivery costs. For more inIormation, see the
documentation Ior the Business Add-In
You want to distribute unplanned delivery costs prorated when you post the
document. - (Incoming Invoice-- Posting Unplanned Delivery Costs).
You want to post unplanned delivery costs to a separate G/L account. - Incoming
Invoice Maintain DeIault Values Ior Tax Codes.
Planned costs are costs which are entered directly in the PO.
Planned delivery costs are agreed upon with the vendor, a carrier, or a customs oIIice
beIore the purchase order is created. You enter them in the purchase order.
Planned delivery costs can be diIIerentiated as Iollows:
O Origin oI Costs
O Freight charges
O Customs charges
O Calculation oI Costs
O Fixed amount, irrespective oI delivered quantity
O Quantity-dependent amount
O Percentage oI value oI the goods
Difference Between Open tem And Open tem Management
O What is the difference between open item and open item management?
O Open item: open item is an item which has to be cleared with another line item.
O Open item management: how you want to manage all the open item in particular
GL A/C.
O Open item management is the setting which allows the setting to maintain the open
items Ior the particular GL account.
O Use oI open item : Processing open items involves choosing and then activating
the open items. Processing is the last step beIore posting a clearing document.
When posting clearing documents, the system takes tolerances into account.
Tolerances are acceptable payment diIIerences.
O When the line item(s) you enter and the open item(s) you process have been
cleared, you can post a clearing document.
O For example, iI you enter a vendor payment Ior $1000, you must choose and
process vendor open items that equal $1000. II your system permits a 1
tolerance, then you can clear open items with a value Irom $990 to $1010.
O When you process open items, you can:
O - Activate or deactivate open items
- Activate or deactivate cash discount
- Maintain cash discount amounts
- Enter partial payments or residual items
O Activate the open items to be cleared.
O To process open items, on the screen Ior selecting open items, choose Goto --~
Open items.
O You can process open items using the Iollowing:
O - Menus or Iunction keys
- Commands
- Mouse
O To clear open items with commands or with the mouse, you select and process an
item in one step.
O Use of open item management
O DeIining "Open Item Management"
O II you set the "Open item management" indicator in the master record Ior an
account, the line items in this account is marked as open or cleared.
O The balance oI an account with open item management is equal to the balance oI
the open items. General ledger accounts are kept with open item management iI
you need to check whether there is an oIIsetting posting Ior a given business
transaction.
O You should use open item management Ior bank clearing accounts, clearing
accounts Ior goods receipt/invoice receipt, and salary clearing accounts. Bank
accounts, however, do not use open item management.
O II you subsequently deIine open item management Ior a G/L account, this entry
only applies to the items which are posted aIterwards. At the date oI the change,
the account must display a zero balance.
O Also, when canceling this indicator, the balance must be zero. You thereIore have
to clear the remaining open items beIore making the change in the master record.
O Open item
O Take an example oI misc. purchases.
O When you purchase Irom vendor you pass the Iollowing entry.
O Dr. Material / Expenses A/c.
Cr. Vendor account (iI it is credit purchase)
O Now the vendor account is showing credit balance till you make payment to the
vendor. This in SAP they call is open item.
O While making payment
O Dr. Vendor account
Cr. Cash / Bank account
O II once you make the payment to vendor, while making the payment to the vendor,
you need to link the payment with lying open item oI above purchase. System
automatically changes the status oI above open item (red colour ball) to cleared
item (green colour ball) in the vendor account.
G/L Open tem Management
O have situation where the GR/R account was created without open item
managed. ow they want to make it open item but account has line items /
values. t been in use for almost a year. ow that they are reconciling it
end of fiscal year and they find a mess with account and wants to get this
open item management fixed in GR/R account for the future.

Have tried a few option. but the system pops error message telling either "
Clear or transfer all open items". %here are 10.000 line items in a/c. How
can we transfer this line item to new account. s there any other option to
make it open item.
O Answer:
O For old line items, you can't enter. BeIore changing the account master Ior open
line item management the account balance should be 0 (ZERO). You can try
doing the Iollowing:
O 1. Pass one JV transIerring the balance to some suspense account.
2. By doing above the balance will become 0 (zero). So change the account
master & tick on Open line item management.
3. Again pass the reversal entry oI the Iirst one.

For doing the above, you may have to Iirst remove the tick oI automatic line
item.

O Please follow this steps to setup G/L Open tem Management:
O Any GL account has a balance standard SAP will not allow to change status to
open item managed, iI the GL account is not an open item managed earlier. "Z"
Program (ZRFSEPA02) will make it an open item managed.
O We have created an OSS Message and SAP told us to copy RFSEPA02 to Z
program (ZRFSEPA02) and Follow the steps to enable Open Item Management
Ior GL accounts.
O Step # 1
Create a Dummy or Temporary clearing account to move balance Irom clearing
accounts.
Use T.code FS01

Step #
Move balance Irom clearing account (Ex: 113073) to Dummy account.
Post a iournal entry using T.code F-02 or FB50.
O Step # 3
Lock Clearing account Ior any postings.
Use T.code FS01 and Lock the account.
O Step # 4
Run Z program
To go T.code SA38 and enter program: ZRFSEPA02 and Execute.
Enter Company Code: 1000
GL account: 113073 and Execute (F8).
O Step # 5
Go to T.code FS01 and validate GL account Open Item Management check box
and unlock account Ior postings.
O Step # 6
Move balance Irom Dummy account to clearing account (Ex: 113073).
Post a iournal entry using T.code F-02 or FB50.
O Step # 7
Validate Clearing account (Ex: 113073) and Dummy account balances.
Use T.code FBL3N
O Step #
Clear dummy account balance using T.code F-03
O Please execute each step careIully and Iollow aIorementioned steps to convert
non open item management GL accounts to open item Management GL
accounts.
Details of General Ledger Account & ts Groups
O Provide the information & examples of how to create general ledger
account & its groups?
O By: Dasharathi Beiugama
O The central task oI G/L accounting is to provide a comprehensive picture Ior
external accounting and accounts. Recording all business transactions (primary
postings as well as settlements Irom internal accounting) in a soItware system
that is Iully integrated with all the other operational areas oI a company ensures
that the accounting data is always complete and accurate.
O Before creating the B/L u have to design the Chart of Accounts (COA):
O COA is a list oI all G/L accounts used by one or several company codes.
O For each G/L account, the chart oI accounts contains the account number,
account name, and the inIormation that controls how an account Iunctions and
how a G/L account is created in a company code.
O You have to assign a chart oI accounts to each company code. This chart oI
accounts is the operating chart oI accounts and is used Ior the daily postings in
this company code.
O You have the Iollowing options when using multiple company codes:
O You can use the same chart oI accounts Ior all company codes II the company
codes all have the same requirements Ior the chart oI accounts set up, assign all
oI the individual company codes to the same chart oI accounts. This could be
the case iI all company codes are in the same country.
O In addition to the operating chart oI accounts, you can use two additional charts
oI accounts II the individual company codes need diIIerent charts oI accounts,
you can assign up to two charts oI accounts in addition to the operating chart oI
accounts. This could be the case iI company codes lie in multiple countries.
O The use oI diIIerent charts oI accounts has no eIIect on the balance sheet and
proIit and loss statement. When creating the balance sheet or the proIit and loss
statement, you can choose whether to balance the company codes which use
diIIerent charts oI accounts together or separately.
O Charts of accounts can have three different functions in the system:
O Operating chart of accounts:
O The operating chart oI accounts contains the G/L accounts that you use Ior
posting in your company code during daily activities. Financial Accounting and
Controlling both use this chart oI accounts.
O You have to assign an operating chart oI accounts to a company code.
O Group chart of accounts:
O The group chart oI accounts contains the G/L accounts that are used by the
entire corporate group. This allows the company to provide reports Ior the
entire corporate group.
O The assigning oI an corporate group chart oI accounts to a company code is
optional.
O Country-specific chart of accounts:
O The country-speciIic chart oI accounts contains the G/L accounts needed to
meet the country's legal requirements. This allows you to provide statements
Ior the country's legal requirements.
O The assigning oI an country-speciIic chart oI accounts to a company code is
optional.
O You can Iind the Iunction Ior creating G/L account master records in Financial
Accounting Customizing under General Ledger Accounting -~ G/L Accounts -
~ Master Data -~ Creating G/L Accounts.
O Create your G/L accounts.
O You have two options:
O II you want to use a chart oI accounts included in the standard system as a
reIerence, or iI a chart oI accounts is already in your system, use the create with
reIerence method. To do this, use the Create G/L Accounts with ReIerence
activity.
O You can copy the G/L accounts and the related account assignments. BeIore
creating the G/L accounts, you can change the account numbers and names.
O II you have G/L accounts in a non-SAP system, you can transIer these G/L
accounts to your SAP System. To do so, select the Data TransIer Workbench.
O You can modiIy the G/L account master records that were created or
transIerred.
O The Iollowing Iunctions are available Ior doing this:
You can carry out systematic changes to multiple G/L accounts, such as
changing the P&L account type oI several P&L accounts. To do so, select the
desired Iunction under Change G/L Accounts Collectively.
O You can change the master record oI a single G/L account. To do so, select the
desired Iunction under Edit G/L Account.
Various Steps %o Configure Dunning
O What is dunning program?
O Dunning is nothing but payment or collection remainder.

The SAP Financial Accounting component is delivered with the dunning
procedure and all Iurther speciIications Ior dunning. Check whether you can
use the predeIined settings or whether you have to make changes. Assign the
required dunning procedures and areas (iI used) required to your business
partners.

The most important thing that diIIerentiates the dunning levels is the dunning
texts. The dunning text deIines the urgency oI the dunning notice. The other
things can be the dunning charges, minimum & maximum amounts etc.

Maximum no. oI dunning levels is 9 levels.
O How to Configure Dunning?
O The dunning wizard enables you to create and send letters to customers that
have not paid their debts within a given time range and to remind them oI their
overdue payments.
O In addition, the dunning wizard keeps track oI a customer`s "payment
behavior" in the database to deliver this important inIormation to appropriate
organizations.
O The dunning wizard considers the Iollowing transactions and documents:
O 1. Open A/R invoices (including partially paid and partially credited)
O 2. A/R credit memos
O 3. Manual iournal entries with at least one row posted to a customer
O 4. Opening and closing balance transactions
O 5. Incoming payments
O To access the wizard, choose Sales A/R Dunning Wizard .
O To run the Dunning Wizard, you have deIined the dunning levels and the
dunning terms as Iollows:
O 1. You have deIined the dunning levels by choosing Administration ~ Setup
Business Partners ~ Dunning Levels.
O 2. You have deIined dunning terms in Administration ~ Setup~ Business
Partners ~ Dunning Terms. The dunning terms are based on dunning levels,
and contain parameters and values required Ior the dunning process run.
O 3. You have deIined the deIault dunning terms in Administration ~ General
Settings ~ BP tab ~ DeIault Cust. Dunning Terms .
O You have deIined dunning terms Ior customers. (Choose Business Partners
Business Partner Master Data Payment Terms tab Dunning Term Iield.)
O You have used the Iollowing options to exclude any relevant A/R invoices Irom
the dunning process:
O - To exclude a speciIic invoice, display it beIore you run the wizard. On the
Logistic stab, select Block Dunning Letters. You can deselect the option later to
include the invoice in the Iuture dunning process.
O - To exclude all invoices created Ior a speciIic customer Irom the dunning
process, display the Business Partner Master Data record Ior that customer. On
the Accounting tab, select Block Dunning Letters.
O Process:
O You choose Sales A/R ~ Dunning Wizard
O and Iollow the steps listed below. In each step you choose Next to proceed to
the next step oI the Dunning Wizard, choose Back to return to the previous
step, or choose Cancel to cancel the Dunning Wizard creation
O Step 1: Wizard Options. You select whether to run a new Dunning Wizard or to
load a saved one.
O Step 2: General Parameters. In this window, you modiIy a name oI the deIault
Dunning Wizard and choose a dunning level.
O Step 3: Business Partners Selection Criteria. You choose a range oI customer
codes Ior the Dunning Wizard.
O Step 4: Document Parameters. In this window, you enter the range oI the
posting dates to include in the Dunning Wizard. In addition, select the relevant
document types.
O Step 5: Recommendation Report. In this window, you enter a new due date and
select invoices that are included in the Dunning Wizard Ior each customer.
O Step 6: Processing. In this window, you select one oI the Iollowing options to
process the Dunning Wizard:
O - Save Selection Parameters and Exit
O - Save Recommendation Report as DraIt and Exit
O - Print Dunning Letter and Exit
O Result:
O II you print dunning letters, SAP Business One creates the dunning letters and
saves the dunning run. In addition, the dunning level and the last date oI the
dunning letter are updated Ior invoices included in the dunning run. When a
dunning letter is created Ior a customer, the business partner master data record
is updated. On the Accounting tab, the Dunning Date Iield displays the date on
which the dunning letters were created Ior the last time.
O To view the history oI dunning letters and the list oI all invoices, choose
Business Partners ~ Business Partners Reports ~ Dunning History Report

Differences Between Accounting and Dunning Clerk
O Question:

What is the difference between dunning clerk and accounting clerk?

Answer:

This is usually reIerred to depict the responsibility.

Accounting clerk you will Iind in G/L account master in FS00 who is assigned
responsibility to maintain and clear this account, he/she has track every
movement in the account.

Dunning clerk is the clerk who is responsible to dun the particular customer
and send notices.

Dunning Clerk is responsible Ior running the process oI Dunning.

The name oI Dunning Clerk is printed on Dunning Notice whereas the
Accounting Clerk is responsible Ior running the Automatic payment run
program and his name can be printed in Ioot notes oI Payment cheques etc.


When Can %hey Be %he Same

There can be scenario when both dunning and accounting clerk are same.

In some organization, the Accounting Clerk and Dunning Clerk may be same
but in system, there must be two separate persons but you can assign same IDs
and name.


Configuration

You can conIigure the Dunning clerk in the same place where you had
conIigured the Accounting Clerk.

Both the Iield names are BUSAB, but Accounting Clerk is maintained in table
KNB1 and the Dunning Clerk Irom KNB5.

Master table Ior the both is T001S.
O Configure the Data Medium Exchange for making payments
O How can configure the Data Medium Exchange for making payments?
How can link it to (F110) payment program & get the file M%100 to be
sent to the bank?
O When conIiguring the payment methods Ior the country (transaction OBVCU),
choose the payment medium program as RFFOM100.
O From se3, pls read the documentation Ior the program, which will give you
the various options & the required conIig too.
O You would also need to conIigure the instructions keys as required.
O To generate the DME Iile, you have to run the automatic payment program
with this payment method.
O AIter the payments have been successIully posted, you can go to DME
administration and with the help oI dme manager download Iiles on your PC.
O SAP has determined that the standard print programs Ior automatic payments
will no longer be supported, and will be replaced by transIer structures created
by a tool called the DME Engine.
O This tool enables the business to create DME output Iiles without ABAP
development, and can be attached to a print program and Iorm Ior the creation
oI Payment Advices.
O Outside oI the DME Engine (DMEE), the maiority oI the conIiguration takes
place within the Iollowing IMG menu path:
IMG Path: Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts
Payable -~ Business Transactions -~ Outgoing Payments -~ Automatic
Outgoing Payments -~ Payment Media -~ Make Settings Ior Payment Media
Formats Irom Payment Medium Workbench
O Config
Assign Selection Variants
IMG -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -
~ Business Transactions -~ Outgoing Payments -~ Automatic Outgoing
Payments -~ Payment Media -~ Make Settings Ior Payment Medium Formats
Irom Payment Medium Workbench -~ Create / Assign Selection Variants or
transaction
O OBPM4..select your Iormat that you are using
O Check in FBZP conIig that all is linked!
O Although this is bitty but you need to work through it!
O Start with FBZP, create all there than go to DMEE either to create your own
Iormat or use the standard ones.. than go to the menu path above and work
through Irom create to assign...
Set the baseline datenvoice date
O Through payment terms, you can set the baseline dateInvoice date.
O The payment term is entered in the Vendor Master Record and it will be
deIaulted in MRO.
O II payment term in Purchase Order is diIIerent Irom the Vendor Master Data, it
will have preIerence over the Vendor Master Data.
O FB50. FB60. o document number was display
O On the Iirst day oI business aIter the basis people apply an upgrade to a kernel,
over the weekend, we lost visibility to the document numbers in the status bar
aIter we posted transactions FB50 and FB60.
O An OSS message was created and the reply was that it was an issue with a
kernel patch level.
O They reIer us to OSS note 510815, and kernel patch level 1121.
O MRO o F document after upgrading to 4.6x
O When we upgrad to 4.6x, users was not willing to access the FI document
through Invoice display :-
O MR4 -~ Follow on documents
O I agreed with them because it is really troublesome to go through such a long
steps in order to Iind out the FI document number.
O In 4.6x, SAP only display the Invoice document number aIter posting.
O In order to display both the Invoice and FI document number at the same time,
you have to apply OSS notes 16935 and 31031.
O You need to changed the programs in order to get the message
"nvoice Document no. & and F Document no. & created."
O The Iollowing messages which were modiIied as per the OSS note to get the FI
document number.
O Message no
ewtext Old text
060 Document no. & created
Invoice Document no. & and FI Document no. & created
O 075 Document no. & created (blocked Ior payment)
Invoice Document no. & and FI Document no.& created (blocked Ior
payment)
O 282 Document reversed with no. &: Please
manually clear FI documents (No change done in
the message text). But it will display FI
document number aIter changes.
O 392 Invoice document & has been posted (Now this
displays Invoice document number.
AIter changes,it will display FI document
number).
O AIter these changes you will be able to see the FI document number and
Invoice document number displayed in the message bar aIter executing
the MRO Transaction.
O You will need authorizations and access key to do the modiIication.
Different Between Posting. Clear and Payment
O Posting occurs with many diIIerent types oI documents. It indicates that all
sides oI the FI entry are in balance. Posting actually writes the document to the
G/L.
O Payment on the other hand is the actual issuing oI a check. Payments can also
be processed in accounts receivable.
O In that case, you are posting (updating your books to reIlect) the receipt oI a
check Irom a customer and the deposit oI said check in the bank.
O Accounts payable is processing the money your company owes to a vendor Ior
goods and services received. Account Payable is a liability on the balance
sheet.
O Accounts receivable is collecting the money that other companies/customers
owe you. It is an asset on the balance sheet.
O SAP is integrated. In most instances, there isn't a "link." The transaction
directly updates the tables involved. There is a semi-severance between
FI/Payment to allow checks to be issued even iI there's a minor imbalance in
the FI side oI the posting.
O Asset depreciation and physical inventory are some example that don't update
FI (CO/FM) as soon as the document is saved.
O Modules that appear in more than one place is caused by SAP trying to be
Ilexible in where it places things on its menu, so that diIIerent users/companies
Iind it easy to locate a given transaction within the conIines oI the module they
work in. This has become more pronounced since the change to role based
authorization management. That's why you can reach Create a
requisition Irom 4 diIIerent pathways, why Proiect Systems is in both Logistics
and FI, and why Travel Management is in both HR and FI.
O In some organizations, travel authorization and tracking is an HR Iunction, in
some it is an FI Iunction.
O Difference between Clear and Payments
O Apart from processing open items. what is the difference between:
1. Accounting-->FA-->AR-->Document entry-->ncoming payment > F-
and
. Accounting-->FA-->AR-->Account-->Clear F-3 and the difference
between F-53 and F-44 in AP.
O When you post a transaction, you will get a Accounting document. II you are
creating a payment document through F-53 or F-58 without linking the
Accounting document, than we have to create a link between the accounting
document and payment document and that can be done through F-32 (Ior GL)
and F-44 (Ior AP). An good example is when we make down payment, a
payment document is created. II we post the invoice, an accounting document
is created. To clear this payment document and accounting document, F-44 is
used.
O - F-28 will be used to make trasactions Ior income payments.
Eg: II you receive Irom a customer by using above T code will be passed
necessary entries.
- F-32 will used used Ior clear the Customer line items.
- F-53 will be used Ior making payments to vendors.
- F-44 will be used Ior clearing the Vendor Line items.
O Vendors not used within a specified period
O ----Original Message----
Subiect: vendors not used within a speciIied period
O Hi,
O Wondering iI any one can help me?
A while back I Iound a report which listed vendors not used within a
speciIied period i.e. list all vendors with no movement over the past 6
months. I can't seem to locate this report/programme?
O Regards
O -----Reply Message----
Subiect: RE: vendors not used within a speciIied period
O Try report SALR87010043 - Vendor Business. Within the report, under the
Output Control section, select the indicator "Accounts With No Purchases"
and run the report Ior the time period which you wish to evaluate. Hope
this helps
O -----End oI Message-----
O Delink Cheque Payment from Payment Document
O want to delink cheque number 000100 from payment doc 450001.
want to reverse the payment doc 450001 and pass a new payment doc
45000 and attach (Link) the cheque number 000100 to this new payment
doc 45000.
O Note the Iollwoing Iunctionality :
O Cheque Voiding ( same as cheque cancellation as we call it )
O FCH3 - For unused Cheques i.e. cheques that are not yet assigned to Payment
docs.
O FCH9 - For issued cheques i.e. cheques assigned to payment docs.
O The above will only void the cheque and the payment doc will stand as it is.
AIter voiding the cheque the related payment doc can be reassigned to a new
cheque.
O II you reverse a Payment document itselI ( T.Code FB08 ) then the system will
ask Ior a void reason iI a cheque is already assigned. The voiding oI cheque
will be done automatically iI you reverse the payment doc and enter a void
reason code. You cannot reverse a payment doc that has been assigned a
cheuqes unless you enter a void reason code.
O There is a nother transaction available Ior Payment Cancellation - FCH8
O The cheque that has been voided is blocked Ior Iurther use. II you still want to
use it you need to Iirst delete the cheque inIormation. T.Code FCHE.
O Also cheque related t.codes in this aspect. related T.Codes start with FCH* and
can be Iound in the Area Menu Cheque InIormation.
Setting Up Manual & Automatic Payment Program
O am doing a project in my institute. we are facing a problem in running a
automatic payment program. Suppose have a balance of Rs 100000 in
my bank account and today am running a Automatic payment run.
%otal payment of the run are Rs 150000. So when run Automatic
payment run it is not giving any error message. What to do with this
problem.
O n my point of view we have to create validation. And link between bank
account and payment method. f the balance is less than the automatic
payment amount the run should be stopped .
O The Automatic Payment Program does not check the Balance oI your Bank
Account.(GL A/c. Bal.)
O What it does check is the min & max amounts that you have maintained in your
customisation.
O In FBZP Transaction (type in easy access screen), you have to maintain the
conIig Ior your automatic payment runs.
O In Bank determination (in FBZP), you have to Iill in the available amounts Ior
each Bank. This is the maximum amount up to which payments will be
generated by the Auto. Pay. Run.
O So iI you want to ensure that on any single day the payment run does not pay
more than bank balance, you have to update on a daily basis available balance
to match with your bank balance .
O In SPRO you can Iind the customisation Ior A P Run, but FBZP is the old
transaction Ior the same thing. Plus it lets you do all the related customisation,
in one place.
O As Iar as I know, there is no direct way oI linking your GL account balance to
the A P Run. *-- Uma

O am creating a new company code 'A'. in which the paying company code
will be 'B' and the sending company code will be 'A'. ow have to
configure for both manual and automated payments.
O Couple of questions on that:
O 1. For cross-company payments what do have to do different in the
configuration settings.
O . n manual outgoing payments. My user has a list of reason codes ( for
overpayment/underpayment) defined for an old company code. it's not
allowing me to copy that into my new company code. How can do that.
O In Customizing Maintain Payment Program : Transaction code FBZP
1) deIine your company code'A" & "B" both in section tab (All Company
code)

2) DeIine Paying company Code Ior example "A" paying company

3) Payment Method in country in tab
Country IN (India) - Name oI Country - Payment Method "C" is Ior Cheque
"D" Ior Demand DraIt etc

4) Payment Method in Company code - Ior example "A" is paying company
deIine payment method in same section

5) In Bank Determination Section - deIine Ranking Order, Bank Accounts,
Available Amount, Value Date, Expences/ Charges

6) DeIine House Bank : HB Name , Account ID Bank Account Text,

While runing APP (F110) user should select paying Co Code "A" in maintain
variant, `-- Rajat
Steps of Automatic Payment Program
What are the various steps of Automatic Paymen Program & how to
configure it in the SAP system?
O AU%OMA%C PAYME% PROGRAM

1. Creation oI House Bank:
SPRO-ReIerence IMG-Financial Accounting-Bank Accounting Bank
Accounts DeIine House Banks FI12
O 2. Creation oI Cheques issue account in assets side with sort key 001 and FSV
is G005 and assign house bank and bank account no.
O 3. Creation oI Cheque lots:
SPRO-ReIerence IMG- Financial Accounting AR/AP Business
Transactions Outgoing payments automatic outgoing payments payment
media cheque management DeIine no ranges Ior cheque management
FCHI
O 4. Giving mini and max amounts to payment:
SPRO-ReIerence IMG-Financial Accounting AP/AR-Business Transactions
Outgoing payments automatic outgoing payments program payment
methods/bank selection Ior payments program set up all company codes Ior
payment transaction T042
O 5. Set up paying company code Ior payment transaction:
SPRO-ReIerence IMG Financial Accounting AP/AR Business
Transactions Outgoing payments automatic outgoing payments program
payment method/Bank Selection Ior payment transactions set up paying
company codes Ior payment transactions 042B
O 6. Set up payment methods per country Ior payment transactions:
SPRO ReIerence IMG Financial Accounting AP/AR Business
Transactions Outgoing payments automatic outgoing payments payment
methods/bank selection Ior payment program TO42ZL
O 7. Set up payment methods per company code Ior payment transactions:
SPRO ReIerence IMG Financial Accounting AP/AR Business
Transactions Outgoing payments Automatic outgoing payments Payment
method/bank selection Ior payment program set up payment methods per
company code Ior payment transactions T042E
O 8. Set up bank determination Ior payment transactions:
SPRO ReIerence IMG Financial Accounting AP/AR Business
Transactions Outgoing payments automatic outgoing payments payment
method/bank selection Ior payment program set up bank determination Ior
payment transactions BA NKDET
O 9. Assign payment method to vendor Master record:
SAP menu Financial Accounting AP Master Records Change FK02
O 10. Automatic payment program running:
Sap Menu Financial Accounting Accounts Payable Periodic processing
Payments F110
O 11. Running the app program:
First give the parameters. Company code and payment method and next date. It
means the next date the running the program. And go to additional log in that
we need to select due date check, payment selection in all cases, line items oI
the payment documents and save it.
O Click on the schedule proposal, next payment run in the last it has to display
one generated and one completed. Next go to new session click on systems
services and reporting in that give RFFOUSC
O Then give the run rate, identiIication methods, company code, house bank,
bank id, check lot no, and save it and then execute it. And come back I110 and
give that identiIication in printout and save it.
F Questions about GR/R
O 1. How do we post the F transactions after doing MGO?
Does the Migo generate F postings or do we manually do the posting.
f we do it manually what is the %.Code to do it.
. How do we reverse an nvoice?
We go to miro and enter a credit memo.
How do we post the reversal entry?
O In SAP, the moment you save the MIGO transaction, it automatically generates
FI document. It will create Iollowing entry:-
Raw Material Stock A/c Dr
To GR/IR Clearing A/c
O In MIGO transaction itselI, you can post Excise by choosing Capture and Post
Excise Invoice. The FI document will be as Iollows:
RG23A Basic Excise Duty A/c Dr
RG23A Education Cess A/c Dr
To CENVAT Clearing A/c
O AIter doing MIGO, you execute MIRO. In this transaction also, SAP will
generate FI document automatically. The entry will be as Iollows:-
GR/IR Clearing A/c Dr
CENVAT Clearing A/c Dr
VAT SetoII A/c Dr
To AP-Vendor A/c
O Reversion oI entry oI material purchase can be in entered on reiection oI
material partially or wholly. In this case, you will
have to raise a debit note on the vendor. But beIore raising debit note, you have
to Iirst ensure that the Invoice veriIication oI the material (to be reiected) is
complete at the time oI purchase.
O Purchase documents cannot be reversed directly like pure Iinancial document
entry. To reverse the material document,
Iollowing procedure should be Iollowed.
1) Create Return Delivery (MIGO)
2) Reverse the Excise Duty Posted (J1IS)
3) Raise the debit Note. (MIRO) ` -- Rajesh Birari
O Cancel nvoice n MRM
O While cancelling invoice in mrm. 'm getting a message that F
documents to be cancelled manually. What does this means?
O II the cancellation / reversal oI MIRO invoice is done through MR8M, only the
MM invoice / documents gets reversed but the FI document will not be
reversed or cancelled.

We have to Iollow the Iollowing procedure.

1. Goto T.Code MIRO
2. Select Credit Memo in the transaction Iield.
3. Fill up all the details in the Iields Ior the invoice to be reversed.
4. Give the P.O. no
5. Select the line item to be reversed.
6. Simulate and save.

The impact will be as CR - GR/IR clearing a/c
DR - Vendor a/c

By this procedure, the purchase order history in P.O. will also get updated and
there is no requirement oI any manual clearing. Only in the Vendor a/c, the DR.
and CR should be knock oII.
O
Configure Automatic Clearing of GR/R

O How to configure Automatic Clearing of GR/R?
O by: Narasimham
O Follow the Iollowing steps:
O DeIine Adiustment accounts Ior GR/IR Clearing

Path: IMG-F/A-G/L/A-Business Transactions-Closing-Regrouping-DeIine
adiustment accounts Ior GR/IR clearing

Double Click on BNG Transaction Key

System will ask you chart oI accounts update it.

Again update the Iollowing

Reconciliation account: Enter the GL code i.e. GR/IR clearing account (Goods
Receipt/Invoice receipt)
Adiustment account: Enter the GL code i.e. GR/IR correction account
Targ. Acct : Enter the GL code GR/IR Invoiced but goods not yet received

Again Double click on GNB Transaction Key

System will ask you chart oI accounts update it.

Update the Iollowing: -
Reconciliation account: Enter the GL code i.e. GR/IR clearing account (Goods
Receipt/Invoice receipt)
Adiustment account: Enter the GL code i.e. GR/IR correction account
Targ. Acct : Enter the GL code GR/IR Shipped not invoiced

Do the above steps.

The goods receipt/invoice receipt (GR/IR) clearing account is a provision
account, and is posted to whenever you receive goods that have not been
invoiced yet or whenever you receive invoices Ior goods that have not been
delivered yet.
O In this activity you deIine the numbers oI the adiustment and target accounts
Ior the automatic postings Ior the GR/IR clearing account.
O TransIer postings have to be made at the balance sheet date to reIlect the goods
invoiced but not delivered and the goods delivered but not invoiced.
O Transaction code F.19 analyzes the GR/IR clearing account and posts
adiustments entries Ior outstanding amounts to adiustment accounts. It makes
the oIIsetting entry to the account Ior goods delivered but not invoiced or to the
account Ior goods invoiced but not delivered (target account).
Recurring Entry & Sample Doc
O By : Prabha K.
O Explain what is recurring entry & sample doc from basic point of end.
O Sample Document : It is a special type oI reIerence document. It does not
update transaction Iigures. Data Irom this document is used to create deIault
entries on the accounting document entry screen.
O Recurring Entry : A periodically recurring posting made by the recurring
entry program on the basis oI recurring entry original documents
O Recurring Entry Document : A document containing the Iixed data Ior
every recurring posting (Ior example -~ posting key, -~ account, -~ amount..
These 3 never change).
O You set up recurring entry documents Ior business transactions that occur on a
regular basis, such as rental payments and insurance premiums.
O It does not update transaction Iigures. To store, system used number range
"X1"
O Cross Co-Code transaction cannot be posted with recurring entry program.
O Recurring Entry Program
O For postings that recur on a regular basis, such as payments Ior rent, interest,
legal Iees, property taxes, you can use the "Recurring Entry Program" to have
the necessary documents generated automatically.
O (1) Create Recurring Entry Original document
O It contains...The date oI the Iirst & last posting
The Irequency at which the posting should be made,
The date oI the next planned posting
O () %he Recurring Entry Program must be run at regular intervals within a
speciIied period. The program selects all recurring entry original documents in
which the date oI the next posting Ialls within the speciIied period, and then
generates a Batch Input Session
O (3) When the Session is processed, an FI original document is posted. The
date oI the next posting is changed accordingly in the "Recurring Entry
Original Doc"
O You can create recurring entries and execute at month end by using these
t.codes..

- FBD1 - Create
- FBD2 - Change
- FBD3 - Display
- F.56 - Deleting Recurring entries
- F.15 - Executing Ior a period
- F.14 - Posting doc Irom recurring doc
- SM35 - Execute ur session
Update %rading Partner Field for Posted Documents
O n FBL5/FBL1. have checked the related documents and found that
one of the line items is having '%rading Parnter' field as BLAK. So need
to enter the %rading Partner in the document header. Here have noticed
that the %rading partner field is DSABLED and hence am unable to
enter the values and proceed further.
O think if can fill the trading partner field with the required value the
documents can be cleared.
O How can make the %rading Partner field active. n the document type
setting KA (used here) the 'Enter %rading Partner' flag is O. Also have
check the Field Status settings for the Posting Key also for %rading
Partner.
O Solution:
O On the Iirst hand it is not possible to update the trading partner Iield Ior posted
documents, as per SAP Standard. There are two alternatives to this:
O Alternative 1:
O REVERSE AND DOCUMENTS CAUSING THE PROBLEM AND
RECREATE THEM AFREASH
O 1. Find out iI there are any clearing documents within the main document in
question which is not getting cleared due the trading partner Iield.
2. Goto FBRA: Reset and reverse the clearing documents iI any as Iound in
step 1.
3. Goto F-02 give the main document number; then goto "Document~Reverse"
menu or press CTRLSHIFTF12 to reverse the document.
4. Goto F-02: Recreate the main document using "Post with reIerence" Iunction
oI document header which gets automatically populated (with correct Trading
Partner Iield )as per setting deIined in the customer/vendor master data once the
document is saved.
5. Goto F-44/F-32 and then try clearing the vendor/customer.
6. Dont Iorget the post the clearing documents which were reversed in Step 2.
O Alternative 2: This shall be taken as the worst case which shall not be
recommended as normal practice.
O To develop an ABAP which shall update the trading partner Iield VBUND in
Table BSEG, BSIK, BSID and then try clearing the documents.
O SAP Financial %ips by : Kailash
O What is %rading Partners?
O In Business Terms Trading partner is your business partner within Group with
whom you are doing business.In order to identiIy Inter Company transactions
Trading partner Iield is used. You need to deIine all the Group Companies as
company in SAP and all the deIined Companies will be available Ior selection
in Trading partner Iield. Trading partner can be deIaulted in GL, Customer or
Vendor Master. II you need you can populate trading partner at Document
level too by doing settings in Document Type Master in T Code OBA7. *--
Suresh
O Trading partner is normally used to control (payment/transaction)
vendor/customer business with the group. Something like group/inter group
business. You have to go to master record. Ior eg, in customer master, go to
CONTROL DATA tab so see Acccount Control, in which you have provide
trading partner number/reIerence. *-- N B
O Process Of Letter of Credit for mports
O 1. The Clearing agent ask Ior amount, the person who receive the product will
give Letter oI Authority to Clearing Agent. The clearing agent move to bank
and take check.
O For this purpose, we iust issue LA.
O 2. Prepare Purchase Ior the Vendor Irom whom we are going to receive the
product. There may be 2 or more Vendors.
O 1. Product cost to be transIerred to Vendor A
2. Freight or Other Charges to Vendor B
3. Customs Duty and Others to Vendor C
O Tcode : Me21n
O 3. First We have to pay Customs Duty to Commissioner oI Customs aIter LA
issued.
O Entry : Customs Clearing a/c Dr
Cess on Custom a/c Dr
CVD Clearing a/c Dr
Cess on CVD a/c Dr
Special CVD a/c Dr

Vendor C a/c Cr.
O T-code :MIRO or YMIROOTH
O 4. Cenvat credit Ior the product will be taken by person who handling Excise in
that company
O Entry : Cenvat Clearing a/c Cr.
RG23A Part II a/c Dr.

5. Clearing oI Cenvat Credit
O Entry : Cenvat Clearing a/c Dr.
CVD clearing a/c Cr.
Cess on CVD a/c Cr.
Special CVD a/c Cr.

6. AIter Bank payment they will transIter to us
O Entry : Vendor a/c - Dr.
Bank a/c - Cr.
O %ips by 1ayaraman P.C.
O Bills Of Exchange Concept n AP
O By : Cisko
O About bills of exchange concept in Accounts Payable.
O Bills oI exchange may be deIined as a commitment subscribed by your
customer to pay a certain amount on a given date upon presentation oI the bill
oI exchange. They can be used to materialize installment payments.
O For example, you have accepted that your customer pays the invoice amount in
3 monthly installments oI 1000 USD each. You will issue 3 bills oI exhange oI
1000 usd each and maturing in month in month m, m1 and m2. The bills oI
exchange will be sent to your customer Ior acceptance(customer signs them).
O Once accepted they will be returned to you. You will have to post accounting
entries. But note that even though the accepted bills oI exchange can be
considered as payment, you cannot clear the outstanding customer invoice until
the bills are eIIectively paid at maturity date. You then have to post the bills oI
exchange as a special GL transaction.
O Again once you have received the bills oI exchange you may decide to discount
them right away with your bank and this is done with or without recourse.
Depending on the option choosen, accounting entries are diIIerent. by
discounting the bills you receive payment oI the bill and this can be used to
clear the outstanding customer invoice.
O But note that until the bill is Iinally paid by the customer at maturity date you
remain liable. You account Ior this liability by making postings which will
show the discounted bills oI exchange as a contingent liability. They do not
show in the balance sheet itselI but appear in an appendix oI the balance sheet.

Recurring Documents and nterest Calculation
O How to create recurring document template? How to run recurring
document and what date should normally put to run it and what are the
steps for nterest Calculations?
O For Recurring document template you can use the Iollowing T.Codes
O FBD1 - Creation oI recurring document
FBD2 - Change recurring document (This is Ior changing oI amount and
recurring periods)
FBD3 - Display recurring document
F.14 - Posting oI recurring document
F.15 - Display oI recurring document
O For DiII. run schedule recurring documents you can use this T.Codes
O OBC1 - Creation oI DiII. Run schedule Recurring document
OBC2 - Enter run dates Ior Recurring document
F.14 & F.15 steps are same
O Steps For Interest Calculation you can use this Iollowing T.Codes :
O OB59 - DeIine valuation method
OBA1 - Preapare automatinc postings Ior Ioreign currency valuation
FS00 - Assign exchange rate diIIerent key in loan a/c
F.05 - Foreign currencty revaluation
OBAA - Prepare account balance interest calculation
OBAc - DeIine reIerence interest rate
OB81 - DeIine time dependent terms
OB83 - Enter interest value
OBV2 - Assignmen oI accounts Ior automatic
F.52 - Interest calculation
O nterest calculation:
O 1. DeIine terms oI payments:
T.code: OBB8
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~outgoing
invoice and credit memo :-~
maintain terms oI payment
O 2. DeIine Interest Cal indicators / type:
T.code: ob46
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~ interest
calculation global settings :-~ deIine interest cal types
Here in int cal type select 'p' Ior int cal on line items
O 3. Make Interest Indicator Available to Interest Run
Program:
T.Code: ob82
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~ interest
calculation global settings :-~ prepare int. on arreas
O 4. Create ReIerence Interest Rate:
T.code: OBAC
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~ interest
calculation :-~ interest calculation -~ deIine reIerence interest rate
O 5. Assign interest indicators to reI. int rate
or deIine time dependant terms:
T.code: ob81
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~ interest
calculation :-~ interest calculation -~ deIine time dependant terms
Here in sequence # always use 1 Ior line item interest
O 6. Interest calculation account assignment:
Here we will mention how and which accounts the interest program should
post.
T.code: obv1
path: img -~Iin. accting -~ AP AR :-~ Business transactions :-~ interest
calculation :-~ interest posting -~ prepare interest on arreas calculation
(customers)
O %he Steps For nterest Calculation of Bank
O What are the steps involved for the rate and calculation of bank interest
without posting?
O By : Vicent
O Yes, you can do that, but there is no report available Ior you to give that
inIormation. You can go Ior balance interest calculation.
O You can run the balance interest calculation and not process the batch input
session. The posting happens only when you process the batch input session.
O This conIiguration allows you to charge interest on overdue customer accounts.
Interest can be calculated by using the line items or overall account balances.
SAP keep tracks oI the date oI the last interest run and stores it in the customer
master record.
O First create an Interest Indicator.
O OB46 - Interest Settlement Calculation Type
Int Calc. Type
P - calculate interest based on line items.
S - calculate interest based on account balances.
Secornd, make it avaliable to the interest run program.
O OB82 - Interest Terms
O Third, determine the interest rate that will be used by the calculation.
O OBAC - DeIine ReIerence Interest Rates
OB83 - Enter the ReIerence Interest Rates Value
Fourth, assign the interest indicator to the reIerence interest rate.
OB81 - DeIine Time Dependent Terms
Finally, determine the how and to which accounts the interest program will
post.
OBV1 - Prepare Interest on Arrears Calculation
O
How %o Make a Residual Payment %o a Vendor
By : Preveen Kumar
Residual Clearing Iull amount is cleared Ior the remaining amount system will
generate one more line item as open item (or) due item.

1st POS% BELOW VOCE:
PstKy 31 Account ****** (WELL) & press enter
Amount 45,000/- Business Area 830B, Payt terms 0001
Text Goods purchased

PstKy 40 Account 401000 (Material Purchased) & press enter
Amount * Business Area 830B (Under MORE button you will Iind it)
Text & press enter. Select menu item DOCUMENT ~ SIMULATE &
POST.

OU%GOG PAYME% (using Reason Code):
Accounting ~ Financial Accounting ~ Accounts Payable ~ Document Entry ~
Outgoing Payment ~ Post (or) F-53

Residual payment
Document Date **/**/**** Document Type KZ
Company Code 8301 Currency/Rate INR

Account 211000 (ABN Bank A/C) Business Area 830B
Amount 43,000/-,
Text Part payment,
Account ****** (WELL) And enter & select RESIDUAL tab and double click in
the RESIDUAL ITEMS column and select DR (Discount Received) reason code.
Go to menu item DOCUMENT ~ SIMULATE & press POST button.
An example:
While processing thru F-5, First enter the payable amount.

Next Go To Process open items. Go to Res. Items tab and double click on the
Residual items.

%o avoid transfer posting of the same vendor invoice
You can check "Flag for double invoices or credit memos" on Vendor master data.
In FK0, Company code data -~ Options Payment transactions.
Tick Check double invoice.

Significance of One %ime Vendor
What is the significance of one time vendor. can we post more than one invoice
in fiscal year?
by: Rams
Use One-%ime-Vendor Master
In one time vendor we are not maintaing master data. Because the details oI the
vendor is entered only at the time oI entering invoice. AIter that we can't use the
details oI the one time vendor. But you can post more than one transactions Ior that
one time vendor. In Normal vendor, we key in all vendor details at the time oI vendor
creation. But it is not possible to convert one time vendor to normal vendor.
You can create special vendor master records Ior vendors Irom whom you procure
goods only once or rarely, so-called One-Time Vendor Master Records. For example,
suppose you order goods Irom a vendor with whom you usually do not place orders,
because your main vendor was not able to supply the required items. In this case, you
would use a "one-time vendor" master record.
When creating a "one-time vendor" master record, you must assign a one-time
account group. This account group determines that the vendor-speciIic Iields are
suppressed. You don`t need to enter this data until the time a purchasing document
(e.g. a PO) is created.
When you create a purchasing document with a one-time vendor, you will be asked to
enter the vendor address. Enter the vendor`s name and address. Like all other master
records, you can display, block, or delete one-time vendor master records.
One-%ime Accounts (F)
An account in which transaction Iigures are recorded Ior a group oI
customers/vendors with whom you conduct business once or rarely. One time account
requires a special master record. For all customers / vendors with whom you rarely do
business, a special customer/vendor master record should be created. No data speciIic
to a single customer/vendor is stored in this One Time master record, since this
account is used Ior more than one customer/vendor. ThereIore Iields like address,
communication, bank data are suppressed.
You invoice a customer who purchased goods Irom you because his main vendor
could not supply them. In this case, you post the invoice to a one-time vendor account
instead oI creating a separate master record.
When you post to a one-time account, the system automatically goes to a master data
screen. On this screen, you enter the speciIic master data Ior the customer, which is
stored separately in the document. This includes name, address, and bank data, Ior
example.
You process the master record Ior a one-time account in the same way as you process
all other customer master records. You can dun open items Irom it with the dunning
program or pay items using the payment program. The Iunctions Ior one-time
customers are only diIIerent in a Iew aspects. For example, you cannot clear amounts
with a vendor.
Reconciliation Accounts
To create one-time master records, you have to speciIy a reconciliation account. II
you diIIerentiate between reconciliation accounts in your company, you will need to
take this into account when creating one-time master records. You may, Ior instance,
have diIIerent reconciliation accounts Ior domestic and Ioreign receivables. You
would then have to create two one-time master records.
Line Item Display
For line item display, you should enter a key Ior sorting line items in the Sort key
Iield. Keys 022 and 023 are provided in the standard system. You may deIine other
keys that are speciIic to your company. Keys 022 and 023 have the Iollowing
meanings:
- Enter 022 to have the system sort and display line items by name and city.
- Enter 023 to have the system sort and display line items by city and name. The line
items oI customers in the same city are displayed together.
Sort criteria can also be speciIied when entering a document. These criteria will
override the sort keys speciIied in the master record.
When creating a one-time account, use the appropriate account group (such as "one-
time account" in the standard system).
Settings %o Post %o a Particular Vendor
want to make an A/P entry but it says the vender HG1 doesn't exist.
Where are the necessary settings so that can post to that particular vendor.
You need to maintained the Iollowing settings beIore you can post:
1. Creation oI Vendor Account Groups(OBD3)
2. Create Number Ranges For Vendor Account Group(XKN1)
3. Assign Number Ranges For Vendor Account Group(OBAS)
4. DeIine Tolerance Groups For Vendor/Customer Groups(OBA3)
5. Creation oI Sundry Creiditors Accounts(FS00)
6. Creation oI Vendor Master(XK01)
7. DeIine Number Ranges For Postings(FBN1)

How to resolve this error. while making a payment to vendor. have invoice
amount document credit to vendor and debit adjustment document as debit to
vendor. its not allowing for net off . getting the error has "Enter a payment
method for incoming payments".
You can do any oI the Iollowing:
1. Delete the existing payment proposal. Clear the debit, credit by oIIsetting which
will create a new net due document. Then run F110.
or
2. Delete the existing payment proposal. ConIigure and incoming payment method Ior
the company code and then run F110.
How Down Payments Are Configured
The Iollowing Customizing settings have to be made Ior down payment processing:
Settings Ior the billing plan - To activate the billing plan Iunction, maintain the
materials, Ior which you wish to process down payments, with item category group
0005 (milestone billing). This gives the item type TAO via item type determination.
The item type TAO calls up the billing plan Iunction.
You need to implement the Iollowing activities in the billing plan Ior down payments:
Maintain deadline category - This determines the billing rule (percentage or value
down payment) Ior the down payment request. The system assigns billing type FAZ
(payment request) deIined in the standard system with billing category P. (For the
billing type FAZ there is the cancellation billing document type FAS in the standard
system).
Maintain the deadline proposal - Use the down payments that are due Ior the proposed
deadlines.
Maintaining a Pricing Procedure with the Condition Type AZWR:
In the standard system the condition type AZWR is delivered Ior the down payment
value already provided but which has not yet been calculated. You must include this
condition type in the relevant pricing procedure beIore output tax.
Enter condition 2 (item with pricing) and the calculation Iormula 48 (down payment
clearing value must not be bigger than the item value) Ior the condition type AZWR.
BeIore the condition AZWR you can create a subtotal with the base value calculation
Iormula 2 (net value). II the condition AZWR is changed manually, you can get
inIormation on the original system proposal Irom the subtotal.
Maintain the printing indicator - The pricing procedure can not be marked as a
transaction-speciIic pricing procedure (Iield Spec.proc.) The condition type AZWR
has the calculation type B (Iixed amount) and the condition category E (down
payment request / clearing).

Maintaining the Billing Document - In the standard system there is the billing type
FAZ (down payment request) and the billing type FAS Ior canceling . The down
payment is controlled using the billing category P oI the billing type. A billing type
becomes a down payment request when the billing category P is assigned. You have
to maintain blocking reason 02 (complete conIirmation missing) Ior the billing
documents and assign it to billing type FAZ.
Copying control - Copying requirement 20 must be entered in copying control at item
level Ior the down payment request. In the standard system the order type TA Ior
copying control is set up according to the billing type FAZ Ior the item category TAO.
Copying requirement 23 must be entered in copying control at item level Ior down
payment clearing. In the standard system the order type TA Ior copying control is set
up according to the billing type F2 Ior the item category TAO.
Financial Accounting settings - A prerequisite Ior down payment processing is that
the account is assigned to the underlying sales document. To do this, change the Iield
status settings in Customizing as Iollows:
Set reconciliation accounts (transaction OBXR) - For the `received down payments'
and `down payment requests' Irom
the G/L accounts you have selected, you should assign the Iield status deIinition
G031.
Maintain accounting conIiguration (transaction OBXB) - For the down payments
(posting key ANZ in the standard system) and the output tax clearing (posting key
MVA in the standard system), you must maintain the posting key.
You must also carry out a G/L account number assignment Ior the tax account.
Maintain the posting key (transaction OB41) - For posting key 19, set the sales order
as an optional Iield !!!
Maintain the Iield status deIinition (transaction OB14) - For Iield status variant 0001,
Iield status group G031, set the
sales order as an optional Iield !!!
Assign the company code to the Iield status variants (transaction OBC5)
%he Down Payment Process Steps
How does the down payment process work in SAP?
by: Satish
I will try to give you a very good explanation how down payments work.

Down Payment recieved Irom a customer.

Tcode F-29 :
You post the customer down payment. You can see that the indicator Ior
downpayment A is assigned.

You can also see the report at FBL5N which is line item display Ior customers. You
will have to tick the special G.L indicator A Ior noted items to view down payments
recieved Irom customers

Tcode FB70 :
You make the customer invoice in FB70, remember that you make the invoice Ior the
total item and not minus the down payment amount Ior the customer. For example iI
you have posted a down payment Ior 500$ in F-29 and the invoice amount is 1000,
you will post 1000 and not 500 as the customer invoice.

Tcode F-22 :
You transIer Irom special G.L as it is a downpayment to normal item as it is no more
a current liability Ior the company.

Tcode F-39 :
You give the invoice reIerence number and process the down payment and double
click on transIer posting. You can see the balane A has been nulliIied.

Tcode F-28 :
Finally when you recieve the payment Irom the customer you clear the open items Ior
the customer.
Using the Lock Box Files in SAP F
was trying to learn & experiment with using the lock box. However. don't
have any sample files that can upload and see if it works. Does anyone have
any sample bank files and any material that can use. t would really help me
undestand the procedure.
Lockbox is a process provided by a bank where the customer remits his payment to a
PO Box at your bank, the bank deposits the check in your account and enters the
remittance data Irom the customer. Then the bank sends the data to you electronically
Ior you to import and apply in SAP-AR.
The structure that the bank uses is usually one oI two Iormats. BAI will provide you
the customer inIormation and the check amount but no invoice remittance data.
Usually cheaper and works well Ior a business where customers are paying only one
invoice at a time.
BAI-2 oIIers remittance data but the bank charges more Ior the service because they
have to enter more inIo.
Look at structures FLB** to see the transIer data.
When the bank sends the customer payment data you use Treasury Iunction FLB2 to
import and then process the payments. This process attempts to determine where to
apply the payment and will post directly against an invoice, an account to a customer
or iI it can't even determine the customer it posts into a clearing account (conIigured)
to be resolved.
SAP F %ips by : Rakesh 1hunjhunwala
%he Flow Of Lock Box Processing
ERP SAP > SAP FCO
What is the flow of lock box processing?
By: Aparna
Lockboxes are a procedure used mainly in the USA to enable checks to be deposited
more quickly. The checks the bank sends to you are entered as credits by the bank,
and the inIormation entered is sent to the payee using File TransIer. The lockbox Iiles
must be Iormatted per the BAI standard Iormat.
Under certain circumstances, the bank transmits a data carrier to the payee several
times a day; the carrier bears the important check inIormation.
From this data carrier, postings are then generated Ior accounts receivable and G/L
accounting.
Lockbox service has the Iollowing advantages Ior the payee:
- Better liquidity, thanks to Iaster collection, depositing, and crediting oI checks.
- Reduced processing workload
To import lockbox data, proceed as Iollows:
Choose Incomings -~ Lockbox -~ Import.
You reach the initial screen.
SpeciIy the path and Iile name oI the lockbox Iile.
SpeciIy the import options.
Choose Program -~ Execute.
From the SAP Easy Access Screen select Accounting -~ Treasury -~ Cash
Management -~ Incomings -~ Lockbox -~ Postprocess or Accounting -~ Banking -~
Incomings -~ Lockbox -~ Postprocess.
Enter the required data and choose Execute.
The selected lockbox data is displayed in a hierarchy. The icons in Iront oI each line
show the status oI the check. The Iollowing are possible status entries:
- Posted
- Posted on account
- Partially applied
- Not posted
Proceed as Iollows to display the check status:
a. Choose View -~ Other Display
The screen Ior displaying lists appears.
b. Click on the ALV icon Layout settings and choose Change layout.
c. Select the Check Status Iield in the dialog window under Column List.
d. II you want to use the Iield in the column list, click on the leIt arrow and choose
Copy.
The system displays the check status.
Edit Payment Advice
In order to edit the payment advice, double-click on the Payment Advice Iield in the
list display. Change the data you want to correct, save and choose Back.
II you want to change the account or account type, show the Account and Account
Type Iields as described Ior the Check Status Iield. Both Iields are shown in the list
display and you can change them directly. Choose Enter to save the changed data.
II you want to ensure that your changes have been saved, double-click on the Payment
Advice Iield and choose Payment Advice -~ Header.
Choose Checks -~ Post to resume the automatic posting oI changed checks.
Lock Box Configuration
What are the steps for lock box configuration?
Lock Box Config:
Master Data Settings
General Ledger Accounts:
XXXXX has three lockbox clearing accounts:
Company Code 1000 G/L account 1201005, First Union Bank
Company Code 1000 G/L account 1201006, PNC, Bank
Company Code 2000 G/L account 1201008, Wachovia, Bank
General Ledger Account Master Record Settings:
Cash G/L accounts exist Ior each bank. For example account 1105012 is Ior PNC
Bank. II you look at the G/L account master record Ior this account (Accounting -~
Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger -~ General Ledger -~ Master Records -~
Display, transaction FS03) you will notice the 'Relevant to Cash Flow' Iield is
checked.
Customer Master Record Settings:
In order Ior the lockbox program to identiIy a customer the payment MICR must be
populated on the customer master record in the General Data: Payment Transactions
screen. The remit-to lockbox assignment must also be speciIied. Regarding the
tolerance group assignment, XXXXX only has one conIigured that is a blank
customer tolerance. By deIining a blank tolerance group the tolerance group Iield may
remain blank on each customer master record but the tolerance settings are applicable.
The tolerance conIiguration will be reviewed in the next Iew slides. Finally an
alternative payer should be entered on a customer master record iI another customer
account will pay the bills Ior the customer.
Lockbox Assignment on Customer Master Lockboxes are assigned on customer
master records and determine which remit to address is printed on the customer's
invoices
Tolerance Settings
When an incoming cash payment does not exactly pay the reIerenced open item(s),
the system will create a residual item back on the customer's account or write-oII the
diIIerence iI tolerance limits are conIigured.
In SAP tolerance limits are set Ior users and customer accounts with the stricter limits
applying.
SPRO -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Manual Payment Receipt -~ DeIine Tolerance Groups Ior
Employees
Transaction: OBA4
This transaction is used to create tolerance groups Ior users. The tolerances are
deIined by company code and at a minimum there must be one assigned to each
company code otherwise no postings can occur in the company code.
Company Code
Currency
Amount per Document The maximum amount that can be posted in an accounting
document.
Amount per Open Item Account Item the maximum amount that can be posted to a
customer or vendor account.
Cash Discount per Line Item the maximum cash discount percentage that can be
applied to a line item.
Amount, Percent, Cash Discnt Adi. To (Both Revenue and Expense) the amount
Iield contains the maximum amount oI a customer overpayment
(Revenue)/underpayment (Expense). The percent Iield is the maximum percentage
rate diIIerence posted by the system. The lower limit between the amount and
percentage applies.
ConIiguration: DeIine Tolerances (Customers/Vendors)
SPRO -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Incoming Payments -~ DeIine Tolerances
(Customers/Vendors)
OR
SPRO -~ Financial Accounting -~ Accounts Receivable and Accounts Payable -~
Business Transactions -~ Outgoing Payments -~ Manual Outgoing Payments -~
Overpayment/Underpayment -~DeIine Tolerances (Customers/Vendors)
Transaction: OBA3
This transaction is used to conIigure customer tolerances. To change a tolerance select
the company code then press the Details icon.
ConIiguration: DeIine Reason Codes
Transaction OBBE is used to conIigure reason codes by company code. All new
reason codes must be conIigured in each company code.
ConIiguration: DeIine Text : Transaction OB56 is used to conIigure the text that
appears on a line item based on the reason code entered.
ConIiguration: DeIine Accounts Ior Overpayments/Underpayments : Transaction
OBXL is part oI the automatic account assignment. The GL account Ior
overpayments/underpayments is maintained here.
ConIiguration: DeIine Posting Keys : Transaction OB41 is used to conIigure posting
keys. Posting keys are two-digit numeric keys that control the entry oI document line
items. SpeciIically it controls the account type, debit/credit posting, and layout oI
entry screens.
Lock Box Setting
What are the steps for lock box setting?
Lock Box setting:
There are three lockbox settings:
O DeIining lockboxes
O DeIining control parameters
O DeIining posting data
DeIine Lockboxes:
Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Bank-Related Accounting -~
Bank Accounts -~ DeIine Lockbox Accounts at House Banks
Transaction: OB10
In this transaction, you deIine your lockbox accounts at the house banks. Thus, on the
outgoing invoice you can inIorm your customer oI the lockbox to which payment is to
be made. By speciIying this, you can optimize the payment transactions.
To conIigure the lockboxes Iirst speciIy the lockbox links (company code; key oI the
lockbox to which the customer is to pay; house bank ID; lockbox number at your
house bank). Second enter a remit to address that will appear on the customer invoice.
DeIine Control Parameters:
SPRO -~ Treasury -~ Cash Management ~ Business Transactions -~ Lockbox -~
DeIine Control Parameters
Transaction: OBAY
The top "Record Iormat' settings are unnecessary Ior BAI2 Iormat, and should be leIt
blank.
Procedure - LOCKBOX (currently the only supported procedure in standard system)
Record Format - BAI or BAI2
Record Format Parameters: (Required Ior BAI Only)
Document # length - length oI the document # used to locate the open item
Number oI document numbers in record type 6 - maximum # oI documents in detail
record
Number oI document numbers in record type 4 - maximum # oI documents in
overIlow record
Posting Parameters:
G/L Account Postings: IdentiIies whether G/L Posting is created.
G/L Account Posting Type: (1) Posting / Check or (2) Posting / Lockbox
Incoming Customer Payments: IdentiIies whether to post to customer accounts also.
Insert Bank Details: Create batch session to update customer record with new bank
details.
ADDBNKDETAIL creates batch input session that iI executed will update the
MICR number inIormation on customer master records.
DeIine Posting Data:
Treasury -~ Cash Management -~ Business Transactions -~ Lockbox -~ DeIine
Posting Data
Transaction: OBAX
The lockbox is deIined with respect to a 'Destination' and 'Origin" identiIier
combination. Each lockbox must have its own unique Destination and Origin
combination, and also must be deIined Ior a single company code in conIiguration.
The bank must transmit the Iile with the Destination, Origin and Lockbox identiIiers
in the exact Iormat as they have been created in SAP lockbox conIiguration.
Otherwise, the Iile will be improperly read by the lockbox and posting will not
properly occur.
General Data
Company Code - enter the company code Ior which the lockbox transmission applies
Bank Account Number - enter the bank (g/l) account Ior bank account posting
Bank (Payment) Clearing Account - enter the lockbox clearing account
Posting Parameters
Bank Posting Doc Type - enter the document type Ior bank account postings (e.g.
SA)
Cust. Posting Doc Type - enter the document type Ior customer (A/R) postings (e.g.
DZ)
Posting Key: debit G/L - enter the PK related to g/l postings (i.e. 40)
Posting Key: credit G/L - enter the PK related to g/l postings (i.e. 50)
Posting Key: credit Customer - enter the PK related to customer postings (i.e. 15)
Posting Key: debit Customer - enter the PK related to posting residual items (i.e. 06)
Execution oI Lockbox Program
The lockbox program can be accessed using transaction FLB2 or program
RFEBLB00.
In the PRD environment a variant exists Ior each lockbox Iile. For test purposes it is
easiest to copy the PRD variants, changing only the location oI the lockbox Iile.
However, BeIore executing the lockbox program please conIirm that each oI the Iields
in the above slide is completed as indicated.
Import into Bank Data Storage this Iield should be selected so the lockbox Iile will
be imported into the bank storage data. This ensures that the same lockbox Iile cannot
be accidentally imported more than once (based on Origin, Destination, Date and
Time values).
PC Upload this Iield should be selected iI the lockbox Iile resides on the users PC
rather than in a UNIX directory.
Lockbox File enter the location oI the lockbox Iile in this Iield. The location may be
either on the users PC or in the UNIX directory.
Procedure this Iield should always be populated with LOCKBOX.
Input Record Format this Iield should always be populated with BAI2.
Invoice Numbers this Iield should always be populated with a '1'. This Iield oIIers
Iour standard open item identiIication algorithms.
1 match on document number (BELNR)
2 match on reIerence number (XBLNR)
3 match on document number Iirst, iI not Iound then on reIerence number
4 match on reIerence number Iirst, iI not Iound then on document number
Enhanced Invoice No. Check this Iield should not be selected. II selected it allows
postings to be made across customer worklists.
Algorithm: checks with advice and Algorithm: checks without advice these Iields
should be populated with 001. These Iields determine whether cash that does not Iind
an appropriate open item should be posted as 'On Account cash', or be applied against
oldest open items on the account.
Account assignment Iields these Iields should be leIt blank. The values entered in
the Iields are deIaulted on the postings created by the lockbox program.
Print Control this Iield should be selected so the lockbox reports will be output.
%codes for Configuring Assets Accounting
S.o %CODE PAR%CULARS
1 EC08 COPY CHART OF DEPRECIATION
2 FTXP CREATION OF 0 TAX CODES
3 OBCL ASSIGN TAX CODES FOR NON-TAXABLE TRANSACTIONS
4 OAOB ASSIGN CHART OF DEP. TO COMPANY CODE
5 SPECIFY ACCOUNT DETERMINATION
6 CREATE SCREEN LAYOUT RULES
7 OAOA DEFINE ASSET CLASSES
8 AS08 DEFINE NUMBER RANGES FOR MASTER CLASSES
9 AO90 INTEGRATION WITH GL
10 OAYZ DETERMINE DEPRECIATION AREAS IN ASSET CLASSES
11 DEFINE SCREEN LAYOUT FOR ASSET MASTER DATA
12 AO21 DEFINE SCREEN LAYOURS FOR ASSET DEP. AREAS
13 FBN1 DEFINE NUMBER RANGES FOR DEP. POSTINGS
14 OAYR SPECIFY INTERVALS AND POSTING RULES
15 OAYO SPECIFY ROUND UP NET BOOK VALUATION
16 DEPRECIATION KEYS
17 DEFINE BASE METHOD
18 AFAMD DEFINE DECLINING BALANCE METHODS
19 AFAMS DEFINE MULTI LEVEL METHODS
20 AFAMP DEFINE PERIOD CONTROL METHODS
21 AFAMA DEFINE DEPRECIATION KEY
22 AS01 ASSET MASTER CREATION
23 AS11 CREATION OF SUB-ASSET
24 F-90 ASSET PURCHASE POSTING
25 AW01 ASSET EXPLORER
26 AFAB DEPRECIATION RUN
27 F-92 SALE OF ASSET
28 ABUMN TRANSFER OF ASSET
29 ABAVN SCRAPPING OF ASSET
Describe the % codes step wise in Asset Accounting module.
By: Aparna Sekhar
Step 1 - COPY CHAR% OF DEPECA%O
EC08 IMG~Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Copy
reIerence chart oI depreciation/depreciation area
Step - ASSG COMPAY CODE %O CHAR% OF DEPRECA%O
OAOB IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Assign
chart oI depreciation to company code
Step 3 - ASSG FACAL S%A%EME% VERSO %O EVERY
DEPRECA%O AREA
OAYN IMG ~Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ SpeciIy
statemement version Ior asset reports
Step 4 - DE%FY YOUR ASSE% CLASSES
Step 5 - DE%FY YOUR ACCOU% DE%ERMA%O & SCREE
LAYOU% FOR YOUR ASSE% CLASSES
SPRO IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Asset
Classes ~ SpeciIy required entries Ior asset master data
Step 6 - DE%FY YOUR GL ACCOU%S FOR YOUR ASSE% CLASSES
Step 7 - DEFE YOUR UMBER RAGE
AS08 IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ Organizational Structures
~ Asset Classes ~ DeIine number range interval
Step - DE%ERME DEPRECA%O AREAS ASSE% CLASSES AD
SCREE LAYOU%
A021 IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ Master Data ~ Screen
Layout ~ DeIine screen layout Ior asset depreciation areas
OAYZ IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ Valuation ~ Determine
depreciation areas in the asset class
Step 9 - GEERA%E ASSE% CLASSES FROM GL ACCOU%S
ANKL IMG Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Asset
Classes ~ Generate Asset Classes Irom G/L Accounts
Step 10 - COMPLE%E DA%A FOR ASSE% CLASSES SE%%G REQURED
E%RY FELDS
SPRO IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organization Structures and Master Data ~ Asset
Classes ~ SpeciIy requires entries Ior asset master data
OAYZ IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Asset
Classes ~ Enter deIault values in asset classes
AO90 IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ Assign
additional G/L accounts Ior transactions/depreciation
Step 11 - SE%%G UP SPECAL ASSE% CLASSES
OAYK IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ Valuation ~ SpeciIy
max amount Ior LVA asset classes ~ SpeciIy amount Ior low value assets
OAY2 IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ Valuation ~ SpeciIy max
amount Ior LVA asset classes ~ SpeciIy LVA asset classes
Step 1 - SPECFY %ERVALS AD POS%G RULE
OAYR IMG ~ Financial Accounting ~ Asset Accounting ~ FI-AA Implementation
Guide (SimpliIied Version) ~ Organizational Structures and Master Data ~ SpeciIy
intervals and posting rules
Posting to Cost Center and nternal Order
II you have added the Iield Internal order in the Asset Master as a statistical order and
you want your depreciation
posted not only to the cost center but also to this order.
In transaction OAYR in the IMG you deIine how depreciation posts to the
depreciation posting rules - there is a CO assignment box where you have to tick both
cost centres and internal orders.
What is internal order? Explain with example and how it is related to cost
center.
An internal order is used to accumulate cost Ior a speciIic proiect or task Ior a speciIic
time period. An internal order is thereIore used Ior a short period with a speciIic
deadline.
Your internal order will usually settle to cost centers (and not visa versa) according to
the settlement rule in the order setup.
An internal order can thereIore be used to group all the expenses incurred to plan and
hold a conIerence over a 3 month period. The order can be settled on a monthly basis
to cost centers. When the conIerence is Iinished the order can be settled Iinally. The
cost oI the conIerence will then be spread over 2 or more cost centers, but can be
viewed in total on the internal order when needed.
Internal Orders - It is an instrument used to monitor costs and, in some instances, the
revenues oI an organization.
Uses oI Internal orders
- Monitoring the costs oI short-term iobs
- Monitoring the costs and revenues oI a speciIic service
- On going cost control
Internal order categories
- Overhead Orders
- Investment Orders
- Accrual Orders
- Orders with revenue
Cost centers are not Ior speciIic iob. e.g II you have open Trade-Iair / exhibition (1
month period), then to allocate cost, you can use Internal Orders (Say IO) you can
post to IO, and Irom their to various cost centers. II management were to ask you the
cost oI that exhibition, Internal Order will help you
Cost center is a responsible center in SAP. It cannot be deIined as statistical but in
transactions it may become as per other co obiects.You will be able to Iind out the
perIormance oI the cost center using activities and plan values with actual value. This
is lowest cost obiect in SAP. This will become a statistical obiect when you allocate
the cost to other higher obiects. Cost can be allocated to other cost centers or co
obiects but not Ii obiects like GL,assets, inventory etc. can be deIaulted in transactions
through cost element. It cannot be a cost obiect Ior a revenue element, revenues are
always taken Ior other higher CO obiects. No budget Iunctionality is available but
planning Iunctionality is available and is always measured Ior a year in business.
Internal order is the second CO obiect - which can be deIined as statistical or real.
You will be able to deIine Budget and planning Iigures - more than one year also. Can
control the postings oI FI through budget controls. You can have the report oI Plan vs
actual including commitment. Cost cannot be allocated but settled through settlement
rules and proIiles. The receiver oI the values can be any obiect not like Cost center -
can be CO obiects and FI obiects. Ideal Ior R&D expenses capitalisations, etc. Status
proIile is linked to this which controls many individual transactions in each status
which is a part oI this Internal order. It can also receive postings oI activities Irom
Cost center. Settlement proIile is an wonderIul tool Ior variety oI settlement - needed
Ior FI and CO - legal requirements also and Revenue requirements also Ior any
country.
All SAP CO orders like Production order, Plant maintenance order, etc will behave
like Internal order with more Iunctinalities.
Process Fixed Asset Depreciation
Every asset transaction immediately causes a change oI the Iorecasted depreciation.
However, it does not immediately cause an update oI the depreciation and value
adiustment accounts Ior the balance sheet and proIit and loss statements. The planned
depreciation is posted to the general ledger when you run the periodic depreciation
posting run. This posting run uses a batch input session to post the planned
depreciation Ior each posting level Ior each individual asset as a lump sum amount.
The calculation and scheduling oI depreciation, interest and revaluation are
automatically controlled by keys in the system, or you can control them manually
using a special posting transaction. In both cases, planned depreciation Irom Asset
Accounting must be periodically posted to the corresponding asset and expense
accounts oI the general ledger. You carry out this posting using a batch input session.
In addition to the various depreciation types, interest and revaluation, this batch input
session also posts the allocation and writing oII oI special reserves.
When the system posts depreciation, it creates collective documents. It does not create
separate documents Ior each asset.
Depreciation Posting Run is done via transaction code 'AFAB'.
The program creates batch input sessions Ior posting depreciation and interest to the
G/L accounts in Financial Accounting and/or to Controlling.
Fields Description :-
Company code : Your Company Code
Fiscal Year : Your Iiscal year
Posting period : Your depreciation period
Reason Ior posting run (choose one)
Planned posting run : X (deIault)
List assets : (tick iI you want to see the detail)
Test run : (tick iI you run in test mode else untick Ior production run)
Main asset number : (you can speciIy certain asset number iI you click repeat run or
test run)
Note :
Click the execute button iI this is a test run.
Click the menu bar -~ Program -~ Execute in background iI this is a production run.
You should get this message :
ackground iob was scheduled for program RA&CH00 and print out the output.
Release and Process the Batch Input Session in transaction code 'SM35'.
Process Session RABUCH00
X - Display errors only
Additional Iunctions
X - Dynpro standard size
Click the Process button
II there is error, the system will pop up the error message.
Correct the error and recreate the session in transaction 'AFBD'.
Fields Description :-
Company code : Enter your company code
Fiscal year : Enter your Iiscal year
Posting period : Enter your posting period
List assets : (tick iI you want to see the detail)
Test run : (tick iI you run in test mode else untick Ior production run)
Note :
Click the execute button iI this is a test run.
Click the menu bar -~ Program -~ Execute in background iI this is a production run.
You should get this message :
ackground iob was scheduled for program RA&CH00 and print out the output.
Asset Year-end Closing
The year-end closing enable the company to produced the Iinal balance sheet and
proIit and loss statement Ior its annual report, which has to be created to meet the
particular legal obligations in each country.
Once the Iiscal year is closed, you can no longer post or change values within Asset
Accounting (Ior example, by recalculating depreciation). The Iiscal year that is closed
is always the year Iollowing the last closed Iiscal year. You cannot close the current
Iiscal year.
A1AB - Year-End Closing Asset Accounting
Company code : Your Company code
Asset classed asset u. const. : Optional
For fiscal year : Last closed Iiscal year
Uncheck '%est run' iI this is a production run
At menu bar, click Program -~ Execute in background.

Perform Fiscal year close for fixed Assets.
While doing a %est run. message is that fiscal year close could not be performed
but it does not display any Asset details .t says Other Error. am not able to
identify what those other Errors could be.
Also. have checked ncomplete Assets list As well but that list is empty as well.
Also while running tcode AUVA there is a tab correct incomplete Assets. can
anyone tell what deos that mean and when its to be used.
You can check and edit Asset accounting closing status using tcode OAAQ.
But you seem to be not clear on process.
AJAB is Ior closing Asset Accounting books.
AJRW is a technical step oI changing Iiscal year in system. II not done, it will not
allow you to view asset reports in current Iiscal.
Now, your error says incomplete asset. Please run aiab in test mode, check Ior details.
It will give you asset details and error details as well. Go to asset explorere and check
iI the asst in question has been Iully depreciated Ior the year.
II not run repeat deprecation Ior the asset in period 12 and then try closing asset
books. You can also check asset and GL inconsitency using tcode
ABST.
Asset Reverse Year-End Closing
II you closed a Iiscal year too soon, and still need to make corrections, you can reset
the last closed Iiscal year in Customizing Ior :-
Asset Accounting (Periodic processing -> Year-end closing -> Reverse).
Using this Iunction, you can re-open the last closed Iiscal year, either Ior selected
depreciation areas in a company code, or Ior all depreciation areas in a company code.
You do this by changing the Iield Ior the last closed Iiscal year.
Be careIul iI you re-open a Iiscal year only Ior certain depreciation areas, and you
need to make adiustment postings only in these areas. You cannot use the standard
transaction types Ior these postings, since the standard transaction types post to all
depreciation areas. Instead, you have to deIine your own transaction types in
Customizing Ior Asset Accounting (Transactions), limiting them to the required
depreciation areas.
OAAQ - Reverse year-end closing Ior deprciation area
At the desired company code, change the Iiscal year in 'Closed fiscal year' column.
Save entries and create a new request.

Change Asset Iiscal year
A1RW - Asset Iiscal year change
Company code : Your Company code
New Iiscal year : Last closed Iiscal year
Uncheck '%est run' iI this is a production run
At menu bar, click Program -~ Execute in background.

Post Capitalization (asset haven't been post in closed fiscal year)
II you realized that there are some Iixed assets that haven't been post in a closed Iiscal
year,
Do the Iollowing steps :-
1. Reverse Iiscal year closed by Iollowing the 'Reverse Year-end Closing' procedure.
2. Open the accounting Iiscal year via transactin 'OB5'.
3. Post the Iixed asset acquistions in the re-open Iiscal year.
4. Repeat depreciation run Ior the last period oI that closed Iiscal year.
5. Repeat depreciation run Ior the last period depreciation run oI the current Iiscal
year.
6. Closed Iiscal year by Iollowing the 'Year-end closing' procedure.
7. Closed the accounting Iiscal year via transactin 'OB5'.
Mass Change For Assets and Data Reset
How to reset Asset Data?
You can reset the entire AA data Irom Img-~FA-~ AA-~ Preparing Ior production
startup -~Tools -~ Reset
company code.
This will reset only the asset accounting data Irom the company code. But beIore you
perIorm this you have to make sure that you reverse all the transaction you have
posted and have gone to the FI. As this reset will not eIIect FI GL data.
You can then reset the depreciation posted and then the recon accounts.
When you reset the recon accounts, it will enable you to post directly to the account
like normal GL. Then you have to post JV and rectiIy you GL(recon account).
Then upload the correct data. AIter the data is uploaded set the recon accounts. this
will reconcile the amount with the assets and activate the company code (in asset
area). `-- Lakshmi
Mass change for assets
I am experiencing problems in OA02, Asset Mass Change. I am using 4.6C.
What happened was that I created the Substitution, then created the Step, and I then
SAVED. I am not sure iI I need to create a RULE or not. I have already deIined in a
STEP, (using Formula Builder) that most assets belonging to a certain asset class,
9011 with a current Cost centre, Z01, are to be assigned to another Cost Centre Z02,
within the same Co.
Code. I then saved the Substitution, although I noticed that there was a "?" icon next
to the RULES Iolder. I am well aware that Ior Time Dependent Data, we would need
to speciIy a "Valid From" date. (ADATU, in Table ANLZ) But, do we need to
speciIy a "Valid To" date as well ?
My data is like this.....
PREREQUISITES: Asset Class 3D '9011'
SUBSTITUTION: Valid From is substituted by Constant '19.08.2001'
Cost Centre is substituted by Constant 'ZB02'
II I need to create a Rule, What would I need to enter ? I then created a WorkList, and
assigned the Substitution to it. AIter this, I generated the Worklist in Background
using AR31. Everything seems ok, but when I check the Assets, I still see the old
Cost Centre, NOT the New Cost Centre.
--------------
Rules are not required. You get a ? because you probably started to create one and did
not Iinish.
For a Cost centre mass change, iI you want to have it time dependent, you must
speciIy 'valid Irom' and 'valid to' in the substitution rule. In conIig you determine iI
you want to use the time dependency or not (deIault is : Yes)
Asset Master Data Upload
am new to Asset Accounting while have a potential job for mass upload of
master data using transaction AS0. Focus is to convert the asset super number
from an old reference to a new reference (to be determined by client). plus some
other field modifications included in the request.
would be using BAPFXEDASSE%CHAGE for instance. What table/s
shall look into to explore the system requirements for this?
To make a mass change, you have two options:
1. II the change oI the Iield can be put into an algorithm (e.g., enter XYZ as a super
number Ior all assets in class 1234), you can use a mass change rule. You Iirst deIine
the mass change rule in the same way as you would deIine an asset substitution (IF
something, THEN something else), then you go into the mass change transaction,
select the right assets, the proper change rule ... and hit Execute.
2. Very oIten, it is easier to prepare the data in Excel and use transaction AS02 Ior the
upload. Here, I can recommend transaction LSMW - you simulate (and record) the
AS02 transaction on one Iixed asset master, then Iollow all the steps proposed by the
system (deIine Iixed values, variables, etc.) and Iinally upload the Excel (.csv).
System will automatically generate a batch input Ior all assets. It may take some time
Ior you iI you do it Ior the Iirst time, but it is the best way iI you would otherwise
need to deIine complex algorithms.
So - use option 1 iI you have a simple algorithm Ior many assets, and option 2 iI "each
case is diIIerent" or iI you Ieel more comIortable in Excel than ABAP. Option 2 is
simple, but oI course takes some time to generate the upload and then run the batch
sessions (while option 1 changes everything instantly in a matter oI seconds).
`ve read you post re mass changes of the fixed assets and also interesting in the
transaction code for the mass changes.
Also did not understand for LSMW how to simulate (record) AS0 transaction.
could you pls describe more clear how to do it? Or better send the csv file as an
example.
Here are the details:
I. To use mass change:
1. First, deIine a mass change rule in transaction OA02 (Accounting - Financial
accounting - Fixed assets - Environment - Mass change rule). For each company code,
you can deIine one rule (or a sequence oI them). However, all oI them will always be
executed at the same time. ThereIore, iI you need to deIine diIIerent rules Ior diIIerent
assets, you will have to do this repeatedly. Technically, this is done in the same way
as AA substititution.
2. Once the rule is deIined, you need to select assets Ior mass change. Go to
transaction AR01 (Accounting - Financial accounting - Fixed assets - Environment -
Worklist - Generate). Enter selection criteria like on any standard AA report, and run
Execute. I cannot simulate this now on my system (we do not have AA), but it should
ask what you want to do (mass change, mass retirement, etc.) and ask Ior a name oI
the worklist (write anything - e.g., Super number change). The system will show you a
list oI selected assets in a report Iormat. Check it and make sure that it is correct. You
may add or remove single assets Irom this (now cannot tell you how, but it is
possible). II you are happy with the list, save it.
3. The last step is execution oI the change. Go to transaction AR31 (same path as
above), execute the report and iI you are happy with the list (same as in step 2), press
Save. System will show you a log oI change (what went through, which errors
occured). You are done.
II. LSMW
LSMW is a transaction, which will let you mass upload almost any other transaction
(FB01, FD01, AS91, etc.). You do it in the Iollowing way:
1. Enter into transaction LSMW (no menu path), possibly in a development / test
system
2. First, deIine a proiect, subproiect and obiect (relatively Iormal task).
3. On the horizontal menu, go to Goto -~ Recordings. Click on "Create recording".
4. Enter the name and description oI recording (Ireely deIinable).
5. I cannot simulate this now in my system, but SAP will ask you about transaction
code (AS02) and will take you into the AS02 transaction. In this step, do the change
manually. Make sure you "touch" (change / write something) in all Iields which you
want to update.
6. Once you are done, save the recording and return on the start page oI LSMW. Click
"Execute".
7. You will see a list oI tasks. Do them one by one. They should be relatively simple
(and I cannot help you with them). Important is step 3 (maintain source Iields) - here
you deIine the columns oI your excel (csv) Iile in the particular order. In step 5 (Iield
mapping and conversion rule), you assign Iile columns to SAP Iields (note that you
will see only those Iields which you "touched" during recording). You need to go
through all the steps. In the end, you get (and run) a batch session.
8. II you did this in a development system, transport the LSMW obiect (menu Extras -
Export proiect, Extras - Import proiect). You have to do it via Iile, not via standard
transports oI conIiguration (it is perhaps more simple).
Make sure you test it Iirst in development or quality system!
Fiscal Year Variant
Assuming that you are newly implemention with go live date of Sept 1st 006 and
Fiscal year 1anuary - December. what will be the best way?
Would it be better to define a Shortened Fiscal year for Sept-Dec 006 and then
regular Fiscal years OR Define a full Fiscal year for the entire 006 and future
FYs
Normally, the best way is to keep it simple and leave the Iirst year "normal" (12 4
months starting January). You convert old data as oI August 31 (unless the client
requests opening balance as oI December 31, 2005 and then monthly movements - I
have experienced both options) and then start normal bookings in month 9 on
September 1.
We never tried shortened Iiscal year in this context and it is surely not needed here. It
iust adds complexity.
f we create the normal 1an-Dec Fiscal Year for 006 also. how will we handle
the assets when we go live in Oct 006? Do we load the book value at that time or
we load the book value for 1anuary 006 and depreciate in the system for
1anuary to September
The ordinary way is to load Iixed assets which exist on September 30 (iI you go live
with AA module on October 1) with trans. AS91.
- First, you need to set in conIiguration that the last closed Iiscal year Ior legacy data
upload is 31.12.2005 and the last period Ior depreciation will be 9/2006. (Do it in
IMG: Financial accounting - Asset accounting - Asset data transIer - Parameters Ior
data transIer - Date speciIications)
Within trans. AS91, you enter the Iollowing values:
- acquisition value and accummulated depreciation as oI 01 January 2006
- all asset movements (acquisitions, retirements, but not ordinary depreciations)
between January 1 and September 30 with their respective dates
- already posted depreciation in 2006 until September 30
Then you enter GL movements per month (either you temporarily change the asset
reconciliation accounts Ior direct booking with trans. OAMK, then book with FB01
and Iinally reset with OAK5, or you book there directly with trans. OASV). This way,
your asset accounts (acquisition value and accummulated depreciation) are the same
as asset module as oI September 30.
You can also let the system recalculate the depreciation Irom the beginning oI the
year, but then you may end up with a diIIerent value as oI September 30 than your
legacy system calculated. So, I would not recommend it unless there is no reliable
source data.
Retire Asset with or without Revenue
Explain Retire Asset with Revenue and Retire Asset Without Revenue.
Asset sale
* Without customer - Transaction ABAON
- in case that a sale invoice is issued and posted in SD (or FI) and asset retirement is
posted in FI-AA - Transaction ABAON.
* Between aIIiliated companies - Transaction ABT1N - asset transIer between
company codes
* With customer known - Transaction F-92
- in case that a sale invoice is not issued and book through SD
but in FI-AA - Transaction F-92.
* The sale invoice posted in FI-AA - document posted in AA or FI (document type
ZN) and issued (printed) by transaction what has to be modiIIied.
Asset sale without customer - transaction ABAON (old t - ABAO)
In case you want system to calculate Gain/loss Irom sale Ior you enter Manual value
(revenue amount) in speciIication Ior revenue. It is not allowed Irom the legal point oI
view Ior France.
II you want the asset to be retired in NBV choose which depreciation area (e.g.01 -
management reporting area required) net book value should be posted.
Enter transaction type to speciIy the business operation you want to make.
(e.g. Retirement with revenue 210,
Retirement oI new acquisition with revenue 260)
An asset retirement can reIer to an entire Iixed asset (complete retirement) or part oI a
Iixed asset (partial retirement).
In case oI partial retirement enter amount posted, percentage rate or quantity.
System calculates the gain/loss Irom the asset sale and makes posting on gain/loss on
sales asset account.
The diIIerence (gain/loss) is counted Irom NBV oI the asset and the revenue amount
(clearing account e.g.5700990)
Retirement without revenue - Transaction ABAVN
Retirement due to scrapping, donation, deIicit, damage
Retirement without revenue is a removal oI an asset Irom the asset portIolio without
any revenue, Ior example, by scrapping. When you use this posting option, the system
does not create revenue and gain/loss postings. Instead it creates a loss Irom an asset
retirement without revenue posting in the amount oI the net book value being retired.
Retirement without revenue transaction posts NBV to one account speciIied in
account determination Ior each reason oI disposal.
Additional account assignments with speciIic transaction types can be created to
IullIill requirements oI posting on diIIerent accounts Ior each or some oI disposal
reasons (e.g. diIIerent account Ior scrapping than Ior donation). This speciIic posting
is allowed only Ior book legal depreciation area, Ior management area account Ior
retirement due to all reasons is the same (e.g.5700000).
*-- Milada
Mass Asset Retirement or Disposal
SAP Functional Modules > SAP FCO
Explain Mass Retirement.
When an enterprise sells a large portion oI its Iixed assets (such as a plant or a
building), it is necessary to post the retirement oI all the individual assets which make
up the whole. Since the number oI aIIected assets can be very large, the Asset
Accounting (FI-AA) component makes it possible to make the necessary postings
using mass processing.

What is asset retirement?
Asset retirement is the removal oI an asset or part oI an asset Irom the asset portIolio.
This removal oI an asset (or part oI an asset) is posted Irom a bookkeeping
perspective as an asset retirement. Depending on organizational considerations, or the
business transaction which leads to the retirement, you can distinguish the Iollowing
types oI retirement:
- An asset is sold, resulting in revenue being earned. The sale is posted with a
customer.
- An asset is sold, resulting in revenue being earned. The sale is posted against a
clearing account.
- An asset has to be scrapped, with no revenue earned.
- An asset is sold to an aIIiliated company (reIer to Manual Posting oI Intercompany
Asset TransIer/Retirement)
%here is a requirement to dispose 900 + assets. Can someone please let me know
what are the options available? t should be similar to F-9 - Asset Retirement
from Sale with customer but should to do mass number.
II it`s a mass retirement, it`s possible - but I doubt mass physical deletion oI assets.
Follow the steps below iI you want to do mass retirement :
1| AR01 -~ Give your company code -~ and the asset numbers
Now press F8 to execute the same
2| At this point -~ Go to the work list -~ create -~ Enter in the mandatory tab and
select the retirement without revenue -~ Enter
3| Enter dates / transaction type -~ now you will get a work queue number
4| Go to AR31 and execute the work queue -~ Then click the Release button
This will work as a mass scrapping oI assets.
How to asset retirement asap & configuration?
There is no speciIic conIiguration Ior asset retirement. For retirement there are 3 ways
as Iollowing:
1. Scrapping Asset - ABAVN
2. Sale oI asset with revenue - F-92
3. Asset retirement without revenue - ABAON
Asset retirement is an integral part oI asset management. An asset can be retired in
Iollowing ways :-
1. By Scrap - T.Code ABAV/ABAVN
2. By sale. In sale there can be Iollowing cases :-
a. with revenue -
b. without revenue
c. with customer - T Code F-92
d. without customer - T Code ABAON
How %o Configuration in Asset Accounting in F
These are the steps that you need to do to create Asset Accounting (tested in 4.7
version) :
Copy ReIerence Chart oI Depreciation/ Depreciation Areas
Menu Path is: IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Organization
Structures~ Copy ReIerence Chart OI Depreciation/ Depreciation Areas,
- Double click on Copy ReIerence Chart OI Depreciation
- Click on Copy Icon and update it Irom ODE to your Chart OI Depreciation and
change the description too.
Assign Input tax Indicator Ior Non-Taxable Acquisitions:
IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Integrate With the General
Ledger~ Assign Input Tax Indicator Ior Non-Taxable Acquisition
- Save this.
Assign Chart oI Deprecaition to your Company Code :
II Co Code is not properly Done then it will give Problems but still save it.
SpeciIy Account Determination:
IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Organization Structures~Asset
Classes~ SpeciIy Account Determination
- Make the GL Accounts Ior this and those GL accounts to be speciIied here,
Example Ior Land, Building, Plant & Machinery, Vehicles And Asset Under
Construction then again
- Save it.
Create Screen Layout Rules:
IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Organization Structures~Asset
Classes~ Create Screen Layout Rules:
- Here we copy the screen Layouts Irom the standard Co Code 1000
We will copy Ior each Asset Class like Land, Building, Plant & Machinery, Vehicles
And Asset Under Construction,
- Now save it again.
DeIine Number Range Interval:
IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Organization Structures~Asset
Classes~ DeIine Number Range Intervals
- Click On Intervals
- Click On Interval and update the Iollowing:
- For all the Five Asset Classes
- Save It.
Now DeIine the Asset Classes:
IMG~ Finanacial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Organization Structures~Asset
Classes~ DeIine Asset Classes
- Click on New Entries and Iillout the Page in the blank space where Asset Class is
given give the Asset Class GL number and in Description give the name in long and
short Iorm,
- Go to next level and give the Screen layout Rule number
- Give the number ranges 01 and in Status OI AuC click the Iirst Radio button: No
Auc Or Summary Management oI Auc
and in History Status click Manage Historically and save it.
- Likewise Create Ior Building, Plant & Machinery and Vehicles and in case oI Asset
under Construction Update in Status oI - Auc the second Radio Button: Line Item
Settlement and
- Save it now.
Integrate with General Ledger:
IMG~ Financial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Integration with the General
Legder~ DeIine how Depreciation Areas Post to General Ledger
and then Assign the General Ledger Accounts
IMG~ Financial Accounting~ Asset Accounting~ Integration with the General
Legder~ Assign G/L Accounts
and then SpeciIy Document Type AF and speciIy intervals
1 Monthly
3 Quaterly Posting
6 Semi- Annually
12 Annually.
Processing Mass Changes Using a Worklist
n Asset Accouting What is the menu path for processing mass changes using a
worklist?
Selection oI Iield and data to change: (Create Substitution Rule. OA0). This
transaction must be run prior to ceating a work list and perIorming mass changes.
Selection oI the Assets Involved: (Create a Work List. AR01). This transaction Ior
creating the work list must be perIormed aIter OA02 and prior to running AR31.
Access the 'Process Asset Mass Change transaction by:
O Via Menus Accounting -~ Financial Accounting -~ Fixed Assets -~ Tools -~
Work list -~ Edit
O Via Transaction Code AR31
Workflow:
The work list that is created opens a workIlow. By means oI the deIinition oI the
workIlow, the system determines which workers should carry out the Iollowing steps:
O Manually checking and possibly adding to the work list
O Releasing the work list and posting the changes.
The system automatically sends the work list to the speciIied employees. They
receive the work list as a task in their R/3 Mailbox.
O Process the work list (Tools -~ Work list -~ Edit).
O Select the work list in your mail in box ("Edit and release work list")
O Check the assets in the work list created (Process)
O Release the work list (Release).
O It is also possible to distribute the steps "Edit work list" and "Release work list"
in the workIlow to diIIerent users. This is possible when carrying out a bulk
change by selecting the corresponding work Ilows when creating the work list.
O Check the results using the document change list (Assets -~ Change).
NOTES: Please note that when you make a change to time-dependent data (such as
the assignment to a cost center), you always have to enter the time interval (valid
Irom/to date) in the substitution rule.
O When you enter a new "valid Irom" date in the substitution, the system
automatically opens a new time interval.
O You can only change one time interval in each bulk change. It is not possible
to change several time intervals in parallel.
O When you make changes to the depreciation terms, you must also enter the
depreciation area (AFABE) in the condition.

Periodic Asset Postings - ASKB
Some feedback on using the the Periodic Asset Posting %code ASKB
By: Syed Saleem
In order to use the ASKBN transaction, you have activate the SAP R3 Enterprise
Extension.
First option in the IMG menu.
Requirements: See SAP Note 588364.
This allows you to post directly to the ledger without without having to generate a
batch-input session.
In addition, you can post directly online to the general ledger Irom the dialog posting
transaction Irom depreciation areas other than the master depreciation area 01. Or you
can update the values Irom a depreciation area to a special ledger using a diIIerent
accounting principle.
I tested the ASKB last year beIore we discovered that we could activiate the SAP R3
Enterprise and use the ASKBN. Once activated, you will see the ASKBN listed in the
menu.
This transaction is much, much better to use than the ASKB. Plus it works similar to
your deprecaition posting. The only complaint that I have is that you get a "log" in test
mode, but it does not create an actual posting log when executed like the depreciation
postings creates.
In order to use this transaction, you must conIigure the depreciation area where you
are capturing the non-US GAAP asset requirements to post to the ledger in addition to
the Area 01 that will automatically post.
You will also have to establish an external document type, document number range
and a reverse document type (OBA7) with account types allowed Ior Assets and G/L
Accounts.
The document type needs to be diIIerent Irom the document type used Ior the standard
depreciation posting (AF) and AA postings (AA). We used AZ. We are also using a
number range outside oI our standard AA and depreciation document numbers.
We assigned the AZ to number range A4 which is viewed via FBN1.
Why and When to use Business Area
Can any body tell me why we want to use business area and where it is going to
be used. as know it helps in consolidation and still more?
CG.Gopinath
Business Areas in SAP are used to diIIerentiate transactions originating Irom diIIerent
points/lines/locations in business. Let me give some examples to elucidiate:-
A company (say, ABC) is a huge company and has a variety oI businesses under it.
Let us say that it typically operates in 3 diIIerent domains like machinery
manuIacturing, trading and assembling oI machine parts.
There are 2 options here now -
1. Either create diIIerent company codes Ior the 3 business operations (which would
be the easiest and require no creativity)
or
2.) Create each oI these business lines into business areas (the better option).
The advantages oI using the second option is:
1. You can use these business areas iI other company codes require the same areas
2. The conIiguration is simpler as in case oI company code, you would require to go
through the entire conIiguration oI creating Chart oI Accounts, Fiscal Year variants,
posting periods variants and so on. In the business area option, you iust need to attach
it to the company code and the rest oI the details in Business area is attached by
deIault Irom the company code you are using it in.
3. Using the options in controlling (EC-PCA, Enterprise Controlling, ProIit Centre
Accounting), you can even draw up Balance Sheets and PL statements Ior your
business areas and hence this is used Ior management accounting in some companies
(like HP, Dell, etc) when it wants to know the operating proIits Ior diIIerent business
areas/lines.
The above was an example when the company wanted to separate entries according to
the lines it operates in... the other case could be when it wants to Iind out proIitability
during its operations in cities and diIIerentiates these cities into Business
Areas...
Business Areas are not much relevant in FI but are much more relevant in CO.
Hope this clears.
1acob 1oseph
You have given a very good example for Business Area. have questions.
f want the B/s and P&L Account for Business Area wise. can take it. But.
How about those transactions which are not assigned any business area during
the document entry.
Kotni
Let me Iirst be sure oI what you are asking. Is it:
1) You want the B/S and P/L statements oI transactions carried out in areas other than
the business areas deIined by you? or
2) You only want to view the transactions that were not carried out in any business
area?
Whatever were your doubts, let me clariIy.
II your doubt was the Iirst one, then, in that case, the Iinancial statements will not be
available. There are reasons Ior the same. All transactions in FI pass through G/L
accounts. The data in FI is then passed to CO through primary cost elements.
According to the settings that you have conIigured Ior your controlling area and
operating concern, the costs are distributed to the various cost centers (Cost Center
Accounting & CO-PA). The costs are then apportioned to the various cost centers
(which may or may not be a part oI your business areas or may be independent cost
centers). Now, with this data, Iinancial statements oI the business area are drawn up.
For transactions not part oI business area, they are transIerred to independent cost
centers (e.g. like Head OIIice Salaries, HR, etc) and hence, cannot be drawn up as a
Iinancial statement but iust as line item displays in your reconciliation ledger (iI you
have activated it in the CO-OM-CEL Cost Element Accounting})
|The answer to your second doubt, I hope|.
Financial statements oI Business areas are unbalanced because not always does the
debit and credit entries oI a transaction lie in the same business area/cost center; but
Ior cost accounting purposes, they are reasonably suIIicient.
I hope this clears.
1acob 1oseph
%hank you for the reply. understand need to give more clearly about my
doubt.
want to configure F and other modules and there is no CO or operating
concern. But want Balance sheet and Profit and Loss Account for each of the
business area.
As you aware. the business area can be defined above or below company code
level.
s it possible to get what want.
Kotni Ravi Kumar
In order to generate BS and P&L at business area level you should carry out the
Iollowing:
1. You should have activated " Enable BA balance sheet" under enter global
parametets in FA global settings.
2. You should do conIiguration under the transaction code "OBXM"
3. You also have run the transaction codes I.50 Ior P&L and 5.d & 5.e Ior Balance
sheet readiustment.
System automatically posts the taxes and reconciliation accounts oI NIL BA
transactions to BA and tally the trial balance oI all B. areas
Yerra Rao
Your explanations were excellent and precise. but have a quick question why
would one use business area against a profit center as business area data is never
precise and getting a balance sheet report via business area is not recommended.
Profit center would be better just a doubt please clarify
Sabarinathan Swaminathan
Why would I use business area against a proIit center?" is a very pertinent one and
conceptually necessary. Let me explain to you what a proIit center exactly means,
both in SAP terminology and in management accounting.
In management accounting, a proIit center is an area or department Irom where the
management wants to Iind out the return on investment or ROI, as the accountants
know it. The concept in SAP is similar as it is used by management to Iind out the
ROI. On the other hand, business areas are iust segregation oI business transaction
origins. So, a certain business area can have more than one proIit center within it.
Both have their unique uses and both have their unique Ieatures.
Using the above understanding, you can easily work out where you would use
business centers and where you would use proIit centers.
Hope this clears,
1acob 1oseph
Thanks Ior the explanation its good thanks
Sabarinathan Swaminathan
Creating and Maintain SAP Business Area
You can set up several business areas Ior each client so that the system can assign the
postings made in all company codes deIined in this client.
To ensure consistency in document entry, you should give business areas the same
name in all company codes.
Goto transaction SM30 and speciIy the view V%GSB
To maintain to business area click the Maintain button.
Fastest way to create a SAP Company Code
SAP recommends that you used EC01 to copy an existing company code to a new
one.
This has the advantage that you also copy the existing company code-speciIic
parameters.
II necessary, you can then change certain data in the relevant application.
This is much less time-consuming than creating a new company code.
Following are the steps to create a new company code:-
Use EC01 to copy an existing company code. This will ensure that you will not
missed out any customizing settings.
Tcode is OX02 or Goto tcode SPRO
SPRO -~ SAP ReI IMG -~ Enterprise Structure-~ DeIinition -~ Financial Accounting
-~ Edit,Copy, Delete, Check Company code
OKKP - Assign company code to the controlling area
OBY6 - DeIine company code global parameters
OB62 - Assign company code to chart oI accounts
Then check the Iollowing iI needed, there may be other areas depending on your
needs:
OBA4 - FI Tolerance Group Ior Users
FBZP - Maintain Payment program
OBYA - Inter Company code clearing iI being used
Meaning and Creation of Company codes
Which is the best method to create a company code.
- copy an existing company code or copying from country templates.
What is the process involved in copying from a country template.
For conIiguring SAP, generally three steps are required
1) create company name and address
2) creation oI company code
3) currency and country setting
4) Assign company code to company
In same organisation i.e. in one company more than two company codes are
maintaing, then its better to copy Irom other company code Irom ec01, later on you
can customised/change speciIic settings according to client requirements.
II your want seperate setting in your own company code, that time its better to
conIigure by creation rather than copy
In above that is your choice and need Ior reqirement.
Otherwise you can upload certain data by creating company code.
Rama Krishna

Now my doubt is What is the Difference between Company and Company Code?
Company is the smallest organizational unit Ior which individual Iinancial statement
can be drawn according to the relevant commercial law.
Company code is the smallest organizational unit Ior which complete, selI-contained
set oI accounts can be drawn up Ior external reporting purposes
Shyam

Company - A company is a legal entity or a organisation which is to carry out a
business and under a company you have lot oI sub companies.
For Example
Tata is a company
TCS,Tata Power,Tata Steel, is a company code under a company TATA
Under Company code you have business area associated with it where the business
areas may be scattered in diIIerent parts oI the world where you can have reporting
done Ior diIIerent business area or you can also call it as ProIit Centre.
Sakote Sanjay

A company is the Group oI company and company code is the all the companies Ior
which u want seperate books oI accounts. Company codes are assigned to company
Ior consolidation purpose.
example :- reliance is the company
and RIL,Reliance inIocomm,Reliance Petrochem etc are the company codes.
All these co.codes are assigned to reliance company Ior consolidation purpose.
Gagan

Along with that technical diIIerence is COMPANY cosists oI 6 digit alphanumeric
key where as COMPANY CODE cosists oI 4 digit alphanumeric key.
Mahesh

Company means group company Ior example : Tata Group
Company code means one oI the company oI its group ex:
Tata Chemicals, TCS, Tata Steels etc.
Kris
What is Valuation Area and Valuation Class
By: Tulsi
What is Valuation Area? How is it linked with Valuation Class? What is the
significance of Valuation Area?
Valuation areas are nothing but the level at which you want to valuate your materials.
SAP provides two levels oI valuation Plant level and company code level.
For example:
Valuation at plant level: Suppose you have two plants one in Hissar and one in
Andhra Pradesh, Then oI course you would like to valuate the rawmaterials at plant
level as because you have got transportation cost and taxes etc to account Ior.
Valuation at company code level:Here you valuate all your material in same way.
In One client valuation areas can either be set to plant level or company code level.
Once you have made this setting this cant be changed
Valuation classes are linked to valuation class in Tcode OBYC
II your valuation area is at plant level then in OBYC you will Iind a coloumn Ior
Valuation modiIier you can provide your plant there.
For example:
Valuation Mod Valuation class Account
plant 1 3000 200130
What is valuation class?
Valuation class it is used in FI and MM integration. It determines the g/l accounts to
be posted automatically (Ex Raw materail or Finised goods).
In material master we speciIy valuation class:
- Ior valuation class, we assign g/l accounts based on nature oI transaction,
- at the time oI goods receipt/ issue, stores person enters movement type,
- our a/c's will be updated automatically based on account assignment to valuation
class which is speciIied in material master.
What s Valuation Class. Movement %ypes. %ransactions Key
Valuation class Ior example: Raw material, Iinished goods, semi-Iinished goods and
maintenance parts.

Movement types:
Good receipt movement type101
Good issue to production movement type261
Scrapping oI Good movement type551
Good delivered to customer movement type601
Initial uploading oI sctock movement type561

Transaction key Example BSX inventory posting and GBB
Use the tcode OBYC or OMWB to get the conIiguration screen Ior MM account
assignments.

1) Good receipt against purchase order101
Accounting entry
Inventory raw material (Debit)
GR/IR(good receipt/Invoice receipt) (Credit)
SAP entry
Tcode OBYC or OMWB
you need to update transaction key BSX with the GL code inventory oI raw material
account.
Double clik to BSX and select valuation modiI.and valuation class.
For GR/IR you need to select the transaction key WRX
2) Good issue to order movement type261
Accounting entry
Raw material consumption(Debit)
Inventory oI raw material (Credit)
SAP entry
The transaction key GBB need to be updated, is issued Ior various oIIsetting posting
entries. Select debit/credit indicator, general modiIication indicator, valuation modiI
and valuation class indicator. In this case you need to update the transaction key VBR
with the raw material consumption account.
3) Good receipt is made Ior Iinished good against production order
Accounting entry
Finished good (Debit)
Change in Iinished good (Credit)
SAP entry
in transactionkey BSX the valuation class Iinished good will attach with the Iinished
good GL code. For change in Iinished good you update transaction key GBB and
general modiIication key AUF
4) Good issues are posted Ior sales movement type601
Accounting entry
Cost oI Good Sold (Debit)
inventory oI Finished Goods (Credit)
SAP entry
For cost oI good sold transaction key GBB is updated with general modiIication key
VAX
5) Good issues Ior Sampling Quality movement type331
Accounting entry
Raw material consumption (Debit)
Inventory raw material (Credit)
SAP Entry
Raw material consumption is attached to transaction key GBB and general
modiIication key VQP is used.
6) FI-SD Account determination
Accounting entry
Customer/AR (Debit)
Revenue Account (credit)
you have to bear in mind that the customer account gets Irom customer master data,
all you need is to conIigurate the revenue account. SAP provides Iollowing 6 ways oI
determining the GL accounts in SD.
- Appliation (key Ior sd application)
- account determination types
- chart oI accounts(Irom FI system)
- Customer account assignment group
- Material account assignment group
- Account key
TcodeVKOA
Maintain the GL account Ior the combination oI Material group/account key
Double click and select new entry.
enter GL account
enter chart oI account
enter material group
enter account key
enter condition type
enter application
enter sales org
click save.
That's the system look into this table see the combination and iI the relevant
combination exists in tne transaction it will debit the customer account and credit the
revenue account deIined.
nter-company Clearing with Customer / Vendor Posting Keys
xplain the clearing process for inter-company between two company codes within
ECC using customer and vendor posting keys.
You can post the cross company code postings even between two controlling areas.
The system does not prevent to post documents between two company codes in two
controlling area. Need not necessarily they should be under one operating concern.
Provided you have to make sure that you have Iollowed the Iollowing points:
In OBY6 - To company codes must be assigned to same Company, meaning that you
mus thave created a Company and that company must have been assigned to these two
company codes.
OBYA - You should maintain the clearing accounts in both the company codes.
Meaning that you are posting one leg in one company code and the other leg in the
other company. ThereIore, it is required to have the missing legs in each company
code.
Company Code1 - Posting Key 40 - Clearing Account
Company Code1 - Posting Key 50 - Clearing Account
Company Code2 - Positng Key 40 - Clearing Account
Company Code2 - Posting Key 50 - Clearing Account
NOTE: Need not necessarily you have to use posting keys 40 and 50, you can use the
posting keys related to vendor and customer also.
OB08 - In case iI the two company codes have diIIerent local (company code)
currencies, you may maintain the exchange rates.
You can now go to F-02 and post a cross company code transaction giving the Iirst leg
in Iirst company code and the second leg in second company code.
Missing leg in the Iirst company code will be posted to the GL Account mentioned in
OBYA and the missing leg in the second company code will be posted to the GL
Account mentioned in OBYA. That means you will have Iour line items overall.
The system will post three document.
Document 1 in First Company Code
Document 2 in Second Company Code
and
Document3 - Cross Company Code Document.
The cross company code document consists oI the Iirst company code document
number plus company code plus last two digits oI the Iiscal year.
Company Code ot Assigned to Country
Getting an error while posting GL A/c i:e FSOO.
%he Error is "Company code not assigned to country or country to calculation
procedure".
Do the Following Customisation :

Step 1: Check Calculation Procedure
IMG ~Financial Accounting~Financial Accounting Global Settings ~Tax on
Sales/Purchases~Basic Settings ~Check Calculation Procedure

Tax procedures are available in SAP Ior most oI the countries. In case a tax procedure
is not deIined Ior your country proceed as Iollows:

In this go to DeIine Procedures Check Ior TaxINJ or TaxIN

II it does not exist create a new one by copying it Irom TaxGB

Step 2: Assign Country to CalculationProcedure
IMG ~Financial Accounting~Financial Accounting Global Settings ~Tax on Sales /
Purchases ~ Basic Settings ~Check Calculation Procedure

In this step we assign the calculation procedure created in the earlier step to the
country. The country is the country oI the company code.

II you are living in India, then your country oI the company code is India.

Step 3. DeIine TaxCodes Ior Sales and Purchases
IMG~Financial Accounting~Financial Accounting Global Settings ~Tax Ior Sales and
on Sales/Purchases ~Calculation~DeIine Tax Codes

Update the Iollowing:-

DeIine two Zero Tax Codes input and Output Tax codes.

Go to OB40 Transaction code and Assign GL Account.

Do this your problem will be solved.


Report to see Business Area with Cost Center
Which tcode standard report to see Business Area with cost center created in my
company?
Used tr code : KSB1

On screen 'Display Actual Cost Line Items Ior Cost Centers, enter cost criteria to
limit the report. To Iurther restrict the inIormation in the report choose the 'Further
Selection Criteria button.
The Iollowing screen will appear:

Under org. unit double click Business Area.

Entering Exchange Rate
You used OB0 to enter the exchange rate ratio (Irom) and ration (to).
There are three type oI Exchange rate :-
1. EURO Euro Dollar
2. M Standard translation at average rate
3. R Exchange rate Ior currency revaluation
Change in Company Code Currency
You are a live site in China using company code currency as "RMB". %he client
would like to change the same to "1PY". How to achieve the same and the
impact of the same?
This will be a big task Ior you.
We did the same proiect beIore.
What's your strategy?
You`ll use the same client Ior the new currency, or you`ll have a brand new one.
What we`ve done beIore was creating a brand new environtment.
These were our strategies :
1. copied all the customization in a new client, no transactions and no master datas. so
you`ll have the same settings
with your live system.
2. created a new company code with the new currency, and copy all the
customization. this step was to minimize our
step in recustomization.
3. uploaded all the master datas...and started to do a new transaction. thats what we
did. and Iortunately our client
was satisIied w our iob:D
The suggestion is don't do that in a live system or else you`ll have a big problem then.
Explain %he Difference n Currency
Explain the difference between group currency. parellel currency. hard currency
and index based currency. Explain the context in which we use these.
DeIinition Ior diIIerent currencies:
Obiect currency - CO - A currency deIined in the master record oI a Controlling
obiect (cost center, internal order, and
so on). When you create a Controlling obiect, the controlling area currency is
deIaulted as the obiect currency. You can change this.
Transaction Currency - the currency in which a business transaction is processed and
booked. The business transaction can be posted in the transaction currency as well as
in the local currency. This can occur when the trading partners use diIIerent local
currencies. The transaction currency can diIIer Irom the controlling area currency and
the obiect currency. The SAP system can perIorm currency translations using a
predeIined average exchange rate.
Hard currency - Hard Currencies are used in countries with high inIlation to improve
the value oI transaction. When a
hard currency is selected, the document is automatically updated in the local currency
and the hard currency. The conIig Ior hard currency is done at the country level
Group Currency - Group currencies are deIined at the client level in table T000.
Group currencies are used to enable
cross-company postings in controlling Ior company codes that use diIIerent company
code currencies.
Index Based Currency - Index based currencies are used Ior statutory reporting
purposes Ior subsidiaries in some countries
that have an extreme amount oI inIlation.
Parallel currency - For company code, we may have one local currency and up to two
parallel currencies in the system. All
documents are posted in both the local and parallel currencies. A hard currency is one
type oI parallel currency.

Currency Decimals Default and Places in SAPr3
What are the list of countries in R/3 which do not have decimals in their
currencies?
By : Norman
Depending upon client's requirement, you can set the control oI currency decimals in
oy04.
In the DB, SAP stores all amount values with 2 decimal places. But when SAP reads
it, it interprets it based on the currency associated with the amount Iield.
Try the FM BAPICURRENCYCONVTOEXTERNAL. Pass the amount
obtained Irom DB and the currency. This will give you back the actual interpreted
value.
Which table we can get the number of decimal places for a particular currency
type?
Eg: USD has decimals
1PY has 0 decimals
Check the table TCURX.
Based on user proIile you can get the currency Iormat Irom USR01.
Use This Code: It takes care oI decimal notation based on user proIile.
What ever may be the user proIile Ior decimal notation.
FIELDNUM 1,233.50
OR
FIELDNUM 1.233,50
OR
FIELDNUM 1 233,50
***************************************
SELECT SINGLE DCPFM FROM USR01
INTO VARDCPFM WHERE BNAME EQ SY-UNAME.
IF VARDCPFM EQ 'X'.
REPLACE ALL OCCURRENCES OF ',' IN: FIELDNUM WITH ''.
TRANSLATE FIELDNUM USING ','.
ELSEIF VARDCPFM EQ ''.
REPLACE ALL OCCURRENCES OF '.' IN: FIELDNUM WITH ''.
TRANSLATE FIELDNUM USING '.'.
TRANSLATE FIELDNUM USING ',.'.
ELSEIF VARDCPFM EQ 'Y'.
TRANSLATE FIELDNUM USING ',.'.
ENDIF.
***************************************
This code will result into :
FIELDNUM 1233.50
How %o Set Multiple Currencies For Company Code or Group
Go to OY01
Select your country key and double click on it.
In that mention your hard currency key and index based currency keys.
Then go to ob22
IMG Menu Path: Financial Accounting --~ Financial Accounting Global Settings --~
Company Code --~ Parallel Currencies --~ DeIine Additional Local Currencies
Give currencies Ior 2nd and 3rd local currencies.
Here you need to give 40 in the 2nd local currency and 50 Ior the 3rd local currency.
Exch Rate type: M
Source Curency : 1
Type oI transalation: 2
SAVE
Remarks:
I am going through a decision process right now with my client regarding this
conIiguration. When my client Iirst came up on SAP 9 yrs. ago, they only had 1
currency. Since then they have made acquisitions and now have multiple company
codes with diIIerent currencies. What I have Iound out is that once you set up a
Company code Ior only one currency you cannot turn on Multiple/Parallel currencies
in that company code. Fixed Assets are aIIected and so are all the AP & AR
transactions. AR & AP can run into issues when it attempt to create and additional
posting to the Group Currency because oI Exchange Rate diIIerences.
In my opinion, I beieve it was a maior mistake not to have turned on Additional Local
Currencies Irom the beginning. What this does is allows you to establish a "Group
Currency" in the FI Module. In table GLT0 you can see that there are columns way
out to the right when you view postings via SE16 in columns titled AMOUNT. These
are the group currency postings. You can then generate reports that pull this detail Ior
consolidated reporting.
Real %ime Foreign Currency Revaluation

Explain about the entire real time process for month end for foreign currency
revaluation.
By: Murthy
Let me explain the process in Detail. First you need to understand Process oI
Revaluation. I am not going into Customisation Paths.
Valuating Foreign Currency Balance Sheet Accounts Your Ioreign currency balance
sheet accounts are valuated as part oI the Ioreign currency valuation:
- The balance oI the Ioreign currency balance sheet account, that is, the balance oI the
G/L account managed in a Ioreign currency, Iorms the basis oI the valuation.
- The result oI the valuation is posted to the valuated account.
- The exchange rate proIit or loss Irom the valuation is posted to a separate expense or
revenue account Ior exchange rate diIIerences as an oIIsetting posting.
llustrations
The balance oI your Iixed term deposit account (Ioreign currency balance sheet
account) has a balance oI 1000 USD and 1700 DEM (see the Iollowing illustration,
1).
An exchange rate devaluation occurs at the time oI the valuation.
The account balance is now valuated with an exchange rate oI 1.6300.
The valuation programs posts the exchange rate diIIerence to the Iixed term deposit
account and to the account Ior exchange rate diIIerences (see Iollowing illustration,
2).

As a result oI the valuation, a diIIerence arises in your local currency. However, only
postings in the Ioreign currency speciIied in the master record (account currency) are
permitted to Ioreign currency balance sheet accounts. The exchange rate diIIerence is
thereIore posted with a Ioreign currency amount oI zero, and a local currency amount
equal to the exchange rate diIIerence.
To valuate your Ioreign currency balance sheet accounts, you must deIine expense
and revenue accounts Ior exchange rate diIIerences.
Valuation of open items in foreign currencies
All open items in Ioreign currency are valuated as part oI the Ioreign currency
valuation:
- The individual open items oI an account in Ioreign currency Iorm the basis oI the
valuation, that is, every open item oI an account in Ioreign currency is valuated
individually.
- The total diIIerence Irom all the open items in an account is posted to a Iinancial
statement adiustment account. The account thereIore retains its original balance.
- The exchange rate proIit or loss Irom the valuation is posted to a separate expense or
revenue account Ior exchange rate diIIerences as an oIIsetting posting.
llustrations
You have posted a receivable in the amount oI 1000 USD, at an exchange rate oI
1.7000. The local currency is DEM. The system saves the receivable in local currency
in the customer and receivables accounts (1700 DEM) (see Iollowing illustration, 1).
An exchange rate devaluation occurs at the time oI the valuation and the exchange
rate is now 1.6300. The receivable in the amount oI 1700 DEM remains in the
receivables account. The program posts the reduction to the receivable (70 DEM) to a
Iinancial statement adiustment account and the exchange rate diIIerence to the
account Ior exchange rate diIIerences Irom the valuation as an oIIsetting posting (see
Iollowing illustration, 2).
The receivables account and the relevant Iinancial statement adiustment account are
reported in one item in the Iinancial statements. This means that the amount oI the
receivable in the Iinancial statements is the valuated amount (1630 DEM).
To valuate your Ioreign currency balance sheet accounts, you must deIine certain
accounts.
You deIine these accounts per reconciliation account:
- Expense and revenue accounts Ior the exchange rate diIIerences Irom the valuation.
- A Iinancial statement adiustment account, reported in one Iinancial statement item
with the valuated account. The valuation is thereIore not carried out in the account
itselI; instead, it is posted to a separate account. This is necessary Ior example, since
the accounts Ior receivables and payables are only updated by postings to the
customer and vendor accounts. However, the valuation must be carried out in the G/L
account area Ior the relevant reconciliation accounts.
When carrying out a valuation oI open items, you can conIigure account
determination according to the currency type, so that, Ior example, currency gains in
the local currency and in the group currency are posted to separate accounts.
You have the Iollowing options Ior valuating open items in Ioreign currency:
- Saving the exchange rate diIIerence per document
You can deIine that in addition to being posted, the exchange rate diIIerences are
saved per document.
To do this, select the indicator Valuation Ior FS preparations on the Postings tab.
The exchange rate diIIerences saved in the document are taken into account Ior
payment clearing:
- Unrealized exchange rate diIIerences
When you valuate open items in Ioreign currency, the exchange rate diIIerence
determined is posted as an unrealized exchange rate diIIerence.
- Realized exchange rate diIIerences
For an incoming payment, that is, when you are clearing the open items, the current
exchange rate is determined. The unrealized exchange rate diIIerence determined
Irom the line item is taken into account.
Example
II the Iirst valuation results in an exchange rate diIIerence oI 30 DEM, and the current
valuation results in an exchange rate diIIerence oI 10 DEM, an exchange rate
diIIerence oI 20 DEM is posted and 10 DEM is saved in the line item as the Iinal
valuation diIIerence.
- Reversing exchange rate diIIerence postings
You can deIine that the exchange rate diIIerences posted are automatically reversed
one day aIter the valuation run by an inverse posting.
You thereIore have the option oI determining exchange rate diIIerences at any point in
time without this valuation being taken into account Ior the creation oI Iinancial
statements or Ior payment clearing.
To do this, select the indicator Reverse postings on the Postings tab.
F Document: List of Update %erminations
To analyze the FI update error posting, make use oI report RFVBER00, FI
Document: list oI update termination.
Execute the report with transaction code SA3 or SE3.
CO-PA %ransfer of ncoming Sales Orders
-----Original Message-----
Subiect: CO-PA TransIer oI Incoming Sales Orders
From: sarita
Hi,
In IMG, I assigned
1. value Iields
2. quantity Iields
and activated transIer oI incoming sales orders Ior "CO-PA transIer oI Incoming Sales
Orders".
In CO-PA inIormation system, I deIined and executed a report (record type A, actual
data). The actual line item showed revenue amount 36,000. But when I drilled down
to the value Iields. The system showed revenue 0.
Do I miss something in ConIiguration?
Best regards,
Sarita
P.S As we are not implement PP/PC, I do not maintain "valuation using prodcut cost
estimates" in CO-PA conIiguration.
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: Re: CO-PA TransIer oI Incoming Sales Orders
From: Peter Fisher
Sarita...
As the data is appearing in the PA tables but not on yr report. One last thing that you
can check is the whether the report is looking at current data or a 'summarisation
level'. II you are only looking at the data Im summarisation levels , then you will need
to reIresh the data in the summarisation levels by running transaction KEDU.
Otherwise any new delta items will not appear in yr report.
Check this in Report change / extras / perIormance (v4.0a) or summarisation in V3.
Peter Fisher
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: Re: CO-PA TransIer oI Incoming Sales Orders
From: Izi Rozov
Dear Sarita,
Is your operating concern costing based or account based ?
I can't think oI anything else.
iust to make sure lets go step by step:
1. There are transactions in the system.
2. The report is created as Iollows:
characteristic customer
Key Iigure revenue, COGS, order qty
variables period Irom xx.199x
period to xx.199x
Plan/act.ind. 0
version not
applicable Ior actual
record type A
3. Value and quantity Iields were assigned in IMG under ACTUAL POSTING --~ SD
INTERFACE.
II all the above is true and it still doesn't work, you should kick the computer in the
b...
Izi
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: Re: CO-PA TransIer oI Incoming Sales Orders
From: sarita
Dear Izi,
Thanks Ior your help.
You mean, on your report , it also does not work with record type "A"? On my report,
no matter with record type "A" or "F", it does not work. For you inIormation, I
created a new report on IDEA (SAP demo system) with the same settings, it works
with record type "A" and "F". So it might not cause by the record type.
Sarita
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: Re: CO-PA TransIer oI Incoming Sales Orders
From: Izi Rozov
Hi Sarita,
The problems lies in the way you created the report. It is obvious that the system
works. You did pick up the revenue.
Did you create a basic report or a Iorm report ? II the problem persists, send me a
detailed description oI each line and
each column and I'll try to Iind the solution.
Izi Rozow
Difference between Withholding %axes and Extended %axes
What is the difference between Withholding %axes and Extended Withholding
%axes?
Please read this Ior the same. I have mentioned prominant diIIerence between the two.
Withholding Tax
Classic Withholding Tax (All release)
Extended Withholding Tax (Irom release 4)
DiIIerence between the two
S.No Individual Function Classic
Extended
1 Withholding Tax on Outgoing payment
Yes Yes
2 TDS on Incoming
payment Yes
3 TDS at the time oI
Invoice Yes
4 TDS on partial payment Yes
5 No. oI withholding tax Irom each document Max
1 Several
6 TDS basis
- Net amount Yes
Yes
-Gross amount
Yes Yes
-Tax amount
x Yes
7 Rounding
rule Yes
8 Cash discount
consideration Yes
9
Accumulation Yes
10 Minimum/Maximum amt and
exemption Yes
11 CertiIication
Numbering Yes
12 Calculation Formula
Yes Yes
SAP F %ips by : Kapil
Withholding tax is calculated and posted to the appropriate withholding tax accounts
at diIIerent stages, depending on the legal requirements in each country. As a rule,
withholding tax is posted at the same time that the payment is posted, in other words
the outgoing payment (Accounts Payable) or incoming payment (Accounts
Receivable), is reduced by the withholding tax amount.
In certain countries, such as Brazil, the Philippines, and Spain, withholding tax can or
must be posted when the invoice is posted. This means that the amount receivable or
payable is reduced by the withholding tax amount.
Extended withholding tax supports both concepts.
The key concept in extended withholding tax is the distinction between withholding
tax type and withholding tax code. While withholding tax types represent basic
calculation rules, speciIic Ieatures oI these rules - in particular the percentage rate -
are represented by the withholding tax code. You can deIine any number oI
withholding tax codes Ior a given withholding tax type.
II a particular transaction requires more than one kind oI withholding tax, this is
covered in the SAP System by deIining more than one withholding tax type.
When entering a line item, you can enter withholding tax data Ior each oI these
withholding tax types.
SAP F %ips by : Rahul Gupta
How %o Configure Withholding %ax?
Steps Ior extended withholding tax :
1. Check withholding tax countries
2. DeIine Ex. Withholding tax types Ior invoice postings
3. DeIine Ex. Withholding tax codes
4. Formula Ior Ex. Withholding tax calculation
5. Assign Ex. Withholding tax types to Company code
6. Activate Ex. Withholding tax
8. Create a G/L a/C Ior Ex. Withholding tax
9. DeIine A/C Ior Ex. Withholding tax (DBWW)
10. Make changes in Vendor master (XK02)
11. Maintain Company Code Settings:
Path: IMG -~ Logistic -~ General -~ Taxes on goods movement -~ India -~ Maintain
company code settings
12. Activate country version Ior speciIic Iiscal year position
Path: IMG -~ FA -~ -~ FAGS -~ Taxes on sales purchases -~ Basic Setting -~ India -
~ Activate country speciIic Ior Iiscal year position
%ips by Pratiksha
What is Central Value-added %ax and how it is configured?
What is CEVA% (Central Value-added %ax) and how it is configured?
Anil
BeIore I am going to explain what is cenvat, you have to under stand the Indian tax
Central Excise Duty (BED). It is called as basic excise duty. Every manuIacturer is
liable to pay the excise duty in various kinds namely Basic Excise Duty, Special
Excise Duty, Additional Excise Duty etc.,
Just think over a product which is reached to a end user, how many manuIacturing
activities are done. So to reduce the tax burden oI the end user, the Govt. oI India
introduce the MODVAT scheme which is now called CENVAT scheme.
Based on this, iI any manuIacturer purchased a material, which is duty paid, and iI it
is used Ior his Iurther manuIacturing activity, he can avail this as credit in his book
based on the Central Excise Invoice. At the time oI selling his manuIactured goods,
he is liable to pay the excise duty. He can adiust the credit which he has taken into his
book and pay the rest. For example:
CENVAT availed at the time purchased various goods Rs.20,000 (EXcise duty
alone)
CENVAT payable Ior his product at the time sales Rs.25,000
He will pay only Rs.5000 through cash deposit in PLA.
This customizing are in SAP CIN Module. II you are having the CIN CD, go
through.
K. SUDAR
Good Explanation. In addition to this. The CENVAT means, Tax on Value Addition
on the goods manuIactured according to Central Excise & Customs Act DiIinition.
Here the value addition means the Additional Services/Activities etc. which converts
the Input in to Output, and the output is newly recognised as per the this act as
Exciseble goods. Like this the discussion
is goes on Ior deIinition.
In 4.7 SAP version, there is no CIN version seperately, it is available with Standard
SAP it selI.
I hope Mr. Anil Guriar's query is completely answered.
Kotni Ravi Kumar
Entering nvoice Receitps for PO
The Invoice VeriIication component is part oI the Materials Management (MM)
system. It provides the link between the MM component and the Financial
Accounting, Controlling, and Asset Accounting components.
Invoice VeriIication in Materials Management serves the Iollowing purposes:
- It completes the materials procurement process - which starts with the purchase
requisition, continues with purchasing and
goods receipt and ends with the invoice receipt
- It allows invoices that do not originate in materials procurement (Ior example,
services, expenses, course costs, etc.) to be
processed
- It allows credit memos to be processed, either as invoice cancellations or discounts
Invoice VeriIication does not handle the payment or the analysis oI invoices. The
inIormation required Ior these processes is passed on to other departments.
Invoice VeriIication tasks include:
- Entering invoices and credit memos that have been received
- Checking the accuracy oI invoices with respect to contents, prices, and arithmetic
- Executing the account postings resulting Irom an invoice
- Updating certain data in the SAP system, Ior example, open items and material
prices
- Checking invoices that were blocked because they varied too greatly Irom the
purchase order
An example on how to enter an Invoice Receipts :-
Transaction code MRHR - MM Invoice VeriIication and Material Valuation
First Screen
Document date : Date oI PO Company code :
Document type : There are two standard document types in the standard system:
RE - The invoice is posted gross
R - The invoice is posted net
Posting date : Date oI open period Currency :
Purchase Order : PO Number
Second Screen
Posting
Amount : Enter the gross invoice amount Tax code :
Enter and then click Simulate button
Click Adjustment on/off button
Click Edit -> ew item -> G/L Account
a) Enter the G/L Account Number and click whether Debit or Credit
b) Enter the Amount and Cost Center
Repeat Step a) and b) iI you have additional G/L Account Number
There must be no Variance and Balance must always be ZERO beIore you can save
the entries.

Using 1099 MSC Reporting
In order to use 1099 MISC reporting is something that needs to be conIigured or set
up in the vendor master records? I am trying to run the report and I don't get
anything.

To Ilag a vendor in SAP as a 1099 vendor, two Iields need to be populated.
1. On the Control screen oI the vendor master, populate either "Tax Code 1" Iield with
his social security number iI his social security number is his tax id. or "Tax Code 2"
Iield with his corporate tax id. iI he has been issued a corporate tax id. Input either oI
the two in their correct Iormat i.e. social security as xxx-xx-xxxx or corporate id as
xx-xxxxxxx.
2. On the Accounting InIo. screen, populate the "W.tax code" Iield under the
"Withholding Tax" box with the value "07" iI it is a US vendor or "42" iI it is a
Ioreign vendor.
These are the two Iields that speciIy a vendor as being a 1099 vendor.
Any posts done beIore this changes were implemented will not show on 1099.
You will need to run program RFWT0020 to Ilag 1099 items retroactively.
...and/or you can change the "Document Change rules" Ior BSEG-QSSHB and BESG-
QSSKZ Ior account type "K" so that you can change the Withholding tax code aIter
the line item has been cleared (i.e. aIter entering the required inIormation in the
vendor master record as the user above has recommended) (ReIer to OSS Note:
363650).
But iI you use MIRO to post invoices, you might want to look at Note 482245 too...
In SAP v40b, the new 1099 report is RFW1099M. It is a neat report since it merges
all the three reports that are listed in the AP inIo system under the withholding tax.

In my system the witholding tax code Iield shows only one option Y (back-Up
Witholding) instead oI 7 and 42. ALso it gives me message "Extended witholding tax
Iunctionality is not active".
Do I miss some settings on the global level, or I iust need to update the vendor master
records?
We are on 40b. II you do not have any w.tax code, you can create them in Tcode
OBC7. But I have seen standard w.tax code on this screen provided by SAP. Pl. note
that you may only be able to see the w.tax code on the vendor master iI you are in
change mode. For some unknown reason, when you are in display mode, SAP tells
you that there are no w.tax codes.
The Iirst report in 4.0b gives all the correct 1099 vendor numbers as well as the error
list oI incorrect vendor numbers.
The second report gives all the 1099 line items by vendor posted during the year.
The third report lets you print the actual Iorm Ior IRS/vendors and also lets you send
the Iile electronically to IRS.

You mentioned running RFWT0020 - what exactly does this do? I have the same
problem that our A/P staII did not update some vendors with the appropriate 1099
data. Now we are getting the data needed - I usually have someone in our IT dept.
create a spool manually Ior those vendors. Will the program above update our
vendors' transactions with 1099 inIo (assuming the vendor master has been updated)?
Yes. This report Ilags all the past vendor line items as 1099 items retroactively. FYI,
we're on 4.0b. One thing that is peculiar about this report is that on the selection
screen, you need to put 00000000 to zzzzzzzzz in the vendor number Iield otherwise it
does not Ilag any records (at least that's what it did with our records).
Simple Overview of Product Costing
SAP Product Costing deals with Plan Costing Actual Costing oI Finish products or
Services.
CO comprises Product Costing cost accounting integrated with FI.
It uses Integrated Cost Accounting.
Product costing also has 2 phases depending on the MIg Scenarios. II you are a
normal mIg comp, making goods to stock & sale, you have to Iirst do planning oI the
costs oI products initilally as a STD COST oI a product. This is used in many phases
in SAP CO acounting. In simple terms, you cost a product by diIIerent methods
depending on diIIerent LIFE CYCLE phases oI product. These are Development oI
new product. Growth stage by modiIying it. Mature stage (mass prod). Decline
Retirement oI that product Irom MIgMktng)
The whole CO process starts with this PLANNED costs oI products & ends with
totalling the STD Costs Ior Actual Production.
This is a simple Std cost Accounting system, in which the end result is calculating
Variance bet Planned & Actual & analysing those Ior Iurther corrective actions.
Product costing is well integrated to FI, but only where overhead cost accounting is
used. Otherwise normally it used only Ior settlement.
All these actual costs oI Prod are Iinally settled/oIIset to FI or ProIitability segments.
SAP CO is a very vast & complicated module oI all. It needs deep understanding oI
the subiect.
This give you an overview glimpse oI SAP CO.
Difference between Cost Centers and nternal Orders
Would any one please tell me that
1. What is the basic difference between Cost Centers and nternal orders?
. understand that their functionality is same like assessments. distribution etc.
then why there are divided into Cost Centers and nternal orders?
3. How the data flows from Cost Centers and nternal Orders? ie is it first into
nternal orders then to Cost Centers or Vice versa? or else the data is maintained
independently?
4. Does settlement means running the Assessment cycle and distibuting the costs
to various cost centers from an internal order?
5. How you determine the cost of an Order or cost for an order? ie how an Cost
in Order is determined?
A cost center as you will know is Ior Iixed reporting Ior a long time span as part oI
your company structure (cost center usually department or work center).
An internal order is used to accumulate cost Ior a speciIic proiect or task Ior a speciIic
time period. An internal order is thereIore used Ior a short period with a speciIic
deadline.
Your internal order will usually settle to cost centers (and not visa versa) according to
the settlement rule in the order setup.
An internal order can thereIore be used to group all the expenses incurred to plan and
hold a conIerence over a 3 month period. The order can be settled on a monthly basis
to cost centers.
When the conIerence is Iinished the order can be settled Iinally. The cost oI the
conIerence will then be spread over 2 or more cost centers, but can be viewed in total
on the internal order when needed.

It is important to understand the diIIerence between a settlement and an assessment
cycle. An assessment cycle distributes costs Irom one cost center to various other cost
centers. You cannot assess Irom a cost center to an internal order nor visa versa.
Assessment cycles are only between cost centers.
Settlements are used Ior orders. In the setup oI each order is a "settlement rule". In
this settlement rule you tell the system to which cost centers the cost in the order must
be settled.
Typically, you will execute the Iollowing procedure at month-ends:
1. Settle all orders - this will settle all costs on orders to cost centers.
2. Run assessment cycles - Now that you have al costs against cost centers Irom your
orders, you can start distributing costs between cost centers with assessments.
Costs are posted to an order. When you process a purchase order you post to the
internal order and not to a cost center. The same applies to iournals in FI. You will
post the costs to the order and not to a cost center. You will then settle the order on
month-ends to post to the relevant cost centers. It is very important to settle these
orders otherwise FI and CO will not
balance on your system.
Internal orders can also be used as "statistical" orders. This is also speciIied in the
setup oI the order. You do not have to settle statistical orders. When posting costs, you
will post to the cost center and the order simultaneously. Both have to be speciIied
when posting iournals or purchase orders against statistical orders.
Populating %ransaction %ype during Order Settlement
You have an internal order that you want to settle to a balance sheet account.
%his accounts field status makes the transaction type (BSEG-BEWAR) required.
During settlement you receive error message F5 0 stating that this field is
status initial but the field is required. %his field is not available to you in the
settlement rule definition. s it possible that this field is suppressed? You could
not locate a means to display or require it if so. You attempted to resolve this
using a substitution that would popluate the transaction type field. However.
during execution you did not hit the breakpoint you put into the user exit. How
to overcome this issue?
You can change the requirement oI the Iield in the "Field Status" oI the account
(Financial Accounting -~ General Ledger Accounting -~ Business Transaction -~ G/L
Account Posting -~ Carry Out and Check Documents Settings -~ Maintain Field
Status Variants)
or
In transaction OB41 where you deIine posting keys and its "Field status". Both "Field
Status" are maybe diIIerents, but iI in one oI them the Iield is like "required entry"
you have to change it. But iI you are posting a Iixed asset account, you will need this
Iield completed because it deIines the movement you are making.
What is Production Order Settlement?
Settlement is nothing but oIIsetting the costs to the FI portion. CO obiects carry costs,
which needs to be re-assignd to the G/L accounts where it comes Irom.
CO never generates any data, it only tracks the same onto some obiects which are
analysed Ior deIinite purpose oI tracking the resources which are debits in FI as costs
in G/L).
In simple words, the Ilow is like Iollowing -
1. Direct Costs are incurred ( like material consuption ) in Iorm oI issues to prod
orders. These are captured in G/L. Whenever you issue, consumption account is
debited. But are also debited to prod order as
Consumption...Dr
Inventory.......Cr
2. Indirect costs are incurred in Iorm oI debits to Cost centers in G/Ls. These are
actually to be allocated & absorbed in Products via Prod Orders. So it is allocated to
prod orders via diII media like costing sheet or Indirect activity allocations.
Here again Prod order is debited with some amount.
When the costs are incurred these should be transIIered Iuther when the order is
closed or deliverd to stock.
So whenever you deliver the order, the Iollwing entry is generated-
Inventory....Dr
Cost oI Prod /MIg Variance.....Cr
II your Fin Goods' predetermined cost are same as that oI actual costs incurred, there
will no price diIIerence account aIIected. But when your plan cost ( target cost ) &
actual costs are diIIernet, the diIIerence is OFFSET or SETTELLED
to price diII accout as-
Cost oI Prod / MIg Var....Dr
Price diII acc..........Cr
Note that Price diII accont is not created as COST ELEMENT.
II actual cost is less than target cost, entry would be reverse.
How does one Deactivate a Cost Center
How does one Deactivate a Cost Center?
can find a tcode to Activate an nactive one but how do deactivate a CC. Or is
it so simple cannot see it...
Marios
Go to KS02- Change Cost Center. Go to the Control Tab. Tick on the checkbox Ior
desired transaction activity you want to lock. Any postings made against the cost
center under locked activity/ies will not be allowed.
%iongco. 1ezel D.
Thank you, I knew I could block the postings but I want to somehow make the Cost
Center Look Inactive.
To explain:
In transaction OKEON (Change Standard Hierarchy) I have Green Dots Ior Active
CC's. The legend (attached) says a Red Dot is Ior Inactive CC's.
How do you do that?
Marios
Hi Marios, II you want to change the status to inactive, the only optioin as Iar as my
knowledge is concerned is to change the validity period. when you double click the
cost centre, details oI cost centre will be displayed at the bottom by T code OKEON
and you will Iind the status oI cost centre there, iust right oI that you will Iind button
to change the validity period, change the period to some Iuture date then it turns to
inactive status.
Kittu
Excellent! It works.
Thank you very much.
I had changed the Validity Period beIore but I set it to start right where the previous
time horizon ended so looking in the Iuture this was always active.
Requires an Assignment to a CO Object
%he first time Account 090 was only created in F as a primary expense.
After that this account was created in CO too as a secondary expense and any
posting will appear an error: Account 090 requires an assignment to a CO
object
Question : How to correct this account back to F only and not to appear in co?
ote :
Account 090 requires an assignment to a CO object
Message no. K 35
Diagnosis
You have not defined a CO account assignment for an account that is relevant to
cost accounting.
System Response
Account 090 is defined as a cost element.
%his means that you must always specify a CO account assignment.
Procedure
Enter one of the following CO account assignments
Order
Cost center / cost center/ activity type
Sales order item (for a project or cost relevant)
Project / WBS element
Cost object (Process manufacturing)
etwork/ etwork activities
Business process
Profitability segment
Real estate object
%he posting row affected is 000. account 090.

First, iI G/L account was created in FI, you can only create primary cost element in
CO.
Secondary cost element can only be created iI no account exists in FI.
Second, iI you created the primary or secondary cost element in CO, you have to
assign CO account assignment.
You can delete cost element in CO (KO04) iI dependent obiects Iound.
Third, when you create cost element in CO, documents would be also created in Cost
center accounting` and ProIit center accounting` when posing in FI. II no cost
element exists in CO, no related documents would be created in CCA and PCA.
Difference Between Primary and Secondary Cost Element
Explain the difference between primary and secondary cost element? With an
example.
Primary cost elements are like materail costs, personnel costs, energy costs... where a
corresponding GL account exists in FI..to allow costs to Ilow...
Secondary cost elements are like production costs, material overheads, production
overheads, they can be created and administered in only CO. These are used in
internal cost allocation, overhead calculation, settlement transactions., it does not Ilow
to FI...
General - Cost Element
----------------------------------
Basically, cost element are carriers oI costs.
Primary Cost Element
--------------------------------
When cost element carriers cost between FI and CO they are called Primary, the link
is established GL A/c Cost element(Primary). A question may arise as to whether all
GL accounts are cost element, it again depends upon the business requirement, where
COPA is active then revenue account (GL) are also cost elements, where COPA is not
active then revenue account (GL) should not be made as an cost element.
Example....
Again cost oI goods sold particularly in VAX (make to stock) is not an cost element,
where the same COGS in VAY (make to order) is a cost element. Price DiIIerence
account should not be made as cost element.
Entry while booking expenses
Travel Expenses A/c - with Cost Centre Dr. Rs.YY
(will be a GL A/c and cost element) - entries Ilows to CO thru FI
To Cash A/c Cr. Rs.YY
Secondary Cost Element
-------------------------------------
When cost element carries cost with in CO, then they are called secondary cost
element.
Example.... - Take Product Costing
---------------------------------------------------
On manuIacture oI the goods the cost oI the above product (production order) is
arrived at accumulating material cost operational cost overheads (), additive
cost iI any.
The cost oI operation is accumulated in cost centre be it production / production
service / service cost centres, while booking FI entries.
Those operational cost has to be allocated to production order based on operational
activities carried on and its cost involved in it. Those operation activities in CO are
termed as activity types and has to link the same in KP26 with rates and cost centre
(ie., sender cost centre and receiver production order).
In order to Iind the production order cost, the allocation oI cost Irom sender cost
centre to production order Ior the operational activities carried on and its cost
associated with it, have to be loaded, hence in CO the cost centre allocate that portion
oI operational cost to production order, and this cost is carried by a cost element
(since there are no FI involvement and entries are Ilowing within CO by crediting
sender cost centre and debiting receiver production order a cost element has to be
created.... say "Operational Cost - Activity" the entry will be
Operational Cost - Activity (Production Order) Dr Rs.XX
To Operational Cost - Activity (Cost Centre) Cr Rs.XX
The entries are with in CO. And the cost element created is secondary since it does
not has an link with GL Account in FI correspondingly.
In CO the production order and cost centre are co obiect including but not limited to.
SAP Controlling FAQ
CO%ROLLG
Controlling: Controlling provides you with inIormation Ior management decision-
making. II Iacilitates co-ordination, monitoring and optimization oI all process in an
organization.
Features oI Controlling: Cost Center Accounting, Activity Based Accounting, Internal
Orders, Product Costing, & ProIitability Analysis.
Controlling Area: Organization unit that represents a closed system Used Ior
accounting purposes.
You can assign one or more company codes to one controlling area.
II you assign more than one company code to one controlling area, then you need to
note the Iollowing.
1) Consistent Chart oI a/c`s (Treat each cost element in all company codes in same
way).
2) The Operative Iiscal year variants in the company codes must match the Iiscal year
variant in controlling area.
3) You should execute period end closing in controlling Ior all company codes at
same time.
4) The system only post reconciliation posting across company codes without taxes,
which means that it cannot automatically create invoice.
5) Maintain controlling area - OKKP .
6) Maintain no. ranges Ior controlling documents - KANK
7) Maintain versions - OKEQ
COS% ELEME% ACCOU%G
Cost Elements: Cost Elements Describe the origin oI costs. Cost element classiIies the
organization valuated consumption oI production Iactors within a controlling area.
Primary Cost Elements: These arise through the consumption oI productions Iactors
that are sourced externally. Primary cost elements are used Ior direct posting and must
be accompanied in GL a/c`s in FI.
T-code : KA02 : The categories are Iollows 1) General primary cost element, 03 -
Imputed cost element percentage method 4 - Imputed cost element, target Actual
Method, 11- Revenue elements, & 12 - sales deductions.
Secondary Cost Elements: Cost elements arise through the consumption oI production
Iactor`s that are provided internally i.e., by enterprise itselI. Secondary cost elements
are used strictly Ior internal controlling posting like assessments and settlements. T-
code - ka06
Category: 12 - internal settlements, 31 - Result analyses, 41 - overhead`s, 42 -
assessments etc. Cost Element Group - kah1
COS% CE%ER`S
Cost Center`s: Organizational Unit within a controlling area that represents a deIined
location oI cost incurrence. The deIinition can be based on 1) Functional
Requirement, 2) Allocation criteria, 3) Physical location and 4) Responsibilities Ior
cost.
Change Cost center hierarchy - OKEON
Creation oI Cost Center - KS01
Distribution: Was created to transIer primary costs Irom a sender cost center to
receiving controlling obiects. Distribution is primary cost elements.
DeIine Distribution - KSV1
Execute ' - KSV5
Assessment: Was created to transIer primary and secondary costs Irom a sender cost
center to receiving controlling obiects.
During assessment, the original cost elements are summarized into assessment cost
elements (secondary cost element, category42).
DeIine Assessment - KSU1
Execute Assessment - KSU5
Activity Types: Categorizes productions and services activities provided by a cost
center to the organization and used Ior allocating costs Ior internal activities to the
originates oI the costs.
Creation oI Allocation Cost elements - KA06
Creating/Maintaining the Activity types - KL01
Statistical key Iigures: Are used as the basis (tracing Iactor) on which to make
allocations (assessments & distributions) and to analyze structural key Iigures.
Cost Component Split n FCO
Can someone brief what is cost component split? What config is to be done?
In addition to standard iteration, price calculation enables you to calculate prices as a
cost component split. This means that the output price oI an activity type can be split
into a maximum oI 40 cost components. These cost components represent either:
Individual cost components (such as wages, salaries, or operating supplies) or the
costs oI complete cost centers (such as energy or maintenance cost centers).
The cost component split enables you to analyze which cost components are contained
in the output prices oI the activity types.
You can then control cost elements, cost element groups, and also entire cost centers
in cost component splits. The corresponding cost center costs and the costs oI the cost
centers providing the activity are channeled into this cost component split. For
example, iI you have assigned the salary cost element to component 1 (salaries), then
the system displays the salaries (Ior example, Ior a production cost center) in this cost
component. II a plant maintenance cost center provides services to the production
center, then the salaries Ior the plant maintenance cost center are assigned to this cost
component.
Cost center splitting apportions activity independent costs to the activity types oI the
cost center. It does this by multiplying the total oI the activity independent costs by
the equivalence number oI the activity type, and then dividing by the sum oI the
equivalence numbers. So iI there are two activities, one with equivalence number 1
and the second activity has an eqivalence number oI 2, then 1/3 oI the activity
independent costs will be apportioned to activity one, and 2/3 will be apportioned to
activity two.
Activity independent costs are always Iixed, so any variable costs will need to be
planned as activity dependent costs.
Planned cost center splitting happens automatically when calculating the activity
price. You can view what costs will be apportioned during activity price calculation
by clicking on the Splitting menu item.
've ran cost splitting against one cost centre. For this cost centre know the
planned activity rate (per hour) and the planned quantity (in hours) but the
target cost calculated for the activity is slightly different to the result of these two
multiplied together.
s this calculation correct please?
Planned act. qty in period ( planned act. rate Ior period target costs
II you have only one Activity Ior the cost center, then you do not need to run splitting.
Just run activity price calculation. Splitting is required only iI you are allocating the
same costs to 2 or more activities.
The calculation is generally right. The other thing to check will be rounding oI the
time (mins/hours) and value.
What is Activity %ype and Statistical Key Figure
Activity %ypes
O The activity type classiIies the speciIic activities that are provided by one or
more cost centers within a company.
O II a cost center provides activities Ior other cost centers, orders, processes, and
so on, then this means that its resources are being used. The costs oI these
resources need to be allocated to the receivers oI the activity. Activity types
serve as tracing Iactors Ior this cost allocation.
O In an internal activity allocation, the quantity oI the activity, such as the
number oI repair hours, is entered into the R/3 System. The system calculates
the associated cost based on the activity price and generates a debit to the
receiver and a credit to the sender Ior both the quantity and costs. Internal
activity is allocated using secondary cost elements , which are stored in the
master data oI the activity types as deIault values.
O You can restrict the use oI the activity type to certain types oI cost centers by
entering the allowed cost center categories in the activity type master record.
You can enter up to eight allowed cost center categories, or leave the
assignments "unrestricted" by entering an asterisk (*).
O The activity type category is used to determine whether, and how and activity
type is entered and allocated. For example, you can allow some activities to be
allocated directly, but speciIy Ior others that they are either not allocated, or
allocated indirectly only.
To enable internal activity allocation, you need to speciIy which cost centers provide
which activity types at what price. You do this in the R/3 System by planning the
activity output/prices Ior a cost center. Cost center/activity output planning Iunctions
here in the same way as an additional master record.
For direct activity allocation, you enter the quantity oI the activity to be allocated
manually. To enable both costs and activity to be allocated, the R/3 System has to
valuate the activity quantity allocated at the price speciIied by the sender Ior this
activity type. For a direct activity allocation, the plan price Ior the combination "cost
center/activity type" is used Ior this calculation.
You can enter the planned price either manually, or have it calculated by the system
automatically within planning. II you want to set the price manually, you need to set
the price indicator to 3 (manual). You can use this procedure iI your price calculation
is not complex, Ior example where the prices required Ior your rates are determined
within your organization and do not depend on internally produced activities, or
where the rate depends on the prices oI external suppliers and not on the costs oI the
cost center. Automatic calculation oI plan prices is covered in course AC412.
Statistical Key Figures
O Statistical key Iigures such as number oI employees or length oI phone calls,
are statistical values that describe cost centers, proIit centers, and overhead
orders. They can also describe a value Ior a particular activity provided by a
cost center, such as the number oI employees who make repairs at the transport
cost center (an activity-dependent statistical key Iigure).
O You can post both plan and actual statistical key Iigures.
O You can use statistical key Iigures as the tracing Iactor Ior periodic transactions
such as distribution or assessment, and Ior key Iigure analysis.
O You deIine statistical key Iigures as a Iixed value or as a totals value:
O The Iixed value (such as "employees") is carried over Irom the period in which
it is entered to all subsequent periods oI the same Iiscal year. You need enter a
new posting only iI the value changes. The Iiscal year total is the average oI the
period totals.
O You post the totals value (Ior example "telephone calls") only to the period in
which it was entered. For totals values, the Iiscal year total is the total oI all
period values.
O You can transIer statistical key Iigures Irom the Logistical InIormation System
(LIS) by assigning a key Iigure Irom the LIS to a statistical key Iigure in Cost
Center Accounting.
Cost of Production Accounting Logic
Explain the followings:

1. When we issue materials to production. following entry is happening:

Raw material consumption a/c. Dr.
Raw material stock a/c. Cr.

. When we receive the FG from the production.

Finished Good stock Dr.
Cost of Production Cr.

n fact. the raw material issues for production is part of Cost of Production only.
%hen where that is reflected in SAP. At the time of FG receipt only. Cost of
Production a/c is coming into picture.
By Ravi :

Let`s assume you are in a scenario where std cost actual cost..

A. Say, RM cost is 100, labor cost is 30.. So your FG cost is 130.

B. When you issue RM, Cons a/c is Dr and Inventory a/c is Cr Ior 100

Labor cost is debited to prod order via a secondary cost element. This does not result
in a FI entry.

C. Now, when you do GR, entry is FG Inventory a/c is Dr Ior 130 and cost oI
production is credit Ior 130 again.

This cost oI prod is nothing but your sum total oI RM inventory cost and labor cost....

The accounting logic here is, you have consumed one inventory (Charged to P&L)
and made another inventory....

When you consumed (RM), it is charged to P&L... So, now that you have made
another inventory (FG), the charged made to P&L is reversed and again the inventory
is Debited...

The charge reversal is done using another P&L account which is Cost oI Prod a/c
instead oI individual RM consumption a/c.

The idea is to show in P&L, RM consumption separately and at the same time reduce
the charge and bring back the inventory consumed in its processed Iorm (FG)...

That`s why, RM consumption, Cost oI prod a.c, COGS a/c all are mapped to the same
group in Financial Statement version in FI and are reported together.
Re-run Released Cost Estimate For Material
Question:

had run a cost estimate for a material and marked and released it for the current
period. ut the material underwent a few master data changes and wish to perform
the Cost run again with the same costing variant for the material in the same period.
The svstem is not permitting me to do this and gives me a message "CK 171 Material
xxxx in plant xxxx has a released cost estimate".

How can perform the cost run for the material in this case? What changes are
required before can execute the cost run with the same costing variant?

Answer:

There are how you can try to re-run the release cost estimate:

Reverse the cost estimate with CKR1.. Select "Current cost estimate", enter Plant/Mat
No and execute.

Re-run Irom CK11 once reversed.

or

Use transaction CKR1 to delete the Standard Cost created. In Control Parameters ,
using " Current Std Cost Estimate Tab". and execute.

AIter that run CK40 / CK11 again and mark and release the material.

Notes:

1. You can cancel the cost estimation through CKR1 and recreate cost estimation
through CK11.

2. But system won't allow you to release the cost twice in the same period
through CK4. That's the standard behavior oI system.

3. You need to change the price manually through MR1 (this is not recommended
but it is a work around).
Report Painter. How to reverse +/- signs
-----Original Message-----
Subiect: Report Painter, How to reverse /- signs
Dear Report Painter gurus,
I am trying to reverse the /- signs in my P/L statement, which I
created using Report Painter. Could someone please help me out ?
Regds,
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: Report Painter, How to reverse /- signs
Try using the Absolute value in your Iormula as Iollows:
Ex: (X003 / ABS X002)) * 100, or whatever variables you need to use.
I Iind that this usually reverses the appropriate signs.
In the report, there is also Iormatting available that will reverse the
signs.
Do: In Report Writer: Change report screen, (transaction GRR2),
Formatting--~Row--~reverse signs.
However, this will reverse all signs in the statement. You may not want
that.
Try both to see what happens.
Hope this helps.
-----End oI Message-----
Library for Report Painter/Writer
-----Original Message-----
Subiect: Library Ior Report Painter/Writer
Hi Sappers
I iust have one question regarding Report Writer/Painter
Is it possible to create new library based on whatever table we want which
is not SAP installed. For exmaple, in PCA, there is standard library
8A2 which si based on GLPCT. Is it possible to create new library based on
table say GLPCA? II so, what's menu path to add table in Library?
I am on 3.1H.
TIA
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: RE: Library Ior Report Painter/Writer
As consultants always say:
"Do you really want to create reports on table GLPCA?".
All the inIormation is in GLPCT and in addition perIormance with reporting
on GLPCA would probably be very bad.
I wanted to get period inIormation Iorm PCA. And it looks like GLPCT does
not give records per period (period Iield is 16 or other value) but only the
cumulative values per period are stored in speciIic Iields. So i thought I
needed a report on GLPCA, but I use libraries based on GLPTC to get the
inIormation Irom GLPCA. Apparently by selecting periods (RPMAX) in reports,
SAP will show all the GLPCA records Ior that period, but it will get it Irom
the summary record in GLPCT. Don't ask me how, but it works.
hope this helps.
Regards,
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: RE: Library Ior Report Painter/Writer
You should be able to make a dd table available to Report Painter / Writer iI you can
create an
Evaluation structure Ior the table.
To create an Eval structure In Logistics:
Tran MCS7 - Create evaluation Structure.
(Path: Logistics ~Sales & Distribution ~Sales InIo System ~Flexible Analysis
~Evaluation
Structure ~Create)
You could name the Eval Structure "ZFGLPCA", (must begin with "ZF").
Then click DD table reI~ ( iI this is a table and not another Eval structure.)
Enter the DD table "GLPCA". And click the check mark.
Then click Characteristics~ and mark all the characteristic Iields you want to report
on, (iI
you right click
you can select all~), then copy close~ copy~.
Do the same Ior Key Iigures~
Then generate the Eval structure back~ yes~ or Evaluation structure~ Generate~
AIter you created the Eval structure, you can create a library with this Eval structure
(table) in it.
GLPCA worked Ior me. We are on 3.1H P47
Good Luck
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: RE: Library Ior Report Painter/Writer
The 'tables' that are available Ior use in Report Painter/Writer are stored in
client-independent table T804A. As Iar as I know, there is no customizing transaction
Ior this table (at least not in
3.1H).
Please note that the "tables" deIined here are not necessarily physical tables; they can
also
be 'logical' tables which contain several physical tables, as deIined in table T804E
(also
client-independent). In your example, the table delivered Ior PCA report Library 8A2,
'GLPCT' is actually deIined in
table T804E to include data Irom physical tables GLPCT, GLPCA, and GLPCP.
You actually deIine the Library using transaction GR21/GR22. I have never actually
customized a
table deIinition Ior use in Report Painter/Writer; but it can be done through tables
T804A/T804E.
-----End oI Message-----
Report Painter. changing the tables assigned to libraries
-----Original Message-----
Subiect: Report Painter, changing the tables assigned to libraries
Dear Report Painter Iolks,
II I assign the wrong table to a Library, how
do I correct this mistake ?
Regds,
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: RE: Report Painter, changing the tables assigned to libraries
II you iust created the Library and assigned an existing table to it, you
can delete the Library using Report Writer, and start over.
-----End oI Message-----

Report Painter.Relationship between Report Groups and Reports
-----Original Message-----
Subiect: Report Painter,Relationship between Report Groups and Reports
Dear Report painter gurus,
What is the relationship between Report Groups and the
Reports assigned to them ? My problem is that, when I leave EMPTY
characteristics in one Report, I cannot Execute ALL other reports
assigned to the same Report Group as the First Report (the report with
the empty characteristics)
So it seems that whatever mistakes I make in one report, aIIects
ALL the other reports within the same Report Group. Can someone veriIy
this Ior me ?
Thanks in advance !
-----Reply Message-----
Subiect: RE: Report Painter,Relationship between Report Groups and Reports
I have Iound that by Iar the saIest way to proceed is to have a one to one
relation ship between a report group and a report. otherwise all sorts oI
strange things start to happen.
Cheersy cheers
-----End oI Message----

SAP F Functional Consultant Responsibilities
What is the meaning of SAP FCO Functional and SAP FCO %echnical?
SAP FICO Functional means Iunctional knowledge, by which one can proceed in
terms oI Iunctional process with FICO area as well as FICO conIiguration knowledge.
Whereas SAP FICO Technical consultant may be an ABAPER, who have short oI
knowledge oI FICO conIiguration and Iunctional knowledge as well and can proceed
Ior technical iobs e.g. reports development, client requirement, system modiIication
etc.
%o become a Pure Hard Core F functional consultant
Q: Can via %.Code FBL1 by selecting vendor with plant reference in selection
using search help field group.
Plant is not a Iield Ior Iinance or in sap it is FI module - this is Ior PP and MM
module, In case required, please deIine that as FI obiect Ior FI reports - like BA and
so on. ConIigure the plant as a BA and in all FI places you can capture BA in line
items oI vendors.
Spent little time on going through various standard reports oI SAP which are very rich
in itselI - Ior each report it has options oI all Iields oI master data , all Iields oI FI
document means around in my opinion around 400 options to select. Hence we
should Iirst get an idea oI Iields in masters and documents and how they are updated.
%o become a good consultant.... Every report of SAP standard is a gem - but we
always look Ior FAST FOOD without understanding the quality oI how standard is
the solutions..
Spent time in understanding - there are lot oI chapters available Ior reading .
Suggestions ... Understand the Finance Iunction Iirst upto closing oI books and
management reportings done in a practical way. Go to sap img screen - you will Iind
all options are there... II you go reverse way , sitting inside the car and asking -
anyone can help me in understanding what is the wheel in Iront oI driver used and
how to use it??
All the best - take it in the right spirit Ior a successIul Iuture
Reasons For Archiving Financial Accounting Data
What is financial archiving? Where it is used? Why? Where is it configured in
MG?
There are both technical and legal reasons Ior archiving Financial Accounting data.
Archiving:
1) Reduces storage and runtime problems caused by the constant growth oI
transaction data.
2) Makes master data easier to manage and to keep up to date.
3) Enables data to be accessed at a later date.
You can archive data no longer required in the online system using certain standard
Iunctions. This data is then stored in archive Iiles and deleted Irom the online
system. For legal and commercial reasons, it is important that you are able to access
archived data Iiles online again, and the reloading Iunction allows you to do this.
Data must meet certain conditions beIore it can be archived. Some oI these controls
are already deIined in the system, Ior instance the Iact that you cannot archive
documents that contain open items. Certain other controls are user-deIined.
Every archiving Iunction can be accessed Irom archive management (SARA).
To reach archive management, choose:
Tools --~ Administration --~ Archiving or Irom the Accounting --~ Financial
Accounting --~ General Ledger, Accounts
Receivable, Accounts Payable or Banks menus --~ Periodic processing Archiving
Archiving obiect~ .
When you access archive management Irom these menus, the archiving obiect is
deIaulted by the system in the Iield Obiect name. Otherwise you must enter the name
oI the archiving obiect manually.

You might also like